patch 8.0.1805: qf_parse_line() is too long

Problem:    qf_parse_line() is too long.
Solution:   Split it in parts.  Properly handle vim_realloc() failing.
            (Yegappan Lakshmanan, closes #2881)

.gitignore

@@ -38,6 +38,7 @@ src/pathdef.c
 src/Obj*/pathdef.c
 gvimext.dll
 gvimext.lib
+gvim.lib
 runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
 
 # Borland C++

.lgtm.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+# Format of this file: https://lgtm.com/help/lgtm/lgtm.yml-configuration-file
+path_classifiers:
+  documentation:
+    - runtime/tutor/tutor*

.travis.yml

@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 language: c
+dist: trusty
 
 os:
   - osx
@@ -20,7 +21,7 @@ env:
     "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
     # ASAN build
   - BUILD=yes TEST=test SANITIZER_CFLAGS="-g -O1 -DABORT_ON_INTERNAL_ERROR -DEXITFREE -fsanitize=address -fno-omit-frame-pointer"
-    FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan"
+    FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan" LSAN_OPTIONS="suppressions=$TRAVIS_BUILD_DIR/src/testdir/lsan-suppress.txt"
     "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
 
 sudo: false
@@ -41,12 +42,12 @@ matrix:
             "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-python3interp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
     - os: osx
       env: BUILD=yes TEST=test SANITIZER_CFLAGS="-g -O1 -DABORT_ON_INTERNAL_ERROR -DEXITFREE -fsanitize=address -fno-omit-frame-pointer"
-            FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan"
+            FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan" LSAN_OPTIONS="suppressions=$TRAVIS_BUILD_DIR/src/testdir/lsan-suppress.txt"
             "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
     - os: linux
-      compiler: gcc
+      compiler: clang
       env: BUILD=yes TEST=test SANITIZER_CFLAGS="-g -O1 -DABORT_ON_INTERNAL_ERROR -DEXITFREE -fsanitize=address -fno-omit-frame-pointer"
-            FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan"
+            FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan" LSAN_OPTIONS="suppressions=$TRAVIS_BUILD_DIR/src/testdir/lsan-suppress.txt"
             "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
     - os: linux
       compiler: clang
@@ -66,21 +67,30 @@ addons:
   apt:
     packages:
       - autoconf
+      - clang
       - lcov
       - libperl-dev
       - python-dev
       - python3-dev
-      - liblua5.1-0-dev
+      - liblua5.2-dev
-      - lua5.1
+      - lua5.2
+      - ruby-dev
       - cscope
+      - libgtk2.0-dev
 
 before_install:
+  - rvm reset
+    # Remove /opt/python/3.x.x/bin from $PATH for using system python3.
+    # ("pyenv global system" doesn't seem to work.)
+  - if [ "$TRAVIS_OS_NAME" = "linux" ] && which python3 | grep '/opt/python/' > /dev/null; then export PATH=$(echo $PATH | sed -e "s#$(echo $(which python3) | sed -e 's#/python3$##'):##"); fi
   - if [ "$COVERAGE" = "yes" ]; then pip install --user cpp-coveralls; fi
     # needed for https support for coveralls
     # building cffi only works with gcc, not with clang
   - if [ "$COVERAGE" = "yes" ]; then CC=gcc pip install --user pyopenssl ndg-httpsclient pyasn1; fi
     # Lua is not installed on Travis OSX
-  - if [ "$TRAVIS_OS_NAME" = "osx" ]; then brew install lua; export LUA_PREFIX=/usr/local; fi
+  - if [ "$TRAVIS_OS_NAME" = "osx" ]; then export HOMEBREW_NO_AUTO_UPDATE=1; brew update; brew install lua; export LUA_PREFIX=/usr/local; fi
+    # Use llvm-cov instead of gcov when compiler is clang.
+  - if [ "$TRAVIS_OS_NAME" = "linux" ] && [ "$CC" = "clang" ]; then ln -sf $(which llvm-cov) /home/travis/bin/gcov; fi
 
 # Start virtual framebuffer to be able to test the GUI. Does not work on OS X.
 before_script:
@@ -91,14 +101,14 @@ script:
   - if [ "$CHECK_AUTOCONF" = "yes" -a "$CC" = "gcc" ]; then make -C src autoconf; fi
   - if [ "x$SHADOWOPT" != x ]; then make -C src shadow; fi
   - (cd ${SRCDIR} && ./configure --with-features=$FEATURES $CONFOPT --enable-fail-if-missing && if [ "$BUILD" = "yes" ]; then make -j$NPROC; fi)
-  - if [ "$BUILD" = "yes" ]; then ${SRCDIR}/vim --version; fi
+    # Show Vim version and also if_xx versions.
-  - if [ -n "$ASAN_OPTIONS" ]; then export PATH=/usr/lib/llvm-$(clang -v 2>&1 | sed -n 's/.*version \([1-9]\.[0-9][0-9]*\).*/\1/p')/bin:$PATH; fi
+  - if [ "$BUILD" = "yes" ]; then ${SRCDIR}/vim --version; ${SRCDIR}/vim --not-a-term -u NONE -S ${SRCDIR}/testdir/if_ver-1.vim -c quit > /dev/null; ${SRCDIR}/vim --not-a-term -u NONE -S ${SRCDIR}/testdir/if_ver-2.vim -c quit > /dev/null; cat if_ver.txt; fi
   - make $SHADOWOPT $TEST
-  - if [ -n "$ASAN_OPTIONS" ]; then for log in $(find -type f -name 'asan.*' -size +0); do cat "$log"; err=1; done; fi
+  - if [ -n "$ASAN_OPTIONS" ]; then for log in $(find -type f -name 'asan.*' -size +0); do asan_symbolize < "$log"; err=1; done; fi
   - if [ -n "$err" ]; then exit 1; fi
 
 after_success:
-  - if [ "$COVERAGE" = "yes" ]; then ~/.local/bin/coveralls -b $SRCDIR -x .xs -e ${SRCDIR}/xxd -e ${SRCDIR}/if_perl.c --encodings utf-8 latin-1 EUC-KR; fi
+  - if [ "$COVERAGE" = "yes" ]; then ~/.local/bin/coveralls -b ${SRCDIR} -x .xs -e ${SRCDIR}/xxd -e ${SRCDIR}/if_perl.c --encodings utf-8 latin-1 EUC-KR; fi
-  - if [ "$COVERAGE" = "yes" ]; then  cd $SRCDIR && bash <(curl -s https://codecov.io/bash) ; fi
+  - if [ "$COVERAGE" = "yes" ]; then  cd ${SRCDIR} && bash <(curl -s https://codecov.io/bash) ; fi
 
 # vim:set sts=2 sw=2 tw=0 et:

Filelist

@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@
 # source files for all source archives
 SRC_ALL =	\
 		.hgignore \
+		.lgtm.yml \
 		.travis.yml \
 		appveyor.yml \
 		src/appveyor.bat \
@@ -12,6 +13,8 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/arabic.c \
 		src/arabic.h \
 		src/ascii.h \
+		src/beval.c \
+		src/beval.h \
 		src/blowfish.c \
 		src/buffer.c \
 		src/channel.c \
@@ -41,7 +44,6 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/gui.c \
 		src/gui.h \
 		src/gui_beval.c \
-		src/gui_beval.h \
 		src/hardcopy.c \
 		src/hashtab.c \
 		src/json.c \
@@ -105,9 +107,11 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/Make_all.mak \
 		src/testdir/*.in \
 		src/testdir/*.py \
+		src/testdir/lsan-suppress.txt \
 		src/testdir/sautest/autoload/*.vim \
 		src/testdir/runtest.vim \
 		src/testdir/shared.vim \
+		src/testdir/screendump.vim \
 		src/testdir/view_util.vim \
 		src/testdir/setup.vim \
 		src/testdir/gui_init.vim \
@@ -117,7 +121,6 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/test[0-9]*a.ok \
 		src/testdir/test_[a-z]*.ok \
 		src/testdir/test49.vim \
-		src/testdir/test60.vim \
 		src/testdir/test83-tags? \
 		src/testdir/test77a.com \
 		src/testdir/test_*.vim \
@@ -133,9 +136,14 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/pyxfile/*.py \
 		src/testdir/bench*.in \
 		src/testdir/bench*.vim \
+		src/testdir/dumps/*.dump \
 		src/testdir/samples/*.txt \
+		src/testdir/samples/test000 \
+		src/testdir/if_ver*.vim \
+		src/testdir/color_ramp.vim \
 		src/proto.h \
 		src/proto/arabic.pro \
+		src/proto/beval.pro \
 		src/proto/blowfish.pro \
 		src/proto/buffer.pro \
 		src/proto/channel.pro \
@@ -403,6 +411,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/msvcsetup.bat \
 		src/msvc2008.bat \
 		src/msvc2010.bat \
+		src/msvc2015.bat \
 		src/dimm.idl \
 		src/dlldata.c \
 		src/dosinst.c \
@@ -447,6 +456,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/xxd/Make_mvc.mak \
 		nsis/gvim.nsi \
 		nsis/gvim_version.nsh \
+		nsis/vimrc.ini \
 		nsis/README.txt \
 		uninstal.txt \
 		src/VisVim/Commands.cpp \
@@ -577,6 +587,7 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/doc/*.txt \
 		runtime/doc/Makefile \
 		runtime/doc/doctags.c \
+		runtime/doc/test_urls.vim \
 		runtime/doc/vim.1 \
 		runtime/doc/evim.1 \
 		runtime/doc/vimdiff.1 \
@@ -636,6 +647,7 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/doc/tags \
 		runtime/pack/dist/opt/shellmenu/plugin/shellmenu.vim \
 		runtime/pack/dist/opt/swapmouse/plugin/swapmouse.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/termdebug/plugin/termdebug.vim \
 
 # runtime files for all distributions without CR-NL translation
 RT_ALL_BIN =	\
@@ -653,9 +665,11 @@ RT_SCRIPTS =	\
 		runtime/makemenu.vim \
 		runtime/autoload/*.vim \
 		runtime/autoload/README.txt \
+		runtime/autoload/dist/*.vim \
 		runtime/autoload/xml/*.vim \
 		runtime/colors/*.vim \
 		runtime/colors/README.txt \
+		runtime/colors/tools/*.vim \
 		runtime/compiler/*.vim \
 		runtime/compiler/README.txt \
 		runtime/indent/*.vim \

Makefile

@@ -120,28 +120,28 @@ MINOR = 0
 #
 # MS-Windows:
 # - Run make on Unix to update the ".mo" files.
-# - Get libintl-8.dll, libiconv-2.dll and libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll. E.g. from
+# - Get 32 bit libintl-8.dll, libiconv-2.dll and libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll. E.g. from
 #   https://mlocati.github.io/gettext-iconv-windows/ .
 #   Use the "shared-32.zip file and extract the archive to get the files.
-#   Put them in the top directory, "make dosrt" uses them.
+#   Put them in the gettext32 directory, "make dosrt" uses them.
+# - Get 64 bit libintl-8.dll and libiconv-2.dll. E.g. from
+#   https://mlocati.github.io/gettext-iconv-windows/ .
+#   Use the "shared-64.zip file and extract the archive to get the files.
+#   Put them in the gettext64 directory, "make dosrt" uses them.
 # - > make dossrc
 #   > make dosrt
 #   Unpack dist/vim##rt.zip and dist/vim##src.zip on an MS-Windows PC.
+#   This creates the directory vim/vim80 and puts all files in there.
 # Win32 console version build:
-# - Set environment for Visual C++ 2008, e.g.:
+# - See src/INSTALLpc.txt for installing the compiler and SDK.
-#   > src/msvc2008.bat
+# - Set environment for Visual C++ 2015:
-#   Or: 
+#   > cd src
-#   > C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 9.0\VC\bin\vcvars32.bat
+#   > msvc2015.bat
-#   Or, when using the Visual C++ Toolkit 2003: "msvcsetup.bat" (adjust the
+# - Build the console binary:
-#   paths when necessary).
-#   For Windows 98/ME the 2003 version is required, but then the executable
-#   won't work on Windows 7 and 64 bit systems.
-# - > cd src
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak
-# - Run the tests:
+# - Run the tests and check the ouput:
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testclean
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak test
-#   - check the output.
 # - Rename (using ../tools/rename.bat):
 #           vim.exe to vimw32.exe
 #           tee/tee.exe to teew32.exe
@@ -152,19 +152,18 @@ MINOR = 0
 # Win32 GUI version build:
 # - > cd src
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes
-# - Run the tests:
+# - Run the tests and check the output:
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testclean
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testgvim
-#   - check the output.
 # - move "gvim.exe" to here (otherwise the OLE version will overwrite it).
 # - Move gvim.pdb to here.
 # - Copy "GvimExt/gvimext.dll" to here.
 # - Delete vimrun.exe, install.exe and uninstal.exe.
 # Win32 GUI version with OLE, PERL, Ruby, TCL, PYTHON and dynamic IME:
 # - Install the interfaces you want, see src/INSTALLpc.txt
+#   Adjust bigvim.bat to match the version of each interface you want.
 # - Build:
 #   > cd src
-#   Adjust bigvim.bat to match the version of each interface you want.
 #   > bigvim.bat
 # - Run the tests:
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testclean
@@ -188,10 +187,11 @@ MINOR = 0
 #	gvimext64.dll in src/GvimExt
 #	VisVim.dll in src/VisVim
 #   Note: VisVim needs to be build with MSVC 5, newer versions don't work.
-#   gvimext64.dll can be obtained from http://code.google.com/p/vim-win3264/
+#   gvimext64.dll can be obtained from:
-#	It is part of vim72.zip as vim72/gvimext.dll.
+#   https://github.com/vim/vim-win32-installer/releases
+#	It is part of gvim_8.0.*_x64.zip as vim/vim80/GvimExt/gvimext64.dll.
 # - Make sure there is a diff.exe two levels up (get it from a previous Vim
-#   version).
+#   version).  Also put winpty32.dll and winpty-agent.exe there.
 # - go to ../nsis and do:
 #   > makensis gvim.nsi  (takes a few minutes).
 #      ignore warning for libwinpthread-1.dll
@@ -467,9 +467,13 @@ dosrt_files: dist prepare no_title.vim
 		cp $$i dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang/$$n/LC_MESSAGES/vim.mo; \
 	      fi \
 	    done
-	cp libintl-8.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext32
-	cp libiconv-2.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
+	cp gettext32/libintl-8.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext32/
-	cp libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
+	cp gettext32/libiconv-2.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext32/
+	cp gettext32/libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext32/
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext64
+	cp gettext64/libintl-8.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext64/
+	cp gettext64/libiconv-2.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext64/
 
 
 # Used before uploading.  Don't delete the AAPDIR/sign files!
@@ -496,7 +500,10 @@ dosbin_gvim: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_GVIM)
 	cp vimrun.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimrun.exe
 	cp installw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/install.exe
 	cp uninstalw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/uninstal.exe
-	cp gvimext.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gvimext.dll
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/GvimExt32
+	cp gvimext.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/GvimExt32/gvimext.dll
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/GvimExt64
+	cp gvimext64.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/GvimExt64/gvimext.dll
 	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z gvim$(VERSION).zip vim <$(COMMENT_GVIM)
 	cp gvim.pdb dist/gvim$(VERSION).pdb
 

README.md

@@ -1,9 +1,11 @@
 `README.md` for version 8.0 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+
 [![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/vim/vim.svg?branch=master)](https://travis-ci.org/vim/vim)
 [![Coverage Status](https://codecov.io/gh/vim/vim/coverage.svg?branch=master)](https://codecov.io/gh/vim/vim?branch=master)
 [![Coverage Status](https://coveralls.io/repos/vim/vim/badge.svg?branch=master&service=github)](https://coveralls.io/github/vim/vim?branch=master)
 [![Appveyor Build status](https://ci.appveyor.com/api/projects/status/o2qht2kjm02sgghk?svg=true)](https://ci.appveyor.com/project/chrisbra/vim)
 [![Coverity Scan](https://scan.coverity.com/projects/241/badge.svg)](https://scan.coverity.com/projects/vim)
+[![Debian CI](https://badges.debian.net/badges/debian/testing/vim/version.svg)](https://buildd.debian.org/vim)
 
 
 ## What is Vim? ##

appveyor.yml

@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ matrix:
 
 before_build:
   - '"C:\Program Files\Microsoft SDKs\Windows\v7.1\Bin\SetEnv.cmd" /x64 /release'
+  - 'set INCLUDE=%INCLUDE%C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\8.1\Include\um'
 
 build_script:
   - src/appveyor.bat

nsis/README.txt

@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 This builds a one-click install for Vim for Win32 using the Nullsoft
-Installation System (NSIS), available at http://www.nullsoft.com/free/nsis/
+Installation System (NSIS), available at http://nsis.sourceforge.net/
 
 To build the installable .exe:
 
@@ -17,8 +17,14 @@ To build the installable .exe:
 	uninstal.exe,
 	xxd/xxd.exe,
 
+    Then execute tools/rename.bat to rename the executables. (mv command is
+    required.)
+
 3.  Go to the GvimExt directory and build gvimext.dll (or get it from a binary
-    archive).
+    archive).  Both 64- and 32-bit versions are needed and should be placed
+    as follows:
+	64-bit: src/GvimExt/gvimext64.dll
+	32-bit: src/GvimExt/gvimext.dll
 
 4.  Go to the VisVim directory and build VisVim.dll (or get it from a binary
     archive).
@@ -27,13 +33,35 @@ To build the installable .exe:
     get them from a binary archive).
 
 6.  Get a "diff.exe" program and put it in the "../.." directory (above the
-    "vim61" directory, it's the same for all Vim versions).
+    "vim80" directory, it's the same for all Vim versions).
     You can find one in previous Vim versions or in this archive:
 		http://www.mossbayeng.com/~ron/vim/diffutils.tar.gz
+    Also put winpty32.dll and winpty-agent.exe there.
 
 7.  Do "make uganda.nsis.txt" in runtime/doc.  This requires sed, you may have
     to do this on Unix.  Make sure the file is in DOS file format!
 
+8.  Get gettext and iconv DLLs from the following site:
+	https://github.com/mlocati/gettext-iconv-windows/releases
+    Both 64- and 32-bit versions are needed.
+    Download the files gettextX.X.X.X-iconvX.XX-shared-{32,64}.zip, extract
+    DLLs and place them as follows:
+
+	<GETTEXT directory>
+	    |
+	    + gettext32/
+	    |	libintl-8.dll
+	    |	libiconv-2.dll
+	    |	libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+	    |
+	    ` gettext64/
+		libintl-8.dll
+		libiconv-2.dll
+
+    The default <GETTEXT directory> is "..", however, you can change it by
+    passing /DGETTEXT=... option to the makensis command.
+
+
 Install NSIS if you didn't do that already.
 Also install UPX, if you want a compressed file.
 

nsis/gvim.nsi

@@ -20,8 +20,15 @@
   !define VIMTOOLS ..\..
 !endif
 
+# Location of gettext.
+# It must contain two directories: gettext32 and gettext64.
+# See README.txt for detail.
+!ifndef GETTEXT
+  !define GETTEXT ${VIMRT}
+!endif
+
 # Comment the next line if you don't have UPX.
-# Get it at http://upx.sourceforge.net
+# Get it at https://upx.github.io/
 !define HAVE_UPX
 
 # comment the next line if you do not want to add Native Language Support
@@ -76,11 +83,17 @@ SilentInstall normal
 # These are the pages we use
 Page license
 Page components
+Page custom SetCustom ValidateCustom ": _vimrc setting"
 Page directory "" "" CheckInstallDir
 Page instfiles
 UninstPage uninstConfirm
 UninstPage instfiles
 
+# Reserve files
+# Needed for showing the _vimrc setting page faster.
+ReserveFile /plugin InstallOptions.dll
+ReserveFile vimrc.ini
+
 ##########################################################
 # Functions
 
@@ -128,6 +141,10 @@ Function .onInit
   StrCpy $1 "-register-OLE"
   StrCpy $2 "gvim evim gview gvimdiff vimtutor"
 
+  # Extract InstallOptions files
+  # $PLUGINSDIR will automatically be removed when the installer closes
+  InitPluginsDir
+  File /oname=$PLUGINSDIR\vimrc.ini "vimrc.ini"
 FunctionEnd
 
 Function .onUserAbort
@@ -179,7 +196,7 @@ FunctionEnd
 
 ##########################################################
 Section "Vim executables and runtime files"
-	SectionIn 1 2 3
+	SectionIn 1 2 3 RO
 
 	# we need also this here if the user changes the instdir
 	StrCpy $0 "$INSTDIR\vim${VER_MAJOR}${VER_MINOR}"
@@ -191,13 +208,16 @@ Section "Vim executables and runtime files"
 	File ${VIMSRC}\vimrun.exe
 	File /oname=tee.exe ${VIMSRC}\teew32.exe
 	File /oname=xxd.exe ${VIMSRC}\xxdw32.exe
-	File ${VIMTOOLS}\diff.exe
 	File ${VIMRT}\vimtutor.bat
 	File ${VIMRT}\README.txt
 	File ..\uninstal.txt
 	File ${VIMRT}\*.vim
 	File ${VIMRT}\rgb.txt
 
+	File ${VIMTOOLS}\diff.exe
+	File ${VIMTOOLS}\winpty32.dll
+	File ${VIMTOOLS}\winpty-agent.exe
+
 	SetOutPath $0\colors
 	File ${VIMRT}\colors\*.*
 
@@ -216,6 +236,14 @@ Section "Vim executables and runtime files"
 
 	SetOutPath $0\macros
 	File ${VIMRT}\macros\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\macros\hanoi
+	File ${VIMRT}\macros\hanoi\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\macros\life
+	File ${VIMRT}\macros\life\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\macros\maze
+	File ${VIMRT}\macros\maze\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\macros\urm
+	File ${VIMRT}\macros\urm\*.*
 
 	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\dvorak
 	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\dvorak\*.*
@@ -245,6 +273,9 @@ Section "Vim executables and runtime files"
 	SetOutPath $0\autoload
 	File ${VIMRT}\autoload\*.*
 
+	SetOutPath $0\autoload\dist
+	File ${VIMRT}\autoload\dist\*.*
+
 	SetOutPath $0\autoload\xml
 	File ${VIMRT}\autoload\xml\*.*
 
@@ -317,24 +348,67 @@ Section "Add an Edit-with-Vim context menu entry"
 	SetOutPath $0
 	ClearErrors
 	SetOverwrite try
+
 	${If} ${RunningX64}
+	  # Install 64-bit gvimext.dll into the GvimExt64 directory.
+	  SetOutPath $0\GvimExt64
+	  ClearErrors
 	  File /oname=gvimext.dll ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext64.dll
-	${Else}
+!ifdef HAVE_NLS
-	  File /oname=gvimext.dll ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+	  File ${GETTEXT}\gettext64\libintl-8.dll
+	  File ${GETTEXT}\gettext64\libiconv-2.dll
+!endif
+
+	  IfErrors 0 GvimExt64Done
+
+	  # Can't copy gvimext.dll, create it under another name and rename it
+	  # on next reboot.
+	  GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt64
+	  File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext64.dll
+	  Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt64\gvimext.dll
+!ifdef HAVE_NLS
+	  GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt64
+	  File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext64\libintl-8.dll
+	  Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt64\libintl-8.dll
+	  GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt64
+	  File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext64\libiconv-2.dll
+	  Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt64\libiconv-2.dll
+!endif
 	${EndIf}
-	IfErrors 0 GvimExtDone
+
+	GvimExt64Done:
+
+	# Install 32-bit gvimext.dll into the GvimExt32 directory.
+	SetOutPath $0\GvimExt32
+	ClearErrors
+
+	File /oname=gvimext.dll ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+!ifdef HAVE_NLS
+	File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libintl-8.dll
+	File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libiconv-2.dll
+	File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+!endif
+
+	IfErrors 0 GvimExt32Done
 
 	# Can't copy gvimext.dll, create it under another name and rename it on
 	# next reboot.
-	GetTempFileName $3 $0
+	GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt32
-	${If} ${RunningX64}
+	File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
-	  File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext64.dll
+	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt32\gvimext.dll
-	${Else}
+!ifdef HAVE_NLS
-	  File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+	GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt32
-	${EndIf}
+	File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libintl-8.dll
-	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\gvimext.dll
+	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt32\libintl-8.dll
+	GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt32
+	File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libiconv-2.dll
+	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt32\libiconv-2.dll
+	GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt32
+	File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt32\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+!endif
 
-	GvimExtDone:
+	GvimExt32Done:
 	SetOverwrite lastused
 
 	# We don't have a separate entry for the "Open With..." menu, assume
@@ -343,7 +417,7 @@ Section "Add an Edit-with-Vim context menu entry"
 SectionEnd
 
 ##########################################################
-Section "Create a _vimrc if it doesn't exist"
+Section "Create a _vimrc if it doesn't exist" sec_vimrc_id
 	SectionIn 1 3
 
 	StrCpy $1 "$1 -create-vimrc"
@@ -383,10 +457,10 @@ SectionEnd
 		File ${VIMRT}\keymap\README.txt
 		File ${VIMRT}\keymap\*.vim
 		SetOutPath $0
-		File ${VIMRT}\libintl-8.dll
+		File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libintl-8.dll
-		File ${VIMRT}\libiconv-2.dll
+		File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libiconv-2.dll
-		File /nonfatal ${VIMRT}\libwinpthread-1.dll
+		#File /nonfatal ${VIMRT}\libwinpthread-1.dll
-		File /nonfatal ${VIMRT}\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+		File /nonfatal ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
 	SectionEnd
 !endif
 
@@ -401,6 +475,43 @@ Section -post
 	BringToFront
 SectionEnd
 
+##########################################################
+Function SetCustom
+	# Display the InstallOptions dialog
+
+	# Check if a _vimrc should be created
+	SectionGetFlags ${sec_vimrc_id} $3
+	IntOp $3 $3 & 1
+	StrCmp $3 "1" +2 0
+	  Abort
+
+	InstallOptions::dialog "$PLUGINSDIR\vimrc.ini"
+	Pop $3
+FunctionEnd
+
+Function ValidateCustom
+	ReadINIStr $3 "$PLUGINSDIR\vimrc.ini" "Field 2" "State"
+	StrCmp $3 "1" 0 +3
+	  StrCpy $1 "$1 -vimrc-remap no"
+	  Goto behave
+
+	  StrCpy $1 "$1 -vimrc-remap win"
+
+	behave:
+	ReadINIStr $3 "$PLUGINSDIR\vimrc.ini" "Field 5" "State"
+	StrCmp $3 "1" 0 +3
+	  StrCpy $1 "$1 -vimrc-behave unix"
+	  Goto done
+
+	ReadINIStr $3 "$PLUGINSDIR\vimrc.ini" "Field 6" "State"
+	StrCmp $3 "1" 0 +3
+	  StrCpy $1 "$1 -vimrc-behave mswin"
+	  Goto done
+
+	  StrCpy $1 "$1 -vimrc-behave default"
+	done:
+FunctionEnd
+
 ##########################################################
 Section Uninstall
 	# Apparently $INSTDIR is set to the directory where the uninstaller is
@@ -426,6 +537,11 @@ Section Uninstall
 	   $\nIt contains the Vim executables and runtime files." IDNO NoRemoveExes
 
 	Delete /REBOOTOK $0\*.dll
+	Delete /REBOOTOK $0\GvimExt32\*.dll
+	${If} ${RunningX64}
+	  Delete /REBOOTOK $0\GvimExt64\*.dll
+	${EndIf}
+
 	ClearErrors
 	# Remove everything but *.dll files.  Avoids that
 	# a lot remains when gvimext.dll cannot be deleted.

nsis/vimrc.ini

@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+[Settings]
+NumFields=7
+
+[Field 1]
+Type=GroupBox
+Left=0
+Right=-1
+Top=0
+Bottom=53
+Text=" Key remapping "
+
+[Field 2]
+Type=radiobutton
+Text=Do not remap keys for Windows behavior (Default)
+Left=10
+Right=-10
+Top=17
+Bottom=25
+State=1
+Flags=GROUP
+
+[Field 3]
+Type=radiobutton
+Text=Remap a few keys for Windows behavior (<C-V>, <C-C>, <C-A>, <C-S>, <C-F>, etc)
+Left=10
+Right=-10
+Top=30
+Bottom=47
+State=0
+Flags=NOTABSTOP
+
+[Field 4]
+Type=GroupBox
+Left=0
+Right=-1
+Top=55
+Bottom=-5
+Text=" Mouse behavior "
+
+[Field 5]
+Type=radiobutton
+Text=Right button extends selection, left button starts visual mode (Unix)
+Left=10
+Right=-5
+Top=72
+Bottom=80
+State=0
+Flags=GROUP
+
+[Field 6]
+Type=radiobutton
+Text=Right button has a popup menu, left button starts select mode (Windows)
+Left=10
+Right=-5
+Top=85
+Bottom=93
+State=0
+Flags=NOTABSTOP
+
+[Field 7]
+Type=radiobutton
+Text=Right button has a popup menu, left button starts visual mode (Default)
+Left=10
+Right=-5
+Top=98
+Bottom=106
+State=1
+Flags=NOTABSTOP

runtime/autoload/ada.vim

@@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ function ada#Map_Menu (Text, Keys, Command)
 	\" :" . a:Command
       execute
 	\ "inoremap <buffer>" .
-	\ " <Learder>a" . a:Keys .
+	\ " <Leader>a" . a:Keys .
 	\" <C-O>:" . a:Command
    endif
    return

runtime/autoload/dist/ft.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,745 @@
+" Vim functions for file type detection
+"
+" Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+" Last Change:	2017 Dec 05
+
+" These functions are moved here from runtime/filetype.vim to make startup
+" faster.
+
+" Line continuation is used here, remove 'C' from 'cpoptions'
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+func dist#ft#Check_inp()
+  if getline(1) =~ '^\*'
+    setf abaqus
+  else
+    let n = 1
+    if line("$") > 500
+      let nmax = 500
+    else
+      let nmax = line("$")
+    endif
+    while n <= nmax
+      if getline(n) =~? "^header surface data"
+	setf trasys
+	break
+      endif
+      let n = n + 1
+    endwhile
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+" This function checks for the kind of assembly that is wanted by the user, or
+" can be detected from the first five lines of the file.
+func dist#ft#FTasm()
+  " make sure b:asmsyntax exists
+  if !exists("b:asmsyntax")
+    let b:asmsyntax = ""
+  endif
+
+  if b:asmsyntax == ""
+    call dist#ft#FTasmsyntax()
+  endif
+
+  " if b:asmsyntax still isn't set, default to asmsyntax or GNU
+  if b:asmsyntax == ""
+    if exists("g:asmsyntax")
+      let b:asmsyntax = g:asmsyntax
+    else
+      let b:asmsyntax = "asm"
+    endif
+  endif
+
+  exe "setf " . fnameescape(b:asmsyntax)
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTasmsyntax()
+  " see if file contains any asmsyntax=foo overrides. If so, change
+  " b:asmsyntax appropriately
+  let head = " ".getline(1)." ".getline(2)." ".getline(3)." ".getline(4).
+	\" ".getline(5)." "
+  let match = matchstr(head, '\sasmsyntax=\zs[a-zA-Z0-9]\+\ze\s')
+  if match != ''
+    let b:asmsyntax = match
+  elseif ((head =~? '\.title') || (head =~? '\.ident') || (head =~? '\.macro') || (head =~? '\.subtitle') || (head =~? '\.library'))
+    let b:asmsyntax = "vmasm"
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+" Check if one of the first five lines contains "VB_Name".  In that case it is
+" probably a Visual Basic file.  Otherwise it's assumed to be "alt" filetype.
+func dist#ft#FTVB(alt)
+  if getline(1).getline(2).getline(3).getline(4).getline(5) =~? 'VB_Name\|Begin VB\.\(Form\|MDIForm\|UserControl\)'
+    setf vb
+  else
+    exe "setf " . a:alt
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTbtm()
+  if exists("g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm") && g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm
+    setf dosbatch
+  else
+    setf btm
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#BindzoneCheck(default)
+  if getline(1).getline(2).getline(3).getline(4) =~ '^; <<>> DiG [0-9.]\+.* <<>>\|$ORIGIN\|$TTL\|IN\s\+SOA'
+    setf bindzone
+  elseif a:default != ''
+    exe 'setf ' . a:default
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTlpc()
+  if exists("g:lpc_syntax_for_c")
+    let lnum = 1
+    while lnum <= 12
+      if getline(lnum) =~# '^\(//\|inherit\|private\|protected\|nosave\|string\|object\|mapping\|mixed\)'
+	setf lpc
+	return
+      endif
+      let lnum = lnum + 1
+    endwhile
+  endif
+  setf c
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTheader()
+  if match(getline(1, min([line("$"), 200])), '^@\(interface\|end\|class\)') > -1
+    if exists("g:c_syntax_for_h")
+      setf objc
+    else
+      setf objcpp
+    endif
+  elseif exists("g:c_syntax_for_h")
+    setf c
+  elseif exists("g:ch_syntax_for_h")
+    setf ch
+  else
+    setf cpp
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+" This function checks if one of the first ten lines start with a '@'.  In
+" that case it is probably a change file.
+" If the first line starts with # or ! it's probably a ch file.
+" If a line has "main", "include", "//" ir "/*" it's probably ch.
+" Otherwise CHILL is assumed.
+func dist#ft#FTchange()
+  let lnum = 1
+  while lnum <= 10
+    if getline(lnum)[0] == '@'
+      setf change
+      return
+    endif
+    if lnum == 1 && (getline(1)[0] == '#' || getline(1)[0] == '!')
+      setf ch
+      return
+    endif
+    if getline(lnum) =~ "MODULE"
+      setf chill
+      return
+    endif
+    if getline(lnum) =~ 'main\s*(\|#\s*include\|//'
+      setf ch
+      return
+    endif
+    let lnum = lnum + 1
+  endwhile
+  setf chill
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTent()
+  " This function checks for valid cl syntax in the first five lines.
+  " Look for either an opening comment, '#', or a block start, '{".
+  " If not found, assume SGML.
+  let lnum = 1
+  while lnum < 6
+    let line = getline(lnum)
+    if line =~ '^\s*[#{]'
+      setf cl
+      return
+    elseif line !~ '^\s*$'
+      " Not a blank line, not a comment, and not a block start,
+      " so doesn't look like valid cl code.
+      break
+    endif
+    let lnum = lnum + 1
+  endw
+  setf dtd
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#EuphoriaCheck()
+  if exists('g:filetype_euphoria')
+    exe 'setf ' . g:filetype_euphoria
+  else
+    setf euphoria3
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#DtraceCheck()
+  let lines = getline(1, min([line("$"), 100]))
+  if match(lines, '^module\>\|^import\>') > -1
+    " D files often start with a module and/or import statement.
+    setf d
+  elseif match(lines, '^#!\S\+dtrace\|#pragma\s\+D\s\+option\|:\S\{-}:\S\{-}:') > -1
+    setf dtrace
+  else
+    setf d
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTe()
+  if exists('g:filetype_euphoria')
+    exe 'setf ' . g:filetype_euphoria
+  else
+    let n = 1
+    while n < 100 && n < line("$")
+      if getline(n) =~ "^\\s*\\(<'\\|'>\\)\\s*$"
+	setf specman
+	return
+      endif
+      let n = n + 1
+    endwhile
+    setf eiffel
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+" Distinguish between HTML, XHTML and Django
+func dist#ft#FThtml()
+  let n = 1
+  while n < 10 && n < line("$")
+    if getline(n) =~ '\<DTD\s\+XHTML\s'
+      setf xhtml
+      return
+    endif
+    if getline(n) =~ '{%\s*\(extends\|block\|load\)\>\|{#\s\+'
+      setf htmldjango
+      return
+    endif
+    let n = n + 1
+  endwhile
+  setf html
+endfunc
+
+" Distinguish between standard IDL and MS-IDL
+func dist#ft#FTidl()
+  let n = 1
+  while n < 50 && n < line("$")
+    if getline(n) =~ '^\s*import\s\+"\(unknwn\|objidl\)\.idl"'
+      setf msidl
+      return
+    endif
+    let n = n + 1
+  endwhile
+  setf idl
+endfunc
+
+" Distinguish between "default" and Cproto prototype file. */
+func dist#ft#ProtoCheck(default)
+  " Cproto files have a comment in the first line and a function prototype in
+  " the second line, it always ends in ";".  Indent files may also have
+  " comments, thus we can't match comments to see the difference.
+  " IDL files can have a single ';' in the second line, require at least one
+  " chacter before the ';'.
+  if getline(2) =~ '.;$'
+    setf cpp
+  else
+    exe 'setf ' . a:default
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTm()
+  let n = 1
+  let saw_comment = 0 " Whether we've seen a multiline comment leader.
+  while n < 100
+    let line = getline(n)
+    if line =~ '^\s*/\*'
+      " /* ... */ is a comment in Objective C and Murphi, so we can't conclude
+      " it's either of them yet, but track this as a hint in case we don't see
+      " anything more definitive.
+      let saw_comment = 1
+    endif
+    if line =~ '^\s*\(#\s*\(include\|import\)\>\|@import\>\|//\)'
+      setf objc
+      return
+    endif
+    if line =~ '^\s*%'
+      setf matlab
+      return
+    endif
+    if line =~ '^\s*(\*'
+      setf mma
+      return
+    endif
+    if line =~ '^\c\s*\(\(type\|var\)\>\|--\)'
+      setf murphi
+      return
+    endif
+    let n = n + 1
+  endwhile
+
+  if saw_comment
+    " We didn't see anything definitive, but this looks like either Objective C
+    " or Murphi based on the comment leader. Assume the former as it is more
+    " common.
+    setf objc
+  elseif exists("g:filetype_m")
+    " Use user specified default filetype for .m
+    exe "setf " . g:filetype_m
+  else
+    " Default is matlab
+    setf matlab
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTmms()
+  let n = 1
+  while n < 10
+    let line = getline(n)
+    if line =~ '^\s*\(%\|//\)' || line =~ '^\*'
+      setf mmix
+      return
+    endif
+    if line =~ '^\s*#'
+      setf make
+      return
+    endif
+    let n = n + 1
+  endwhile
+  setf mmix
+endfunc
+
+" This function checks if one of the first five lines start with a dot.  In
+" that case it is probably an nroff file: 'filetype' is set and 1 is returned.
+func dist#ft#FTnroff()
+  if getline(1)[0] . getline(2)[0] . getline(3)[0] . getline(4)[0] . getline(5)[0] =~ '\.'
+    setf nroff
+    return 1
+  endif
+  return 0
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTmm()
+  let n = 1
+  while n < 10
+    let line = getline(n)
+    if line =~ '^\s*\(#\s*\(include\|import\)\>\|@import\>\|/\*\)'
+      setf objcpp
+      return
+    endif
+    let n = n + 1
+  endwhile
+  setf nroff
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTpl()
+  if exists("g:filetype_pl")
+    exe "setf " . g:filetype_pl
+  else
+    " recognize Prolog by specific text in the first non-empty line
+    " require a blank after the '%' because Perl uses "%list" and "%translate"
+    let l = getline(nextnonblank(1))
+    if l =~ '\<prolog\>' || l =~ '^\s*\(%\+\(\s\|$\)\|/\*\)' || l =~ ':-'
+      setf prolog
+    else
+      setf perl
+    endif
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTinc()
+  if exists("g:filetype_inc")
+    exe "setf " . g:filetype_inc
+  else
+    let lines = getline(1).getline(2).getline(3)
+    if lines =~? "perlscript"
+      setf aspperl
+    elseif lines =~ "<%"
+      setf aspvbs
+    elseif lines =~ "<?"
+      setf php
+    else
+      call dist#ft#FTasmsyntax()
+      if exists("b:asmsyntax")
+	exe "setf " . fnameescape(b:asmsyntax)
+      else
+	setf pov
+      endif
+    endif
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTprogress_cweb()
+  if exists("g:filetype_w")
+    exe "setf " . g:filetype_w
+    return
+  endif
+  if getline(1) =~ '&ANALYZE' || getline(3) =~ '&GLOBAL-DEFINE'
+    setf progress
+  else
+    setf cweb
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTprogress_asm()
+  if exists("g:filetype_i")
+    exe "setf " . g:filetype_i
+    return
+  endif
+  " This function checks for an assembly comment the first ten lines.
+  " If not found, assume Progress.
+  let lnum = 1
+  while lnum <= 10 && lnum < line('$')
+    let line = getline(lnum)
+    if line =~ '^\s*;' || line =~ '^\*'
+      call dist#ft#FTasm()
+      return
+    elseif line !~ '^\s*$' || line =~ '^/\*'
+      " Not an empty line: Doesn't look like valid assembly code.
+      " Or it looks like a Progress /* comment
+      break
+    endif
+    let lnum = lnum + 1
+  endw
+  setf progress
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTprogress_pascal()
+  if exists("g:filetype_p")
+    exe "setf " . g:filetype_p
+    return
+  endif
+  " This function checks for valid Pascal syntax in the first ten lines.
+  " Look for either an opening comment or a program start.
+  " If not found, assume Progress.
+  let lnum = 1
+  while lnum <= 10 && lnum < line('$')
+    let line = getline(lnum)
+    if line =~ '^\s*\(program\|unit\|procedure\|function\|const\|type\|var\)\>'
+	\ || line =~ '^\s*{' || line =~ '^\s*(\*'
+      setf pascal
+      return
+    elseif line !~ '^\s*$' || line =~ '^/\*'
+      " Not an empty line: Doesn't look like valid Pascal code.
+      " Or it looks like a Progress /* comment
+      break
+    endif
+    let lnum = lnum + 1
+  endw
+  setf progress
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTr()
+  let max = line("$") > 50 ? 50 : line("$")
+
+  for n in range(1, max)
+    " Rebol is easy to recognize, check for that first
+    if getline(n) =~? '\<REBOL\>'
+      setf rebol
+      return
+    endif
+  endfor
+
+  for n in range(1, max)
+    " R has # comments
+    if getline(n) =~ '^\s*#'
+      setf r
+      return
+    endif
+    " Rexx has /* comments */
+    if getline(n) =~ '^\s*/\*'
+      setf rexx
+      return
+    endif
+  endfor
+
+  " Nothing recognized, use user default or assume Rexx
+  if exists("g:filetype_r")
+    exe "setf " . g:filetype_r
+  else
+    " Rexx used to be the default, but R appears to be much more popular.
+    setf r
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#McSetf()
+  " Rely on the file to start with a comment.
+  " MS message text files use ';', Sendmail files use '#' or 'dnl'
+  for lnum in range(1, min([line("$"), 20]))
+    let line = getline(lnum)
+    if line =~ '^\s*\(#\|dnl\)'
+      setf m4  " Sendmail .mc file
+      return
+    elseif line =~ '^\s*;'
+      setf msmessages  " MS Message text file
+      return
+    endif
+  endfor
+  setf m4  " Default: Sendmail .mc file
+endfunc
+
+" Called from filetype.vim and scripts.vim.
+func dist#ft#SetFileTypeSH(name)
+  if expand("<amatch>") =~ g:ft_ignore_pat
+    return
+  endif
+  if a:name =~ '\<csh\>'
+    " Some .sh scripts contain #!/bin/csh.
+    call dist#ft#SetFileTypeShell("csh")
+    return
+  elseif a:name =~ '\<tcsh\>'
+    " Some .sh scripts contain #!/bin/tcsh.
+    call dist#ft#SetFileTypeShell("tcsh")
+    return
+  elseif a:name =~ '\<zsh\>'
+    " Some .sh scripts contain #!/bin/zsh.
+    call dist#ft#SetFileTypeShell("zsh")
+    return
+  elseif a:name =~ '\<ksh\>'
+    let b:is_kornshell = 1
+    if exists("b:is_bash")
+      unlet b:is_bash
+    endif
+    if exists("b:is_sh")
+      unlet b:is_sh
+    endif
+  elseif exists("g:bash_is_sh") || a:name =~ '\<bash\>' || a:name =~ '\<bash2\>'
+    let b:is_bash = 1
+    if exists("b:is_kornshell")
+      unlet b:is_kornshell
+    endif
+    if exists("b:is_sh")
+      unlet b:is_sh
+    endif
+  elseif a:name =~ '\<sh\>'
+    let b:is_sh = 1
+    if exists("b:is_kornshell")
+      unlet b:is_kornshell
+    endif
+    if exists("b:is_bash")
+      unlet b:is_bash
+    endif
+  endif
+  call dist#ft#SetFileTypeShell("sh")
+endfunc
+
+" For shell-like file types, check for an "exec" command hidden in a comment,
+" as used for Tcl.
+" Also called from scripts.vim, thus can't be local to this script.
+func dist#ft#SetFileTypeShell(name)
+  if expand("<amatch>") =~ g:ft_ignore_pat
+    return
+  endif
+  let l = 2
+  while l < 20 && l < line("$") && getline(l) =~ '^\s*\(#\|$\)'
+    " Skip empty and comment lines.
+    let l = l + 1
+  endwhile
+  if l < line("$") && getline(l) =~ '\s*exec\s' && getline(l - 1) =~ '^\s*#.*\\$'
+    " Found an "exec" line after a comment with continuation
+    let n = substitute(getline(l),'\s*exec\s\+\([^ ]*/\)\=', '', '')
+    if n =~ '\<tclsh\|\<wish'
+      setf tcl
+      return
+    endif
+  endif
+  exe "setf " . a:name
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#CSH()
+  if exists("g:filetype_csh")
+    call dist#ft#SetFileTypeShell(g:filetype_csh)
+  elseif &shell =~ "tcsh"
+    call dist#ft#SetFileTypeShell("tcsh")
+  else
+    call dist#ft#SetFileTypeShell("csh")
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+let s:ft_rules_udev_rules_pattern = '^\s*\cudev_rules\s*=\s*"\([^"]\{-1,}\)/*".*'
+func dist#ft#FTRules()
+  let path = expand('<amatch>:p')
+  if path =~ '^/\(etc/udev/\%(rules\.d/\)\=.*\.rules\|lib/udev/\%(rules\.d/\)\=.*\.rules\)$'
+    setf udevrules
+    return
+  endif
+  if path =~ '^/etc/ufw/'
+    setf conf  " Better than hog
+    return
+  endif
+  if path =~ '^/\(etc\|usr/share\)/polkit-1/rules\.d'
+    setf javascript
+    return
+  endif
+  try
+    let config_lines = readfile('/etc/udev/udev.conf')
+  catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E484/
+    setf hog
+    return
+  endtry
+  let dir = expand('<amatch>:p:h')
+  for line in config_lines
+    if line =~ s:ft_rules_udev_rules_pattern
+      let udev_rules = substitute(line, s:ft_rules_udev_rules_pattern, '\1', "")
+      if dir == udev_rules
+	setf udevrules
+      endif
+      break
+    endif
+  endfor
+  setf hog
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#SQL()
+  if exists("g:filetype_sql")
+    exe "setf " . g:filetype_sql
+  else
+    setf sql
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+" If the file has an extension of 't' and is in a directory 't' or 'xt' then
+" it is almost certainly a Perl test file.
+" If the first line starts with '#' and contains 'perl' it's probably a Perl
+" file.
+" (Slow test) If a file contains a 'use' statement then it is almost certainly
+" a Perl file.
+func dist#ft#FTperl()
+  let dirname = expand("%:p:h:t")
+  if expand("%:e") == 't' && (dirname == 't' || dirname == 'xt')
+    setf perl
+    return 1
+  endif
+  if getline(1)[0] == '#' && getline(1) =~ 'perl'
+    setf perl
+    return 1
+  endif
+  let save_cursor = getpos('.')
+  call cursor(1,1)
+  let has_use = search('^use\s\s*\k', 'c', 30)
+  call setpos('.', save_cursor)
+  if has_use
+    setf perl
+    return 1
+  endif
+  return 0
+endfunc
+
+" Choose context, plaintex, or tex (LaTeX) based on these rules:
+" 1. Check the first line of the file for "%&<format>".
+" 2. Check the first 1000 non-comment lines for LaTeX or ConTeXt keywords.
+" 3. Default to "latex" or to g:tex_flavor, can be set in user's vimrc.
+func dist#ft#FTtex()
+  let firstline = getline(1)
+  if firstline =~ '^%&\s*\a\+'
+    let format = tolower(matchstr(firstline, '\a\+'))
+    let format = substitute(format, 'pdf', '', '')
+    if format == 'tex'
+      let format = 'latex'
+    elseif format == 'plaintex'
+      let format = 'plain'
+    endif
+  elseif expand('%') =~ 'tex/context/.*/.*.tex'
+    let format = 'context'
+  else
+    " Default value, may be changed later:
+    let format = exists("g:tex_flavor") ? g:tex_flavor : 'plain'
+    " Save position, go to the top of the file, find first non-comment line.
+    let save_cursor = getpos('.')
+    call cursor(1,1)
+    let firstNC = search('^\s*[^[:space:]%]', 'c', 1000)
+    if firstNC " Check the next thousand lines for a LaTeX or ConTeXt keyword.
+      let lpat = 'documentclass\>\|usepackage\>\|begin{\|newcommand\>\|renewcommand\>'
+      let cpat = 'start\a\+\|setup\a\+\|usemodule\|enablemode\|enableregime\|setvariables\|useencoding\|usesymbols\|stelle\a\+\|verwende\a\+\|stel\a\+\|gebruik\a\+\|usa\a\+\|imposta\a\+\|regle\a\+\|utilisemodule\>'
+      let kwline = search('^\s*\\\%(' . lpat . '\)\|^\s*\\\(' . cpat . '\)',
+			      \ 'cnp', firstNC + 1000)
+      if kwline == 1	" lpat matched
+	let format = 'latex'
+      elseif kwline == 2	" cpat matched
+	let format = 'context'
+      endif		" If neither matched, keep default set above.
+      " let lline = search('^\s*\\\%(' . lpat . '\)', 'cn', firstNC + 1000)
+      " let cline = search('^\s*\\\%(' . cpat . '\)', 'cn', firstNC + 1000)
+      " if cline > 0
+      "   let format = 'context'
+      " endif
+      " if lline > 0 && (cline == 0 || cline > lline)
+      "   let format = 'tex'
+      " endif
+    endif " firstNC
+    call setpos('.', save_cursor)
+  endif " firstline =~ '^%&\s*\a\+'
+
+  " Translation from formats to file types.  TODO:  add AMSTeX, RevTex, others?
+  if format == 'plain'
+    setf plaintex
+  elseif format == 'context'
+    setf context
+  else " probably LaTeX
+    setf tex
+  endif
+  return
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTxml()
+  let n = 1
+  while n < 100 && n < line("$")
+    let line = getline(n)
+    " DocBook 4 or DocBook 5.
+    let is_docbook4 = line =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*DocBook'
+    let is_docbook5 = line =~ ' xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"'
+    if is_docbook4 || is_docbook5
+      let b:docbk_type = "xml"
+      if is_docbook5
+	let b:docbk_ver = 5
+      else
+	let b:docbk_ver = 4
+      endif
+      setf docbk
+      return
+    endif
+    if line =~ 'xmlns:xbl="http://www.mozilla.org/xbl"'
+      setf xbl
+      return
+    endif
+    let n += 1
+  endwhile
+  setf xml
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#FTy()
+  let n = 1
+  while n < 100 && n < line("$")
+    let line = getline(n)
+    if line =~ '^\s*%'
+      setf yacc
+      return
+    endif
+    if getline(n) =~ '^\s*\(#\|class\>\)' && getline(n) !~ '^\s*#\s*include'
+      setf racc
+      return
+    endif
+    let n = n + 1
+  endwhile
+  setf yacc
+endfunc
+
+func dist#ft#Redif()
+  let lnum = 1
+  while lnum <= 5 && lnum < line('$')
+    if getline(lnum) =~ "^\ctemplate-type:"
+      setf redif
+      return
+    endif
+    let lnum = lnum + 1
+  endwhile
+endfunc
+
+
+" Restore 'cpoptions'
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/autoload/netrw.vim

@@ -22,8 +22,8 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_netrw")
   finish
 endif
-" netrw requires vim having patch 7.4.213; netrw will benefit from vim's having patch#656, too
+" netrw requires vim having patch 213; netrw will benefit from vim's having patch#656, too
-if v:version < 704 || (v:version == 704 && !has("patch213"))
+if v:version < 704 || !has("patch213")
  if !exists("s:needpatch213")
   unsilent echomsg "***sorry*** this version of netrw requires vim v7.4 with patch 213"
  endif

runtime/autoload/paste.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim support file to help with paste mappings and menus
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2006 Jun 23
+" Last Change:	2017 Aug 30
 
 " Define the string to use for items that are present both in Edit, Popup and
 " Toolbar menu.  Also used in mswin.vim and macmap.vim.
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 if has("virtualedit")
   let paste#paste_cmd = {'n': ":call paste#Paste()<CR>"}
   let paste#paste_cmd['v'] = '"-c<Esc>' . paste#paste_cmd['n']
-  let paste#paste_cmd['i'] = 'x<BS><Esc>' . paste#paste_cmd['n'] . 'gi'
+  let paste#paste_cmd['i'] = "\<c-\>\<c-o>\"+gP"
 
   func! paste#Paste()
     let ove = &ve

runtime/autoload/sqlcomplete.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:    SQL
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
 " Version:     16.0
-" Last Change: 2015 Dec 29
+" Last Change: 2017 Oct 15
 " Homepage:    http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=1572
 " Usage:       For detailed help
 "              ":help sql.txt"
@@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
 
          " Start characterwise visual mode
          " Advance right one character
-         " Search foward until one of the following:
+         " Search forward until one of the following:
          "     1.  Another select/update/delete statement
          "     2.  A ; at the end of a line (the delimiter)
          "     3.  The end of the file (incase no delimiter)

runtime/colors/README.txt

@@ -42,7 +42,16 @@ this autocmd might be useful:
 Replace "blue_sky" with the name of the colorscheme.
 
 In case you want to tweak a colorscheme after it was loaded, check out the
-ColorScheme autocmd event.
+ColorScheme autocommand event.
+
+To clean up just before loading another colorscheme, use the ColorSchemePre
+autocommand event.  For example:
+	let g:term_ansi_colors = ...
+	augroup MyColorscheme
+	  au!
+	  au ColorSchemePre * unlet g:term_ansi_colors
+	  au ColorSchemePre * au! MyColorscheme
+	augroup END
 
 To customize a colorscheme use another name, e.g.  "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim",
 and use `:runtime` to load the original colorscheme:
@@ -64,6 +73,8 @@ Search for "highlight_init".
 If you think you have a color scheme that is good enough to be used by others,
 please check the following items:
 
+- Source the $VIMRUNTIME/colors/tools/check_colors.vim script to check for
+  common mistakes.
 - Does it work in a color terminal as well as in the GUI?
 - Is "g:colors_name" set to a meaningful value?  In case of doubt you can do
   it this way:

runtime/colors/tools/check_colors.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+" This script tests a color scheme for some errors. Load the scheme and source
+" this script. e.g. :e colors/desert.vim | :so test_colors.vim
+" Will output possible errors.
+
+let s:save_cpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+func! Test_check_colors()
+  call cursor(1,1)
+  let err={}
+
+  " 1) Check g:colors_name is existing
+  if !search('\<\%(g:\)\?colors_name\>', 'cnW')
+    let err['colors_name'] = 'g:colors_name not set'
+  else
+    let err['colors_name'] = 'OK'
+  endif
+
+  " 2) Check for some well-defined highlighting groups
+  " Some items, check several groups, e.g. Diff, Spell
+  let hi_groups = ['ColorColumn', 'Diff', 'ErrorMsg', 'Folded',
+        \ 'FoldColumn', 'IncSearch', 'LineNr', 'ModeMsg', 'MoreMsg', 'NonText',
+        \ 'Normal', 'Pmenu', 'Todo', 'Search', 'Spell', 'StatusLine', 'TabLine',
+        \ 'Title', 'Visual', 'WarningMsg', 'WildMenu']
+  let groups={}
+  for group in hi_groups
+    if search('\c@suppress\s\+'.group, 'cnW')
+      " skip check, if the script contains a line like
+      " @suppress Visual:
+      let groups[group] = 'Ignoring '.group
+      continue
+    endif
+    if !search('hi\%[ghlight] \+'.group, 'cnW')
+      let groups[group] = 'No highlight definition for '.group
+      continue
+    endif
+    if !search('hi\%[ghlight] \+'.group. '.*fg=', 'cnW')
+      let groups[group] = 'Missing foreground color for '.group
+      continue
+    endif
+    if search('hi\%[ghlight] \+'.group. '.*guibg=', 'cnW') &&
+        \ !search('hi\%[ghlight] \+'.group. '.*ctermbg=', 'cnW')
+      let groups[group] = 'Missing bg terminal color for '.group
+      continue
+    endif
+    call search('hi\%[ghlight] \+'.group, 'cW')
+    " only check in the current line
+    if !search('guifg', 'cnW', line('.'))   || !search('ctermfg', 'cnW', line('.'))
+      " do not check for background colors, they could be intentionally left out
+      let groups[group] = 'Missing fg definition for '.group
+    endif
+    call cursor(1,1)
+  endfor
+  let err['highlight'] = groups
+
+  " 3) Check, that it does not set background highlighting
+  " Doesn't ':hi Normal ctermfg=253 ctermfg=233' also set the background sometimes?
+  let bg_set='\(set\?\|setl\(ocal\)\?\) .*\(background\|bg\)=\(dark\|light\)'
+  let bg_let='let \%([&]\%([lg]:\)\?\)\%(background\|bg\)\s*=\s*\([''"]\?\)\w\+\1'
+  let bg_pat='\%('.bg_set. '\|'.bg_let.'\)'
+  let line=search(bg_pat, 'cnW')
+  if search(bg_pat, 'cnW')
+    exe line
+    if search('hi \U\w\+\s\+\S', 'cbnW')
+      let err['background'] = 'Should not set background option after :hi statement'
+    endif
+  else
+    let err['background'] = 'OK'
+  endif
+  call cursor(1,1)
+
+  " 4) Check, that t_Co is checked
+  let pat = '[&]t_Co\s*[<>=]=\?\s*\d\+'
+  if !search(pat, 'ncW')
+    let err['t_Co'] = 'Does not check terminal for capable colors'
+  endif
+
+  " 5) Initializes correctly, e.g. should have a section like
+  " hi clear
+  " if exists("syntax_on")
+  " syntax reset
+  " endif
+  let pat='hi\%[ghlight]\s*clear\n\s*if\s*exists(\([''"]\)syntax_on\1)\n\s*syn\%[tax]\s*reset\n\s*endif'
+  if !search(pat, 'cnW')
+    let err['init'] = 'No initialization'
+  endif
+
+  " 6) Does not use :syn on
+  if search('syn\%[tax]\s\+on', 'cnW')
+    let err['background'] = 'Should not issue :syn on'
+  endif
+
+  " 7) Does not define filetype specfic groups like vimCommand, htmlTag,
+  let hi_groups = ['vim', 'html', 'python', 'sh', 'ruby']
+  for group in hi_groups
+    let pat='\Chi\%[ghlight]\s*\zs'.group.'\w\+\>'
+    if search(pat, 'cnW')
+      let line = search(pat, 'cW')
+      let err['filetype'] = get(err, 'filetype', 'Should not define: ') . matchstr(getline('.'), pat). ' '
+    endif
+    call cursor(1,1)
+  endfor
+  let g:err = err
+
+  " print Result
+  call Result(err)
+endfu
+
+fu! Result(err)
+  let do_roups = 0
+  echohl Title|echomsg "---------------"|echohl Normal
+  for key in sort(keys(a:err))
+    if key is# 'highlight'
+      let do_groups = 1
+      continue
+    else
+      if a:err[key] !~ 'OK'
+        echohl Title
+      endif
+      echomsg printf("%15s: %s", key, a:err[key])
+      echohl Normal
+    endif
+  endfor
+  echohl Title|echomsg "---------------"|echohl Normal
+  if do_groups
+    echohl Title | echomsg "Groups" | echohl Normal
+    for v1 in sort(keys(a:err['highlight']))
+      echomsg printf("%25s: %s", v1, a:err['highlight'][v1])
+    endfor
+  endif
+endfu
+
+call Test_check_colors()
+
+let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo

runtime/doc/Makefile

@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ xxd.man: xxd.1
 	nroff -man xxd.1 | sed -e s/.//g > xxd.man
 
 uganda.nsis.txt: uganda.txt
-	sed -e 's/[ 	]*\*[-a-zA-Z0-9.]*\*//g' -e 's/vim:tw=78://' \
+	sed -e 's/[ 	]*\*[-a-zA-Z0-9.]*\*//g' -e 's/vim:tw=78:.*//' \
 		uganda.txt | uniq >uganda.nsis.txt
 
 # Awk version of .txt to .html conversion.
@@ -375,6 +375,10 @@ tags.ref tags.html: tags
 perlhtml: tags $(DOCS)
 	./vim2html.pl tags $(DOCS)
 
+# Check URLs in the help with "curl".
+test_urls:
+	vim -S test_urls.vim
+
 clean:
 	-rm doctags *.html tags.ref
 

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 07
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 03
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -21,7 +21,6 @@ For a basic explanation, see section |40.3| in the user manual.
 11. Disabling autocommands	|autocmd-disable|
 
 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
-{only when the |+autocmd| feature has not been disabled at compile time}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Introduction						*autocmd-intro*
@@ -33,7 +32,7 @@ files matching *.c.  You can also use autocommands to implement advanced
 features, such as editing compressed files (see |gzip-example|).  The usual
 place to put autocommands is in your .vimrc or .exrc file.
 
-					*E203* *E204* *E143* *E855* *E937*
+				*E203* *E204* *E143* *E855* *E937* *E952*
 WARNING: Using autocommands is very powerful, and may lead to unexpected side
 effects.  Be careful not to destroy your text.
 - It's a good idea to do some testing on an expendable copy of a file first.
@@ -57,6 +56,8 @@ effects.  Be careful not to destroy your text.
 			Add {cmd} to the list of commands that Vim will
 			execute automatically on {event} for a file matching
 			{pat} |autocmd-patterns|.
+			Note: A quote character is seen as argument to the
+			:autocmd and won't start a comment.
 			Vim always adds the {cmd} after existing autocommands,
 			so that the autocommands execute in the order in which
 			they were given.  See |autocmd-nested| for [nested].
@@ -68,7 +69,14 @@ Note: The ":autocmd" command can only be followed by another command when the
 '|' appears before {cmd}.  This works: >
 	:augroup mine | au! BufRead | augroup END
 But this sees "augroup" as part of the defined command: >
+	:augroup mine | au! BufRead * | augroup END
 	:augroup mine | au BufRead * set tw=70 | augroup END
+Instead you can put the group name into the command: >
+	:au! mine BufRead *
+	:au mine BufRead * set tw=70
+Or use `:execute`: >
+	:augroup mine | exe "au! BufRead *" | augroup END
+	:augroup mine | exe "au BufRead * set tw=70" | augroup END
 
 Note that special characters (e.g., "%", "<cword>") in the ":autocmd"
 arguments are not expanded when the autocommand is defined.  These will be
@@ -85,7 +93,8 @@ will appear twice.  To avoid this, define your autocommands in a group, so
 that you can easily clear them: >
 
 	augroup vimrc
-	  autocmd!	" Remove all vimrc autocommands
+	  " Remove all vimrc autocommands
+	  autocmd!
 	  au BufNewFile,BufRead *.html so <sfile>:h/html.vim
 	augroup END
 
@@ -139,6 +148,8 @@ prompt.  When one command outputs two messages this can happen anyway.
 			plugins, syntax highlighting, etc.
 
 :au[tocmd]! [group]	Remove ALL autocommands.
+			Note: a quote will be seen as argument to the :autocmd
+			and won't start a comment.
 			Warning: You should normally not do this without a
 			group, it breaks plugins, syntax highlighting, etc.
 
@@ -251,6 +262,7 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |BufCreate|		just after adding a buffer to the buffer list
 |BufDelete|		before deleting a buffer from the buffer list
 |BufWipeout|		before completely deleting a buffer
+|TerminalOpen|		after a terminal buffer was created
 
 |BufFilePre|		before changing the name of the current buffer
 |BufFilePost|		after changing the name of the current buffer
@@ -279,7 +291,8 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |GUIFailed|		after starting the GUI failed
 |TermResponse|		after the terminal response to |t_RV| is received
 
-|QuitPre|		when using `:quit`, before deciding whether to quit
+|QuitPre|		when using `:quit`, before deciding whether to exit
+|ExitPre|		when using a command that may make Vim exit
 |VimLeavePre|		before exiting Vim, before writing the viminfo file
 |VimLeave|		before exiting Vim, after writing the viminfo file
 
@@ -288,6 +301,8 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |FileChangedShellPost|	After handling a file changed since editing started
 |FileChangedRO|		before making the first change to a read-only file
 
+|DirChanged|		after the working directory has changed
+
 |ShellCmdPost|		after executing a shell command
 |ShellFilterPost|	after filtering with a shell command
 
@@ -315,6 +330,10 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |CmdwinEnter|		after entering the command-line window
 |CmdwinLeave|		before leaving the command-line window
 
+|CmdlineChanged|	after a change was made to the command-line text
+|CmdlineEnter|		after the cursor moves to the command line
+|CmdlineLeave|		before the cursor leaves the command line
+
 |InsertEnter|		starting Insert mode
 |InsertChange|		when typing <Insert> while in Insert or Replace mode
 |InsertLeave|		when leaving Insert mode
@@ -323,7 +342,12 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 
 |TextChanged|		after a change was made to the text in Normal mode
 |TextChangedI|		after a change was made to the text in Insert mode
+			when popup menu is not visible
+|TextChangedP|		after a change was made to the text in Insert mode
+			when popup menu visible
+|TextYankPost|		after text is yanked or deleted
 
+|ColorSchemePre|	before loading a color scheme
 |ColorScheme|		after loading a color scheme
 
 |RemoteReply|		a reply from a server Vim was received
@@ -445,6 +469,9 @@ BufWinEnter			After a buffer is displayed in a window.  This
 				existing buffer.  But it does happen for a
 				":split" with the name of the current buffer,
 				since it reloads that buffer.
+				Does not happen for a terminal window, because
+				it starts in Terminal-Job mode and Normal mode
+				commands won't work. Use |TerminalOpen| instead.
 							*BufWinLeave*
 BufWinLeave			Before a buffer is removed from a window.
 				Not when it's still visible in another window.
@@ -492,6 +519,29 @@ CmdUndefined			When a user command is used but it isn't
 				command is defined.  An alternative is to
 				always define the user command and have it
 				invoke an autoloaded function.  See |autoload|.
+							*CmdlineChanged*
+CmdlineChanged			After a change was made to the text in the
+				command line.  Be careful not to mess up
+				the command line, it may cause Vim to lock up.
+				<afile> is set to a single character,
+				indicating the type of command-line.
+				|cmdwin-char|
+							*CmdlineEnter*
+CmdlineEnter			After moving the cursor to the command line,
+				where the user can type a command or search
+				string.
+				<afile> is set to a single character,
+				indicating the type of command-line.
+				|cmdwin-char|
+							*CmdlineLeave*
+CmdlineLeave			Before leaving the command line.
+				Also when abandoning the command line, after
+				typing CTRL-C or <Esc>.
+				When the commands result in an error the
+				command line is still executed.
+				<afile> is set to a single character,
+				indicating the type of command-line.
+				|cmdwin-char|
 							*CmdwinEnter*
 CmdwinEnter			After entering the command-line window.
 				Useful for setting options specifically for
@@ -516,6 +566,10 @@ ColorScheme			After loading a color scheme. |:colorscheme|
 				set, and <amatch> for the new colorscheme
 				name.
 
+							*ColorSchemePre*
+ColorSchemePre			Before loading a color scheme. |:colorscheme|
+				Useful to setup removing things added by a
+				color scheme, before another one is loaded.
 
 							*CompleteDone*
 CompleteDone			After Insert mode completion is done.  Either
@@ -602,6 +656,21 @@ FileChangedRO			Before making the first change to a read-only
 							*E881*
 				If the number of lines changes saving for undo
 				may fail and the change will be aborted.
+							*DirChanged*
+DirChanged			The working directory has changed in response
+				to the |:cd| or |:lcd| commands, or as a
+				result of the 'autochdir' option.
+				The pattern can be:
+					"window" to trigger on `:lcd
+					"global" to trigger on `:cd`
+					"auto"   to trigger on 'autochdir'.
+					"drop"	 to trigger on editing a file
+				<afile> is set to the new directory name.
+							*ExitPre*
+ExitPre				When using `:quit`, `:wq` in a way it makes
+				Vim exit, or using `:qall`, just after
+				|QuitPre|.  Can be used to close any
+				non-essential window.
 							*FileChangedShell*
 FileChangedShell		When Vim notices that the modification time of
 				a file has changed since editing started.
@@ -651,7 +720,8 @@ FileType			When the 'filetype' option has been set.  The
 				pattern is matched against the filetype.
 				<afile> can be used for the name of the file
 				where this option was set, and <amatch> for
-				the new value of 'filetype'.
+				the new value of 'filetype'.  Navigating to
+				another window or buffer is not allowed.
 				See |filetypes|.
 							*FileWriteCmd*
 FileWriteCmd			Before writing to a file, when not writing the
@@ -738,7 +808,7 @@ InsertCharPre			When a character is typed in Insert mode,
 				inserted literally.
 				It is not allowed to change the text |textlock|.
 				The event is not triggered when 'paste' is
-				set.
+				set. {only with the +eval feature}
 							*InsertEnter*
 InsertEnter			Just before starting Insert mode.  Also for
 				Replace mode and Virtual Replace mode.  The
@@ -816,6 +886,7 @@ QuitPre				When using `:quit`, `:wq` or `:qall`, before
 				or quits Vim.  Can be used to close any
 				non-essential window if the current window is
 				the last ordinary window.
+				Also see |ExitPre|.
 							*RemoteReply*
 RemoteReply			When a reply from a Vim that functions as
 				server was received |server2client()|.  The
@@ -884,6 +955,7 @@ SwapExists			Detected an existing swap file when starting
 				It is not allowed to change to another buffer,
 				change a buffer name or change directory
 				here.
+				{only available with the +eval feature}
 							*Syntax*
 Syntax				When the 'syntax' option has been set.  The
 				pattern is matched against the syntax name.
@@ -910,6 +982,11 @@ TermChanged			After the value of 'term' has changed.  Useful
 				for re-loading the syntax file to update the
 				colors, fonts and other terminal-dependent
 				settings.  Executed for all loaded buffers.
+							*TerminalOpen*
+TerminalOpen			Just after a terminal buffer was created, with
+				`:terminal` or |term_start()|. This event is
+				triggered even if the buffer is created
+				without a window, with the ++hidden option.
 							*TermResponse*
 TermResponse			After the response to |t_RV| is received from
 				the terminal.  The value of |v:termresponse|
@@ -932,10 +1009,39 @@ TextChangedI			After a change was made to the text in the
 				current buffer in Insert mode.
 				Not triggered when the popup menu is visible.
 				Otherwise the same as TextChanged.
+							*TextChangedP*
+TextChangedP			After a change was made to the text in the
+				current buffer in Insert mode, only when the
+				popup menu is visible.  Otherwise the same as
+				TextChanged.
+							*TextYankPost*
+TextYankPost			After text has been yanked or deleted in the
+				current buffer.  The following values of
+				|v:event| can be used to determine the operation
+				that triggered this autocmd:
+				   operator    	The operation performed.
+				   regcontents 	Text that was stored in the
+						register, as a list of lines,
+						like with: >
+						getreg(r, 1, 1)
+<				   regname	Name of the |register| or
+						empty string for the unnamed
+						register.
+				   regtype	Type of the register, see
+						|getregtype()|.
+				Not triggered when |quote_| is used nor when
+				called recursively.
+				It is not allowed to change the buffer text,
+				see |textlock|.
+				{only when compiled with the +eval feature}
 							*User*
 User				Never executed automatically.  To be used for
 				autocommands that are only executed with
 				":doautocmd".
+				Note that when `:doautocmd User MyEvent` is
+				used while there are no matching autocommands,
+				you will get an error.  If you don't want
+				that, define a dummy autocommand yourself.
 							*UserGettingBored*
 UserGettingBored		When the user presses the same key 42 times.
 				Just kidding! :-)
@@ -980,9 +1086,10 @@ WinEnter			After entering another window.  Not done for
 				If the window is for another buffer, Vim
 				executes the BufEnter autocommands after the
 				WinEnter autocommands.
-				Note: When using ":split fname" the WinEnter
+				Note: For split and tabpage commands the
-				event is triggered after the split but before
+				WinEnter event is triggered after the split
-				the file "fname" is loaded.
+				or tab command but before the file is loaded.
+
 							*WinLeave*
 WinLeave			Before leaving a window.  If the window to be
 				entered next is for a different buffer, Vim

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Feb 12
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ is an error when 'cpoptions' includes the 'E' flag.
 J			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
 			Remove the indent and insert up to two spaces (see
 			below).  Fails when on the last line of the buffer.
-			If [count] is too big it is reduce to the number of
+			If [count] is too big it is reduced to the number of
 			lines available.
 
 							*v_J*
@@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ This depends on the 'nrformats' option:
 
 For decimals a leading negative sign is considered for incrementing/
 decrementing, for binary, octal and hex values, it won't be considered.  To
-ignore the sign Visually select the number before using CTRL-A or CTRL-X. 
+ignore the sign Visually select the number before using CTRL-A or CTRL-X.
 
 For numbers with leading zeros (including all octal and hexadecimal numbers),
 Vim preserves the number of characters in the number when possible.  CTRL-A on
@@ -533,6 +533,7 @@ If the 'shiftround' option is on, the indent is rounded to a multiple of
 If the 'smartindent' option is on, or 'cindent' is on and 'cinkeys' contains
 '#' with a zero value, shift right does not affect lines starting with '#'
 (these are supposed to be C preprocessor lines that must stay in column 1).
+This can be changed with the 'cino' option, see |cino-#|.
 
 When the 'expandtab' option is off (this is the default) Vim uses <Tab>s as
 much as possible to make the indent.  You can use ">><<" to replace an indent

runtime/doc/channel.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*channel.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 11
+*channel.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ JS	JavaScript style JSON-like encoding |js_encode()|
 Common combination are:
 - Using a job connected through pipes in NL mode.  E.g., to run a style
   checker and receive errors and warnings.
-- Using a deamon, connecting over a socket in JSON mode.  E.g. to lookup
+- Using a daemon, connecting over a socket in JSON mode.  E.g. to lookup
   cross-references in a database.
 
 ==============================================================================
@@ -427,8 +427,8 @@ When no message was available then the result is v:none for a JSON or JS mode
 channels, an empty string for a RAW or NL channel.  You can use |ch_canread()|
 to check if there is something to read.
 
-Note that when there is no callback message are dropped.  To avoid that add a
+Note that when there is no callback, messages are dropped.  To avoid that add
-close callback to the channel.
+a close callback to the channel.
 
 To read all output from a RAW channel that is available: >
 	let output = ch_readraw(channel)
@@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ By default this reads the whole buffer.  This can be changed with the "in_top"
 and "in_bot" options.
 
 A special mode is when "in_top" is set to zero and "in_bot" is not set: Every
-time a line is added to the buffer, the last-but-one line will be send to the
+time a line is added to the buffer, the last-but-one line will be sent to the
 job stdin.  This allows for editing the last line and sending it when pressing
 Enter.
 							*channel-close-in*
@@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 "close_cb": handler	Callback for when the channel is closed.  Same as
 			"close_cb" on |ch_open()|, see |close_cb|.
 						*job-drop*
-"drop"			Specifies when to drop messages.  Same as "drop" on
+"drop": when		Specifies when to drop messages.  Same as "drop" on
 			|ch_open()|, see |channel-drop|.  For "auto" the
 			exit_cb is not considered.
 						*job-exit_cb*
@@ -624,12 +624,12 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 			Note that data can be buffered, callbacks may still be
 			called after the process ends.
 							*job-timeout*
-"timeout"		The time to wait for a request when blocking, E.g.
+"timeout": time		The time to wait for a request when blocking, E.g.
 			when using ch_evalexpr().  In milliseconds.  The
 			default is 2000 (2 seconds).
 						*out_timeout* *err_timeout*
-"out_timeout"		Timeout for stdout.  Only when using pipes.
+"out_timeout": time	Timeout for stdout.  Only when using pipes.
-"err_timeout"		Timeout for stderr.  Only when using pipes.
+"err_timeout": time	Timeout for stderr.  Only when using pipes.
 			Note: when setting "timeout" the part specific mode is
 			overwritten.  Therefore set "timeout" first and the
 			part specific mode later.
@@ -641,8 +641,9 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 			The default is "term".
 
 						*job-term*
-"term": "open"		Start a terminal and connect the job
+"term": "open"		Start a terminal in a new window and connect the job
-			stdin/stdout/stderr to it.
+			stdin/stdout/stderr to it.  Similar to using
+			`:terminal`.
 			NOTE: Not implemented yet!
 
 "channel": {channel}	Use an existing channel instead of creating a new one.
@@ -652,6 +653,11 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 			cause I/O errors.
 			Existing callbacks and other settings remain.
 
+"pty": 1		Use a pty (pseudo-tty) instead of a pipe when
+			possible.  This is most useful in combination with a
+			terminal window, see |terminal|.
+			{only on Unix and Unix-like systems}
+
 				*job-in_io* *in_top* *in_bot* *in_name* *in_buf*
 "in_io": "null"		disconnect stdin (read from /dev/null)
 "in_io": "pipe"		stdin is connected to the channel (default)
@@ -690,6 +696,10 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 "block_write": number	only for testing: pretend every other write to stdin
 			will block
 
+"env": dict		environment variables for the new process
+"cwd": "/path/to/dir"	current working directory for the new process;
+			if the directory does not exist an error is given
+
 
 Writing to a buffer ~
 							*out_io-buffer*
@@ -725,10 +735,6 @@ The "out_msg" option can be used to specify whether a new buffer will have the
 first line set to "Reading from channel output...".  The default is to add the
 message.  "err_msg" does the same for channel error.
 
-'modifiable' option off, or write to a buffer that has 'modifiable' off.  That
-means that lines will be appended to the buffer, but the user can't easily
-change the buffer.
-
 When an existing buffer is to be written where 'modifiable' is off and the
 "out_modifiable" or "err_modifiable" options is not zero, an error is given
 and the buffer will not be written to.

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Sep 27
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Oct 19
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -175,12 +175,14 @@ CTRL-R CTRL-F				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-F* *c_<C-R>_<C-F>*
 CTRL-R CTRL-P				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-P* *c_<C-R>_<C-P>*
 CTRL-R CTRL-W				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-W* *c_<C-R>_<C-W>*
 CTRL-R CTRL-A				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-A* *c_<C-R>_<C-A>*
+CTRL-R CTRL-L				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-L* *c_<C-R>_<C-L>*
 		Insert the object under the cursor:
 			CTRL-F	the Filename under the cursor
 			CTRL-P	the Filename under the cursor, expanded with
 				'path' as in |gf|
 			CTRL-W	the Word under the cursor
 			CTRL-A	the WORD under the cursor; see |WORD|
+			CTRL-L	the line under the cursor
 
 		When 'incsearch' is set the cursor position at the end of the
 		currently displayed match is used.  With CTRL-W the part of
@@ -192,8 +194,8 @@ CTRL-R CTRL-A				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-A* *c_<C-R>_<C-A>*
 
 					*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R* *c_<C-R>_<C-R>*
 					*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-O* *c_<C-R>_<C-O>*
-CTRL-R CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#:-=. CTRL-F CTRL-P CTRL-W CTRL-A}
+CTRL-R CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#:-=. CTRL-F CTRL-P CTRL-W CTRL-A CTRL-L}
-CTRL-R CTRL-O {0-9a-z"%#:-=. CTRL-F CTRL-P CTRL-W CTRL-A}
+CTRL-R CTRL-O {0-9a-z"%#:-=. CTRL-F CTRL-P CTRL-W CTRL-A CTRL-L}
 		Insert register or object under the cursor.  Works like
 		|c_CTRL-R| but inserts the text literally.  For example, if
 		register a contains "xy^Hz" (where ^H is a backspace),
@@ -455,6 +457,9 @@ matches exactly one character.
 
 The 'wildignorecase' option can be set to ignore case in filenames.
 
+The 'wildmenu' option can be set to show the matches just above the command
+line.
+
 If you like tcsh's autolist completion, you can use this mapping:
 	:cnoremap X <C-L><C-D>
 (Where X is the command key to use, <C-L> is CTRL-L and <C-D> is CTRL-D)
@@ -823,14 +828,21 @@ Also see |`=|.
 			       *:<cword>* *:<cWORD>* *:<cfile>* *<cfile>*
 			       *:<sfile>* *<sfile>* *:<afile>* *<afile>*
 			       *:<abuf>* *<abuf>* *:<amatch>* *<amatch>*
+			       *:<cexpr>* *<cexpr>*
 			       *<slnum>* *E495* *E496* *E497* *E499* *E500*
 Note: these are typed literally, they are not special keys!
 	<cword>    is replaced with the word under the cursor (like |star|)
 	<cWORD>    is replaced with the WORD under the cursor (see |WORD|)
+	<cexpr>    is replaced with the word under the cursor, including more
+		   to form a C expression.  E.g., when the cursor is on "arg"
+		   of "ptr->arg" then the result is "ptr->arg"; when the
+		   cursor is on "]" of "list[idx]" then the result is
+		   "list[idx]".  This is used for |v:beval_text|.
 	<cfile>    is replaced with the path name under the cursor (like what
 		   |gf| uses)
 	<afile>    When executing autocommands, is replaced with the file name
-		   for a file read or write.
+		   of the buffer being manipulated, or the file for a read or
+		   write.
 	<abuf>     When executing autocommands, is replaced with the currently
 		   effective buffer number (for ":r file" and ":so file" it is
 		   the current buffer, the file being read/sourced is not in a

runtime/doc/debug.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debug.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2012 Feb 11
+*debug.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Use this command to start Vim:
 	valgrind --log-file=valgrind.log --leak-check=full ./vim
 
 Note: Vim will run much slower.  If your .vimrc is big or you have several
-plugins you need to be patient for startup, or run with the "-u NONE"
+plugins you need to be patient for startup, or run with the "--clean"
 argument.
 
 There are often a few leaks from libraries, such as getpwuid() and

runtime/doc/debugger.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debugger.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*debugger.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Nov 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur
@@ -95,10 +95,12 @@ list and colors can be set via X resources (XmNballoonEvalFontList,
 XmNballoonEvalBackground, and XmNballoonEvalForeground).
 The 'balloondelay' option sets the delay before an attempt is made to show a
 balloon.
-The 'ballooneval' option needs to be set to switch it on.
+The 'ballooneval' and/or the 'balloonevalterm' option needs to be set to
+switch it on.
 
-Balloon evaluation is only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
+Balloon evaluation is only available in the GUI when compiled with the
-feature.
+|+balloon_eval| feature.  For the terminal the  |+balloon_eval_term| feature
+matters.
 
 The Balloon evaluation functions are also used to show a tooltip for the
 toolbar.  The 'ballooneval' option does not need to be set for this.  But the

runtime/doc/develop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*develop.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jan 05
+*develop.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ See the file README.txt in the "src" directory for an overview of the source
 code.
 
 Vim is open source software.  Everybody is encouraged to contribute to help
-improving Vim.  For sending patches a context diff "diff -c" is preferred.
+improving Vim.  For sending patches a unified diff "diff -u" is preferred.
+You can create a pull request on github, but it's not required.
 Also see http://vim.wikia.com/wiki/How_to_make_and_submit_a_patch.
 
 ==============================================================================
@@ -143,9 +144,10 @@ and its environment.
 
 VIM IS... NOT						*design-not*
 
-- Vim is not a shell or an Operating System.  You will not be able to run a
+- Vim is not a shell or an Operating System.  It does provide a terminal
-  shell inside Vim or use it to control a debugger.  This should work the
+  window, in which you can run a shell or debugger.  E.g. to be able to do
-  other way around: Use Vim as a component from a shell or in an IDE.
+  this over an ssh connection.  But if you don't need a text editor with that
+  it is out of scope (use something like screen or tmux instead).
   A satirical way to say this: "Unlike Emacs, Vim does not attempt to include
   everything but the kitchen sink, but some people say that you can clean one
   with it.  ;-)"
@@ -181,12 +183,43 @@ The basic steps to make changes to the code:
    include the diff. Or create a pull request on github.
 
 
-C COMPILER						*style-compiler*
+C COMPILER				*style-compiler* *ANSI-C* *C89* *C99*
 
 The minimal C compiler version supported is C89, also known as ANSI C.
-Later standards don't add much and C89 is the widest supported.
+Later standards, such as C99, are not widely supported, or at least not 100%
+supported.  Therefore we use only some of the C99 features and disallow some
+(at least for now).
 
-One restriction that this implies: no // comments, only /* comments */.
+Please don't make changes everywhere to use the C99 features, it causes merge
+problems for existing patches.  Only use them for new and changed code.
+
+Comments ~
+
+Traditionally Vim uses /* comments */.  We intend to keep it that way,
+especially for file and function headers.  For new code or lines of code that
+change, it is allowed to use // comments.  Especially when it comes after
+code:
+	int some_var;  // single line comment useful here
+
+Enums ~
+
+The last item in an enum may have a trailing comma.  C89 didn't allow this.
+
+Types ~
+
+"long long" is allowed and can be expected to be 64 bits.  Use %lld in printf
+formats.  Also "long long unsigned" with %llu.
+
+Not to be used ~
+
+These C99 features are not to be used, because not enough compilers support
+them:
+- Declaration after Statements (MSVC 2012 does not support it).  All
+  declarations need to be at the start of the block.
+- Variable length arrays (even in C11 this is an optional feature).
+- _Bool and _Complex types.
+- "inline" (it's hardly ever needed, let the optimizer do its work)
+- flexible array members: Not supported by HP-UX C compiler (John Marriott)
 
 
 USE OF COMMON FUNCTIONS					*style-functions*

runtime/doc/diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Feb 03
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Oct 03
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ eight versions of the same file.
 
 The basics are explained in section |08.7| of the user manual.
 
-1. Starting diff mode		|vimdiff|
+1. Starting diff mode		|start-vimdiff|
 2. Viewing diffs		|view-diffs|
 3. Jumping to diffs		|jumpto-diffs|
 4. Copying diffs		|copy-diffs|
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ The basics are explained in section |08.7| of the user manual.
 {not in Vi}
 
 ==============================================================================
-1. Starting diff mode
+1. Starting diff mode					*start-vimdiff*
 
 The easiest way to start editing in diff mode is with the "vimdiff" command.
 This starts Vim as usual, and additionally sets up for viewing the differences
@@ -226,8 +226,8 @@ The diffs are highlighted with these groups:
 				(searching from the end of the line).  The
 				text in between is highlighted.  This means
 				that parts in the middle that are still the
-				same are highlighted anyway.  Only "iwhite" of
+				same are highlighted anyway.  The 'diffopt'
-				'diffopt' is used here.
+				flags "iwhite" and "icase" are used here.
 |hl-DiffDelete|	DiffDelete	Deleted lines.  Also called filler lines,
 				because they don't really exist in this
 				buffer.
@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ g:diff_translations to zero: >
 
     let g:diff_translations = 0
 <
-After setting this variable, Reload the syntax script: >
+After setting this variable, reload the syntax script: >
 
     set syntax=diff
 <

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 10
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -424,6 +424,15 @@ On Unix and a few other systems you can also use backticks for the file name
 argument, for example: >
 	:next `find . -name ver\\*.c -print`
 	:view `ls -t *.patch  \| head -n1`
+Vim will run the command in backticks using the 'shell' and use the standard
+output as argument for the given Vim command (error messages from the shell
+command will be discarded).
+To see what shell command Vim is running, set the 'verbose' option to 4. When
+the shell command returns a non-zero exit code, an error message will be
+displayed and the Vim command will be aborted. To avoid this make the shell
+always return zero like so: >
+       :next `find . -name ver\\*.c -print \|\| true`
+
 The backslashes before the star are required to prevent the shell from
 expanding "ver*.c" prior to execution of the find program.  The backslash
 before the shell pipe symbol "|" prevents Vim from parsing it as command
@@ -617,16 +626,16 @@ list of the current window.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
 			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
-:[count]arge[dit][!] [++opt] [+cmd] {name}		*:arge* *:argedit*
+:[count]arge[dit][!] [++opt] [+cmd] {name} ..		*:arge* *:argedit*
-			Add {name} to the argument list and edit it.
+			Add {name}s to the argument list and edit it.
 			When {name} already exists in the argument list, this
 			entry is edited.
 			This is like using |:argadd| and then |:edit|.
-			Note that only one file name is allowed, and spaces
+			Spaces in filenames have to be escaped with "\".
-			inside the file name are allowed, like with |:edit|.
 			[count] is used like with |:argadd|.
-			[!] is required if the current file cannot be
+			If the current file cannot be |abandon|ed {name}s will
-			|abandon|ed.
+			still be added to the argument list, but won't be
+			edited. No check for duplicates is done.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
 			{not in Vi}
 
@@ -650,8 +659,7 @@ list of the current window.
 			There is no check for duplicates, it is possible to
 			add a file to the argument list twice.
 			The currently edited file is not changed.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 			Note: you can also use this method: >
 				:args ## x
 <			This will add the "x" item and sort the new list.
@@ -665,8 +673,7 @@ list of the current window.
 			when it's deleted from the argument list.
 			Example: >
 				:argdel *.obj
-<			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+<			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 
 :[range]argd[elete]	Delete the {range} files from the argument list.
 			Example: >
@@ -681,8 +688,7 @@ list of the current window.
 <			Removes all the files from the arglist.
 			When the last number in the range is too high, up to
 			the last argument is deleted.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 
 							*:argu* *:argument*
 :[count]argu[ment] [count] [++opt] [+cmd]
@@ -691,16 +697,14 @@ list of the current window.
 			when changes have been made and Vim does not want to
 			|abandon| the current buffer.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 
 :[count]argu[ment]! [count] [++opt] [+cmd]
 			Edit file [count] in the argument list, discard any
 			changes to the current buffer.  When [count] is
 			omitted the current entry is used.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 
 :[count]n[ext] [++opt] [+cmd]			*:n* *:ne* *:next* *E165* *E163*
 			Edit [count] next file.  This fails when changes have
@@ -823,7 +827,6 @@ fourth file in the argument list.  This happens when you do ":e file".
 LOCAL ARGUMENT LIST
 
 {not in Vi}
-{not available when compiled without the |+windows| or |+listcmds| features}
 
 							*:arglocal*
 :argl[ocal]		Make a local copy of the global argument list.
@@ -875,8 +878,7 @@ USING THE ARGUMENT LIST
 			autocommand event is disabled by adding it to
 			'eventignore'.  This considerably speeds up editing
 			each file.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 			Also see |:windo|, |:tabdo|, |:bufdo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|,
 			|:cfdo| and |:lfdo|
 
@@ -900,7 +902,7 @@ Note: When the 'write' option is off, you are not able to write any file.
 
 							*:w* *:write*
 						*E502* *E503* *E504* *E505*
-						*E512* *E514* *E667* *E796*
+						*E512* *E514* *E667* *E796* *E949*
 :w[rite] [++opt]	Write the whole buffer to the current file.  This is
 			the normal way to save changes to a file.  It fails
 			when the 'readonly' option is set or when there is
@@ -956,6 +958,9 @@ used, for example, when the write fails and you want to try again later with
 ":w #".  This can be switched off by removing the 'A' flag from the
 'cpoptions' option.
 
+Note that the 'fsync' option matters here.  If it's set it may make writes
+slower (but safer).
+
 							*:sav* *:saveas*
 :sav[eas][!] [++opt] {file}
 			Save the current buffer under the name {file} and set
@@ -1109,6 +1114,7 @@ The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 			window in the current tab page the current tab page is
 			closed |tab-page|.
 			Triggers the |QuitPre| autocommand event.
+			See |CTRL-W_q| for quitting another window.
 
 :conf[irm] q[uit]	Quit, but give prompt when changes have been made, or
 			the last file in the argument list has not been
@@ -1198,7 +1204,8 @@ MULTIPLE WINDOWS AND BUFFERS				*window-exit*
 :wqa[ll]! [++opt]
 :xa[ll]!	Write all changed buffers, even the ones that are readonly,
 		and exit Vim.  If there are buffers without a file name or
-		which cannot be written for another reason, Vim will not quit.
+		which cannot be written for another reason, or there is a
+		terminal with a running job, Vim will not quit.
 		{not in Vi}
 
 ==============================================================================
@@ -1328,9 +1335,11 @@ present in 'cpoptions' and "!" is not used in the command.
 :chd[ir][!] [path]	Same as |:cd|.
 
 							*:lc* *:lcd*
-:lc[d][!] {path}	Like |:cd|, but only set the current directory for the
+:lc[d][!] {path}	Like |:cd|, but only set the current directory when
-			current window.  The current directory for other
+			the cursor is in the current window.  The current
-			windows is not changed. {not in Vi}
+			directory for other windows is not changed, switching
+			to another window will stop using {path}.
+			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:lch* *:lchdir*
 :lch[dir][!]		Same as |:lcd|. {not in Vi}
@@ -1735,7 +1744,7 @@ There are three different types of searching:
    This searches the same directories, but in a different order.
 
    Note that completion for ":find", ":sfind", and ":tabfind" commands do not
-   currently work with 'path' items that contain a url or use the double star
+   currently work with 'path' items that contain a URL or use the double star
    with depth limiter (/usr/**2) or upward search (;) notations.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/filetype.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 28
+*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Detail: The ":filetype on" command will load one of these files:
 	BufNewFile and BufRead events.  If the file type is not found by the
 	name, the file $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim is used to detect it from the
 	contents of the file.
-	When the GUI is running or will start soon, the menu.vim script is
+	When the GUI is running or will start soon, the |menu.vim| script is
 	also sourced.  See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
 
 To add your own file types, see |new-filetype| below.  To search for help on a
@@ -319,6 +319,10 @@ then Vim will load all plugins in these directories and below:
 
 Note that the last one is the value of $VIMRUNTIME which has been expanded.
 
+Note that when using a plugin manager or |packages| many directories will be
+added to 'runtimepath'.  These plugins earch require their own directory,
+don't put them directly in ~/.vim/plugin.
+
 What if it looks like your plugin is not being loaded?  You can find out what
 happens when Vim starts up by using the |-V| argument: >
 
@@ -602,35 +606,17 @@ MANPAGER				      *manpager.vim*
 The :Man command allows you to turn Vim into a manpager (that syntax highlights
 manpages and follows linked manpages on hitting CTRL-]).
 
-Works on:
+For bash,zsh,ksh or dash, add to the config file (.bashrc,.zshrc, ...)
 
-  - Linux
+	export MANPAGER="vim -M +MANPAGER -"
-  - Mac OS
-  - FreeBSD
-  - Cygwin
-  - Win 10 under Bash
 
-Untested:
+For (t)csh, add to the config file
 
-  - Amiga OS
+	setenv MANPAGER "vim -M +MANPAGER -"
-  - BeOS
-  - OS/2
 
-For bash,zsh,ksh or dash by adding to the config file (.bashrc,.zshrc, ...)
+For fish, add to the config file
 
-	export MANPAGER="env MAN_PN=1 vim -M +MANPAGER -"
+	set -x MANPAGER "vim -M +MANPAGER -"
-
-For (t)csh by adding to the config file
-
-	setenv MANPAGER "env MAN_PN=1 vim -M +MANPAGER -"
-
-For fish by adding to the config file
-
-	set -x MANPAGER "env MAN_PN=1 vim -M +MANPAGER -"
-
-If man sets the $MAN_PN environment variable, like man-db, the most common
-implementation on Linux and Mac OS, then the "env MAN_PN=1 " part above is
-superfluous.
 
 PDF							*ft-pdf-plugin*
 
@@ -653,7 +639,7 @@ By default the following options are set, in accordance with PEP8: >
 	setlocal expandtab shiftwidth=4 softtabstop=4 tabstop=8
 
 To disable this behaviour, set the following variable in your vimrc: >
-	
+
 	let g:python_recommended_style = 0
 
 
@@ -690,4 +676,23 @@ You can change the default by defining the variable g:tex_flavor to the format
 Currently no other formats are recognized.
 
 
+VIM							*ft-vim-plugin*
+
+The Vim filetype plugin defines mappings to move to the start and end of
+functions with [[ and ]].  Move around comments with ]" and [".
+
+The mappings can be disabled with: >
+	let g:no_vim_maps = 1
+
+
+ZIMBU							*ft-zimbu-plugin*
+
+The Zimbu filetype plugin defines mappings to move to the start and end of
+functions with [[ and ]].
+
+The mappings can be disabled with: >
+	let g:no_zimbu_maps = 1
+<
+
+
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/ft_rust.txt

@@ -116,13 +116,13 @@ g:rustfmt_options~
 
                                                           *g:rust_playpen_url*
 g:rust_playpen_url~
-	Set this option to override the url for the playpen to use: >
+	Set this option to override the URL for the playpen to use: >
 	    let g:rust_playpen_url = 'https://play.rust-lang.org/'
 <
 
                                                         *g:rust_shortener_url*
 g:rust_shortener_url~
-	Set this option to override the url for the url shortener: >
+	Set this option to override the URL for the URL shortener: >
 	    let g:rust_shortener_url = 'https://is.gd/'
 <
 
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ COMMANDS                                                       *rust-commands*
 		|g:rust_playpen_url| is the base URL to the playpen, by default
 		"https://play.rust-lang.org/".
 
-		|g:rust_shortener_url| is the base url for the shorterner, by
+		|g:rust_shortener_url| is the base URL for the shortener, by
 		default "https://is.gd/"
 
 :RustFmt                                                       *:RustFmt*

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Mar 08
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ When the GUI starts up initializations are carried out, in this order:
     executed as an Ex command.
   - If the user gvimrc file exists, it is sourced.  The name of this file is
     normally "$HOME/.gvimrc".  You can check this with ":version".
-  - For Win32, when $HOME is not set, "$VIM\_gvimrc" is used.
+  - For Win32, $HOME is set by Vim if needed, see |$HOME-windows|.
   - When a "_gvimrc" file is not found, ".gvimrc" is tried too.  And vice
     versa.
   The name of the first file found is stored in $MYGVIMRC, unless it was
@@ -79,7 +79,8 @@ When the GUI starts up initializations are carried out, in this order:
   and DOS/Win32 "_gvimrc" is tried first.
 
 NOTE: All but the first one are not carried out if Vim was started with
-"-u NONE" and no "-U" argument was given, or when started with "-U NONE".
+"-u NONE" or "-u DEFAULTS" and no "-U" argument was given, or when started
+with "-U NONE".
 
 All this happens AFTER the normal Vim initializations, like reading your
 .vimrc file.  See |initialization|.
@@ -133,7 +134,7 @@ task bar with the 'guiheadroom' option.
 :winp[os]
 		Display current position of the top left corner of the GUI vim
 		window in pixels.  Does not work in all versions.
-		Also see |getwinposx()| and |getwinposy()|.
+		Also see |getwinpos()|, |getwinposx()| and |getwinposy()|.
 
 :winp[os] {X} {Y}							*E466*
 		Put the GUI vim window at the given {X} and {Y} coordinates.
@@ -161,7 +162,7 @@ window Vim is running in with these commands: >
 							*gui-IME* *iBus*
 Input methods for international characters in X that rely on the XIM
 framework, most notably iBus, have been known to produce undesirable results
-in gVim. These may include an inability to enter spaces, or long delays
+in gvim. These may include an inability to enter spaces, or long delays
 between typing a character and it being recognized by the application.
 
 One workaround that has been successful, for unknown reasons, is to prevent
@@ -481,6 +482,7 @@ menus and menu items.  They are most useful for things that you can't remember
 what the key sequence was.
 
 For creating menus in a different language, see |:menutrans|.
+If you don't want to use menus at all, see |'go-M'|.
 
 							*menu.vim*
 The default menus are read from the file "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim".  See
@@ -497,7 +499,22 @@ in the menu (which can take a bit of time to load).  If you want to have all
 filetypes already present at startup, add: >
 	:let do_syntax_sel_menu = 1
 
-<
+The following menuitems show all available color schemes, keymaps and compiler
+settings:
+	Edit > Color Scheme ~
+	Edit > Keymap ~
+	Tools > Set Compiler ~
+However, they can also take a bit of time to load, because they search all
+related files from the directories in 'runtimepath'.  Therefore they are
+loaded lazily (by the |CursorHold| event), or you can also load them manually.
+If you want to have all these items already present at startup, add: >
+	:let do_no_lazyload_menus = 1
+
+Note that the menu.vim is sourced when `:syntax on` or `:filetype on` is
+executed or after your .vimrc file is sourced.  This means that the 'encoding'
+option and the language of messages (`:language messages`) must be set before
+that (if you want to change them).
+
 							*console-menus*
 Although this documentation is in the GUI section, you can actually use menus
 in console mode too.  You will have to load |menu.vim| explicitly then, it is
@@ -783,10 +800,40 @@ In the Win32 and GTK+ GUI, starting a menu name with ']' excludes that menu
 from the main menu bar.  You must then use the |:popup| or |:tearoff| command
 to display it.
 
+					*window-toolbar* *WinBar*
+Each window can have a local toolbar.  This uses the first line of the window,
+thus reduces the space for the text by one line.  The items in the toolbar
+must start with "WinBar".
+
+Only text can be used.  When using Unicode, special characters can be used to
+make the items look like icons.
+
+If the items do not fit then the last ones cannot be used.  The toolbar does
+not wrap.
+
+Note that Vim may be in any mode when executing these commands.  The menu
+should be defined for Normal mode and will be executed without changing the
+current mode. Thus if the current window is in Visual mode and the menu
+command does not intentionally change the mode, Vim will remain in Visual
+mode.  Best is to use `:nnoremenu` to avoid side effects.
+
+Example for debugger tools: >
+	nnoremenu 1.10 WinBar.Step :Step<CR>
+	nnoremenu 1.20 WinBar.Next :Next<CR>
+	nnoremenu 1.30 WinBar.Finish :Finish<CR>
+	nnoremenu 1.40 WinBar.Cont :Continue<CR>
+<
+The window toolbar uses the ToolbarLine and ToolbarButton highlight groups.
+
+When splitting the window the window toolbar is not copied to the new window.
+
 							*popup-menu*
 In the Win32, GTK+, Motif, Athena and Photon GUI, you can define the
 special menu "PopUp".  This is the menu that is displayed when the right mouse
 button is pressed, if 'mousemodel' is set to popup or popup_setpos.
+Example: >
+    nnoremenu 1.40 PopUp.&Paste	"+gP
+    menu PopUp
 
 
 5.3 Showing What Menus Are Mapped To			*showing-menus*
@@ -945,10 +992,14 @@ it behaves in a strange way.
 :popu[p] {name}			Popup the menu {name}.  The menu named must
 				have at least one subentry, but need not
 				appear on the menu-bar (see |hidden-menus|).
-				{only available for Win32 and GTK GUI}
+				{only available for Win32 and GTK GUI or in
+				the terminal when compiled with +insert_expand}
 
 :popu[p]! {name}		Like above, but use the position of the mouse
 				pointer instead of the cursor.
+				In the terminal this is the last known
+				position, which is usually at the last click
+				or release (mouse movement is irrelevalt).
 
 Example: >
 	:popup File
@@ -959,6 +1010,10 @@ pointer if ! was used). >
 	:popup ]Toolbar
 This creates a popup menu that doesn't exist on the main menu-bar.
 
+Note that in the GUI the :popup command will return immediately, before a
+selection has been made.  In the terminal the commands waits for the user to
+make a selection.
+
 Note that a menu that starts with ']' will not be displayed.
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Dec 20
+*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Oct 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -382,38 +382,8 @@ Note that a menu that starts with ']' will not be displayed.
 ==============================================================================
 7. Command line arguments				*gui-w32-cmdargs*
 
-Analysis of a command line into parameters is not standardised in MS Windows.
+Command line arguments behave the same way as with the console application,
-Gvim has to provide logic to analyse a command line.  This logic is likely to
+see |win32-cmdargs|.
-be different from the default logic provided by a compilation system used to
-build vim.  The differences relate to unusual double quote (") usage.
-The arguments "C:\My Music\freude.txt" and "+/Sch\"iller" are handled in the
-same way.  The argument "+/Sch""iller" may be handled different by gvim and
-vim, depending what it was compiled with.
-
-The rules are:
-      a) A parameter is a sequence of graphic characters.
-      b) Parameters are separated by white space.
-      c) A parameter can be enclosed in double quotes to include white space.
-      d) A sequence of zero or more backslashes (\) and a double quote (")
-	is special.  The effective number of backslashes is halved, rounded
-	down.  An even number of backslashes reverses the acceptability of
-	spaces and tabs, an odd number of backslashes produces a literal
-	double quote.
-
-So:
-	"	is a special double quote
-	\"	is a literal double quote
-	\\"	is a literal backslash and a special double quote
-	\\\"	is a literal backslash and a literal double quote
-	\\\\"	is 2 literal backslashes and a special double quote
-	\\\\\"	is 2 literal backslashes and a literal double quote
-	etc.
-
-Example: >
-	gvim "C:\My Music\freude" +"set ignorecase" +/"\"foo\\" +\"bar\\\"
-
-opens "C:\My Music\freude" and executes the line mode commands: >
-	set ignorecase; /"foo\ and /bar\"
 
 ==============================================================================
 8. Various						*gui-w32-various*

runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Sep 12
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -53,6 +53,9 @@ When using "gvim -f" and then ":gui", Vim will run in the foreground.  The
 ":gui -b".
 
 "gvim --nofork" does the same as "gvim -f".
+
+When there are running jobs Vim will not fork, because the processes would no
+longer be child processes.
 								*E851* *E852*
 When starting the GUI fails Vim will try to continue running in the terminal.
 
@@ -279,8 +282,9 @@ For CDE "dtwm" (a derivative of Motif) add this line in the .Xdefaults: >
 For "mwm" (Motif window manager) the line would be: >
    Mwm*Vim*iconImage: /usr/local/share/vim/vim32x32.xpm
 
-Mouse Pointers Available in X11				*X11_mouse_shapes*
 
+Mouse Pointers Available in X11 ~
+						*X11_mouse_shapes*
 By using the |'mouseshape'| option, the mouse pointer can be automatically
 changed whenever Vim enters one of its various modes (e.g., Insert or
 Command).  Currently, the available pointers are:
@@ -354,7 +358,9 @@ to the GTK documentation, however little there is, on how to do this.
 See http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtk-Resource-Files.html
 for more information.
 
-						*gtk-tooltip-colors*
+
+Tooltip Colors ~
+							*gtk-tooltip-colors*
 Example, which sets the tooltip colors to black on light-yellow: >
 
 	style "tooltips"
@@ -372,15 +378,122 @@ distribution.
 For GTK+ 3, an effect similar to the above can be obtained by adding the
 following snippet of CSS code to $XDG_HOME_DIR/gtk-3.0/gtk.css (usually,
 $HOME/.config/gtk-3.0/gtk.css):
- >
+
+For GTK+ 3 < 3.20: >
+
 	.tooltip {
 		background-color: #ffffcc;
 		color: #000000;
 	}
 <
+For GTK+ 3 >= 3.20: >
 
-Using Vim as a GTK+ plugin				*gui-gtk-socketid*
+	tooltip {
+	    background-color: #ffffcc;
+	    text-shadow: none;
+	}
 
+	tooltip label {
+	    color: #2e3436;
+	}
+<
+
+A Quick Look at GTK+ CSS ~
+							*gtk-css*
+The contents of this subsection apply to GTK+ 3.20 or later which provides
+stable support for GTK+ CSS:
+
+	https://developer.gnome.org/gtk3/stable/theming.html
+
+GTK+ uses CSS for styling and layout of widgets.  In this subsection, we'll
+have a quick look at GTK+ CSS through simple, illustrative examples.
+
+Example 1.  Empty Space Adjustment ~
+
+By default, the toolbar and the tabline of the GTK+ 3 GUI are somewhat larger
+than those of the GTK+ 2 GUI.  Some people may want to make them look similar
+to the GTK+ 2 GUI in size.
+
+To do that, we'll try reducing empty space around icons and labels that looks
+apparently superfluous.
+
+Add the following lines to $XDG_HOME_DIR/gtk-3.0/gtk.css (usually,
+$HOME/.config/gtk-3.0/gtk.css): >
+
+	toolbar button {
+	    margin-top: -2px;
+	    margin-right: 0px;
+	    margin-bottom: -2px;
+	    margin-left: 0px;
+
+	    padding-top: 0px;
+	    padding-right: 0px;
+	    padding-bottom: 0px;
+	    padding-left: 0px
+	}
+
+	notebook tab {
+	    margin-top: -1px;
+	    margin-right: 3px;
+	    margin-bottom: -1px;
+	    margin-left: 3px;
+
+	    padding-top: 0px;
+	    padding-right: 0px;
+	    padding-bottom: 0px;
+	    padding-left: 0px
+	}
+<
+Since it's a CSS, they can be rewritten using shorthand: >
+
+	toolbar button {
+	    margin: -2px 0px;
+	    padding: 0px;
+	}
+
+	notebook tab {
+	    margin: -1px 3px;
+	    padding: 0px
+	}
+<
+Note: You might want to use 'toolbariconsize' to adjust the icon size, too.
+
+Note: Depending on the icon theme and/or the font in use, some extra tweaks
+may be needed for a satisfactory result.
+
+Note: In addition to margin and padding, you can use border.  For details,
+refer to the box model of CSS, e.g.,
+
+	https://www.w3schools.com/css/css_boxmodel.asp
+
+Example 2.  More Than Just Colors ~
+
+GTK+ CSS supports gradients as well: >
+
+	tooltip {
+	    background-image: -gtk-gradient(linear,
+					    0 0, 0 1,
+					    color-stop(0, #344752),
+					    color-stop(0.5, #546772),
+					    color-stop(1, #243742));
+	}
+
+	tooltip label {
+	    color: #f3f3f3;
+	}
+<
+Gradients can be used to make a GUI element visually distinguishable from
+others without relying on high contrast. Accordingly, effective use of them is
+a useful technique to give a theme a sense of unity in color and luminance.
+
+Note: Theming can be difficult since it must make every application look
+equally good; making a single application more charming often gets others
+unexpectedly less attractive or even deteriorates their usability.  Keep this
+in mind always when you try improving a theme.
+
+
+Using Vim as a GTK+ plugin ~
+							*gui-gtk-socketid*
 When the GTK+ version of Vim starts up normally, it creates its own top level
 window (technically, a 'GtkWindow').  GTK+ provides an embedding facility with
 its GtkSocket and GtkPlug widgets.  If one GTK+ application creates a
@@ -425,8 +538,8 @@ Note: Avoid use of --enable-gnome-check with GTK+ 3 GUI build.  The
 functionality mentioned above is consolidated in GTK+ 3.
 
 
-GNOME session support			*gui-gnome-session* *gnome-session*
+GNOME session support ~
-
+					*gui-gnome-session* *gnome-session*
 On logout, Vim shows the well-known exit confirmation dialog if any buffers
 are modified.  Clicking [Cancel] will stop the logout process.  Otherwise the
 current session is stored to disk by using the |:mksession| command, and
@@ -563,7 +676,7 @@ Of these three, Vim uses PRIMARY when reading and writing the "* register
 register.  Vim does not access the SECONDARY selection.
 
 Examples: (assuming the default option values)
-- Select an URL in Visual mode in Vim.  Go to your browser and click the
+- Select a URL in Visual mode in Vim.  Go to your browser and click the
   middle mouse button in the URL text field.  The selected text will be
   inserted (hopefully!).  Note: in Firefox you can set the
   middlemouse.contentLoadURL preference to true in about:config, then the

runtime/doc/help.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*help.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Sep 12
+*help.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Oct 28
 
 			VIM - main help file
 									 k
@@ -142,6 +142,7 @@ Special issues ~
 |print.txt|	printing
 |remote.txt|	using Vim as a server or client
 |term.txt|	using different terminals and mice
+|terminal.txt|	Terminal window support
 |digraph.txt|	list of available digraphs
 |mbyte.txt|	multi-byte text support
 |mlang.txt|	non-English language support
@@ -150,6 +151,7 @@ Special issues ~
 |hebrew.txt|	Hebrew language support and editing
 |russian.txt|	Russian language support and editing
 |ft_ada.txt|	Ada (the programming language) support
+|ft_rust.txt|	Filetype plugin for Rust
 |ft_sql.txt|	about the SQL filetype plugin
 |hangulin.txt|	Hangul (Korean) input mode
 |rileft.txt|	right-to-left editing mode
@@ -202,6 +204,7 @@ Standard plugins ~
 |pi_logipat.txt|   Logical operators on patterns
 |pi_netrw.txt|     Reading and writing files over a network
 |pi_paren.txt|     Highlight matching parens
+|pi_spec.txt|      Filetype plugin to work with rpm spec files
 |pi_tar.txt|       Tar file explorer
 |pi_vimball.txt|   Create a self-installing Vim script
 |pi_zip.txt|       Zip archive explorer

runtime/doc/if_cscop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2011 Jun 12
+*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Jan 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Andy Kahn
@@ -91,9 +91,10 @@ suggested use.)
 2. Cscope related commands				*cscope-commands*
 
 		*:cscope* *:cs* *:scs* *:scscope* *E259* *E262* *E561* *E560*
-All cscope commands are accessed through suboptions to the main cscope
+All cscope commands are accessed through suboptions to the cscope commands.
-command ":cscope".  The shortest abbreviation is ":cs".  The ":scscope"
+	`:cscope` or `:cs` is the main command
-command does the same and also splits the window (short: "scs").
+	`:scscope` or `:scs` does the same and splits the window
+	`:lcscope` or `:lcs` uses the location list, see |:lcscope|
 
 The available subcommands are:
 
@@ -467,36 +468,18 @@ license or OS distribution), then you can download it for free from:
 	http://cscope.sourceforge.net/
 This is released by SCO under the BSD license.
 
-If you want a newer version of cscope, you will probably have to buy it.
-According to the (old) nvi documentation:
-
-	You can buy version 13.3 source with an unrestricted license
-	for $400 from AT&T Software Solutions by calling +1-800-462-8146.
-
-Also you can download cscope 13.x and mlcscope 14.x (multi-lingual cscope
-which supports C, C++, Java, lex, yacc, breakpoint listing, Ingres, and SDL)
-from World-Wide Exptools Open Source packages page:
-	http://www.bell-labs.com/project/wwexptools/packages.html
-
 In Solaris 2.x, if you have the C compiler license, you will also have
 cscope.  Both are usually located under /opt/SUNWspro/bin
 
-SGI developers can also get it.  Search for Cscope on this page:
-	http://freeware.sgi.com/index-by-alpha.html
-	https://toolbox.sgi.com/toolbox/utilities/cscope/
-The second one is for those who have a password for the SGI toolbox.
-
 There is source to an older version of a cscope clone (called "cs") available
 on the net.  Due to various reasons, this is not supported with Vim.
 
 The cscope interface/support for Vim was originally written by
 Andy Kahn <ackahn@netapp.com>.  The original structure (as well as a tiny
-bit of code) was adapted from the cscope interface in nvi.  Please report
+bit of code) was adapted from the cscope interface in nvi.
-any problems, suggestions, patches, et al., you have for the usage of
-cscope within Vim to him.
 							*cscope-win32*
-For a cscope version for Win32 see:
+For a cscope version for Win32 see (seems abandoned):
-	http://code.google.com/p/cscope-win32/
+	https://code.google.com/archive/p/cscope-win32/
 
 Win32 support was added by Sergey Khorev <sergey.khorev@gmail.com>.  Contact
 him if you have Win32-specific issues.

runtime/doc/if_mzsch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Jan 24
+*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Oct 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sergey Khorev
@@ -278,12 +278,15 @@ When you don't use the MzScheme interface you don't need them, thus you can
 use Vim without these DLL files.
 NOTE: Newer version of MzScheme (Racket) require earlier (trampolined)
 initialisation via scheme_main_setup.  So Vim always loads the MzScheme DLL at
-startup if possible.
+startup if possible.  This may make Vim startup slower.
 
 To use the MzScheme interface the MzScheme DLLs must be in your search path.
 In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
 
-The names of the DLLs must match the MzScheme version Vim was compiled with.
+On MS-Windows the options 'mzschemedll' and 'mzschemegcdll' are used for the
+name of the library to load.  The initial value is specified at build time.
+
+The version of the DLL must match the MzScheme version Vim was compiled with.
 For MzScheme version 209 they will be "libmzsch209_000.dll" and
 "libmzgc209_000.dll". To know for sure look at the output of the ":version"
 command, look for -DDYNAMIC_MZSCH_DLL="something" and

runtime/doc/if_perl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2015 Oct 16
+*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Nov 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sven Verdoolaege
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ possible.
 Here is an overview of the functions that are available to Perl: >
 
   :perl VIM::Msg("Text")		# displays a message
-  :perl VIM::Msg("Error", "ErrorMsg")	# displays an error message
+  :perl VIM::Msg("Wrong!", "ErrorMsg")	# displays an error message
   :perl VIM::Msg("remark", "Comment")	# displays a highlighted message
   :perl VIM::SetOption("ai")		# sets a vim option
   :perl $nbuf = VIM::Buffers()		# returns the number of buffers

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 09
+*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Jan 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -715,6 +715,8 @@ To facilitate bi-directional interface, you can use |pyeval()| and |py3eval()|
 functions to evaluate Python expressions and pass their values to Vim script.
 |pyxeval()| is also available.
 
+The Python value "None" is converted to v:none.
+
 ==============================================================================
 9. Dynamic loading					*python-dynamic*
 
@@ -734,8 +736,8 @@ or 'pythonthreedll' option can be also used to specify the Python DLL.
 
 The name of the DLL should match the Python version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name for Python 2 is "python27.dll", that is for Python 2.7.
-That is the default value for 'pythondll'.  For Python 3 it is python35.dll
+That is the default value for 'pythondll'.  For Python 3 it is python36.dll
-(Python 3.5).  To know for sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for
+(Python 3.6).  To know for sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for
 "python\d*.dll\c".
 
 
@@ -807,7 +809,8 @@ Raising SystemExit exception in python isn't endorsed way to quit vim, use: >
 You can test what Python version is available with: >
 	if has('python')
 	  echo 'there is Python 2.x'
-  	elseif has('python3')
+	endif
+  	if has('python3')
 	  echo 'there is Python 3.x'
 	endif
 
@@ -816,6 +819,24 @@ dynamically, these has() calls will try to load them.  If only one can be
 loaded at a time, just checking if Python 2 or 3 are available will prevent
 the other one from being available.
 
+To avoid loading the dynamic library, only check if Vim was compiled with
+python support: >
+	if has('python_compiled')
+	  echo 'compiled with Python 2.x support'
+	  if has('python_dynamic')
+	    echo 'Python 2.x dynamically loaded'
+	  endif
+	endif
+  	if has('python3_compiled')
+	  echo 'compiled with Python 3.x support'
+	  if has('python3_dynamic')
+	    echo 'Python 3.x dynamically loaded'
+	  endif
+	endif
+
+This also tells you whether Python is dynamically loaded, which will fail if
+the runtime library cannot be found.
+
 ==============================================================================
 11. Python X						*python_x* *pythonx*
 
@@ -894,10 +915,10 @@ On Ubuntu you will want to install these packages for Python 2:
 	python-dev
 For Python 3:
 	python3
-	pytyon3-dev
+	python3-dev
 For Python 3.6:
 	python3.6
-	pytyon3.6-dev
+	python3.6-dev
 
 If you have more than one version of Python 3, you need to link python3 to the
 one you prefer, before running configure.

runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Sep 01
+*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Shugo Maeda
@@ -221,6 +221,9 @@ for sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "ruby\d*.dll\c".
 If you want to build Vim with RubyInstaller 1.9 or 2.X using MSVC, you need
 some tricks.  See the src/INSTALLpc.txt for detail.
 
+If Vim is built with RubyInstaller 2.4 or later, you may also need to add
+"C:\Ruby<version>\bin\ruby_builtin_dlls" to the PATH environment variable.
+
 
 Unix ~
 

runtime/doc/indent.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*indent.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Dec 06
+*indent.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -414,10 +414,10 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 							*cino-(*
 	(N    When in unclosed parentheses, indent N characters from the line
 	      with the unclosed parentheses.  Add a 'shiftwidth' for every
-	      unclosed parentheses.  When N is 0 or the unclosed parentheses
+	      extra unclosed parentheses.  When N is 0 or the unclosed
-	      is the first non-white character in its line, line up with the
+	      parentheses is the first non-white character in its line, line
-	      next non-white character after the unclosed parentheses.
+	      up with the next non-white character after the unclosed
-	      (default 'shiftwidth' * 2).
+	      parentheses.  (default 'shiftwidth' * 2).
 
 		cino=			  cino=(0 >
 		  if (c1 && (c2 ||	    if (c1 && (c2 ||
@@ -428,7 +428,8 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 		     {			       {
 <
 							*cino-u*
-	uN    Same as (N, but for one level deeper.  (default 'shiftwidth').
+	uN    Same as (N, but for one nesting level deeper.
+	      (default 'shiftwidth').
 
 		cino=			  cino=u2 >
 		  if (c123456789	    if (c123456789

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 22
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 19
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -528,8 +528,11 @@ tag		command		   action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-W_CTRL-]|	CTRL-W CTRL-]	   same as "CTRL-W ]"
 |CTRL-W_CTRL-^|	CTRL-W CTRL-^	   same as "CTRL-W ^"
 |CTRL-W_CTRL-_|	CTRL-W CTRL-_	   same as "CTRL-W _"
+|CTRL-W_quote|	CTRL-W "	   terminal window: paste register
 |CTRL-W_+|	CTRL-W +	   increase current window height N lines
 |CTRL-W_-|	CTRL-W -	   decrease current window height N lines
+|CTRL-W_.|	CTRL-W .	   terminal window: type CTRL-W
+|CTRL-W_:|	CTRL-W :	   same as |:|, edit a command line
 |CTRL-W_<|	CTRL-W <	   decrease current window width N columns
 |CTRL-W_=|	CTRL-W =	   make all windows the same height & width
 |CTRL-W_>|	CTRL-W >	   increase current window width N columns
@@ -537,6 +540,7 @@ tag		command		   action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-W_J|	CTRL-W J	   move current window to the very bottom
 |CTRL-W_K|	CTRL-W K	   move current window to the very top
 |CTRL-W_L|	CTRL-W L	   move current window to the far right
+|CTRL-W_N|	CTRL-W N	   terminal window: go to Terminal Normal mode
 |CTRL-W_P|	CTRL-W P	   go to preview window
 |CTRL-W_R|	CTRL-W R	   rotate windows upwards N times
 |CTRL-W_S|	CTRL-W S	   same as "CTRL-W s"
@@ -955,7 +959,7 @@ tag		command	      note action in Visual mode	~
 |v_i{|		i{		   same as iB
 |v_i}|		i}		   same as iB
 |v_o|		o		   move cursor to other corner of area
-|v_r|		r		2  delete highlighted area and start insert
+|v_r|		r		2  replace highlighted area with a character
 |v_s|		s		2  delete highlighted area and start insert
 |v_u|		u		2  make highlighted area lowercase
 |v_v|		v		   make Visual mode characterwise or stop
@@ -1573,18 +1577,23 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:tcldo|	:tcld[o]	execute Tcl command for each line
 |:tclfile|	:tclf[ile]	execute Tcl script file
 |:tearoff|	:te[aroff]	tear-off a menu
+|:terminal|	:ter[minal]	open a terminal window
 |:tfirst|	:tf[irst]	jump to first matching tag
 |:throw|	:th[row]	throw an exception
 |:tjump|	:tj[ump]	like ":tselect", but jump directly when there
 				is only one match
 |:tlast|	:tl[ast]	jump to last matching tag
+|:tmapclear|	:tmapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Terminal-Job mode
+|:tmap|		:tma[p]		like ":map" but for Terminal-Job mode
 |:tmenu|	:tm[enu]	define menu tooltip
 |:tnext|	:tn[ext]	jump to next matching tag
+|:tnoremap|	:tno[remap]	like ":noremap" but for Terminal-Job mode
 |:topleft|	:to[pleft]	make split window appear at top or far left
 |:tprevious|	:tp[revious]	jump to previous matching tag
 |:trewind|	:tr[ewind]	jump to first matching tag
 |:try|		:try		execute commands, abort on error or exception
 |:tselect|	:ts[elect]	list matching tags and select one
+|:tunmap|	:tunma[p]	like ":unmap" but for Terminal-Job mode
 |:tunmenu|	:tu[nmenu]	remove menu tooltip
 |:undo|		:u[ndo]		undo last change(s)
 |:undojoin|	:undoj[oin]	join next change with previous undo block

runtime/doc/insert.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 May 30
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Feb 10
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ An example for using CTRL-G U: >
 	inoremap ( ()<C-G>U<Left>
 
 This makes it possible to use the cursor keys in Insert mode, without breaking
-the undo sequence and therefore using |.| (redo) will work as expected. 
+the undo sequence and therefore using |.| (redo) will work as expected.
 Also entering a text like (with the "(" mapping from above): >
 
    Lorem ipsum (dolor
@@ -1103,6 +1103,8 @@ items:
 			item with the same word is already present.
 	empty		when non-zero this match will be added even when it is
 			an empty string
+	user_data 	custom data which is associated with the item and
+			available in |v:completed_item|
 
 All of these except "icase", "dup" and "empty" must be a string.  If an item
 does not meet these requirements then an error message is given and further
@@ -1196,6 +1198,8 @@ The menu is used when:
 
 The 'pumheight' option can be used to set a maximum height.  The default is to
 use all space available.
+The 'pumwidth' option can be used to set a minimum width.  The default is 15
+characters.
 
 There are three states:
 1. A complete match has been inserted, e.g., after using CTRL-N or CTRL-P.
@@ -1296,7 +1300,8 @@ it here: http://ctags.sourceforge.net/  Version 5.6 or later is recommended.
 For version 5.5.4 you should add a patch that adds the "typename:" field:
 	ftp://ftp.vim.org/pub/vim/unstable/patches/ctags-5.5.4.patch
 A compiled .exe for MS-Windows can be found at:
-	http://georgevreilly.com/vim/ctags.html
+	http://ctags.sourceforge.net/
+	https://github.com/universal-ctags/ctags-win32
 
 If you want to complete system functions you can do something like this.  Use
 ctags to generate a tags file for all the system header files: >
@@ -1472,7 +1477,7 @@ The completions provided by CTRL-X CTRL-O are sensitive to the context:
 
 Notes:
  - Vim will load/evaluate code in order to provide completions.  This may
-   cause some code execution, which may be a concern. This is no longer 
+   cause some code execution, which may be a concern. This is no longer
    enabled by default, to enable this feature add >
      let g:rubycomplete_buffer_loading = 1
 <- In context 1 above, Vim can parse the entire buffer to add a list of
@@ -1528,15 +1533,15 @@ that begin with the filetype, "php", in this case.  For example these syntax
 groups are included by default with the PHP: phpEnvVar, phpIntVar,
 phpFunctions.
 
-If you wish non-filetype syntax items to also be included, you can use a 
+If you wish non-filetype syntax items to also be included, you can use a
-regular expression syntax (added in version 13.0 of autoload\syntaxcomplete.vim)
+regular expression syntax (added in version 13.0 of
-to add items.  Looking at the output from ":syntax list" while editing a PHP file 
+autoload\syntaxcomplete.vim) to add items.  Looking at the output from
-I can see some of these entries: >
+":syntax list" while editing a PHP file I can see some of these entries: >
     htmlArg,htmlTag,htmlTagName,javaScriptStatement,javaScriptGlobalObjects
 
 To pick up any JavaScript and HTML keyword syntax groups while editing a PHP
-file, you can use 3 different regexs, one for each language.  Or you can 
+file, you can use 3 different regexs, one for each language.  Or you can
-simply restrict the include groups to a particular value, without using 
+simply restrict the include groups to a particular value, without using
 a regex string: >
     let g:omni_syntax_group_include_php = 'php\w\+,javaScript\w\+,html\w\+'
     let g:omni_syntax_group_include_php = 'phpFunctions,phpMethods'
@@ -1549,9 +1554,9 @@ highlight.  These items will be available within the omni completion list.
 
 Some people may find this list unwieldy or are only interested in certain
 items.  There are two ways to prune this list (if necessary).  If you find
-certain syntax groups you do not wish displayed you can use two different 
+certain syntax groups you do not wish displayed you can use two different
-methods to identify these groups.  The first specifically lists the syntax 
+methods to identify these groups.  The first specifically lists the syntax
-groups by name.  The second uses a regular expression to identify both 
+groups by name.  The second uses a regular expression to identify both
 syntax groups.  Simply add one the following to your vimrc: >
     let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_php = 'phpCoreConstant,phpConstant'
     let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_php = 'php\w*Constant'
@@ -1574,22 +1579,22 @@ vimrc: >
 
 For plugin developers, the plugin exposes a public function OmniSyntaxList.
 This function can be used to request a List of syntax items.  When editing a
-SQL file (:e syntax.sql) you can use the ":syntax list" command to see the 
+SQL file (:e syntax.sql) you can use the ":syntax list" command to see the
 various groups and syntax items.  For example: >
-    syntax list 
+    syntax list
 
-Yields data similar to this: >
+Yields data similar to this:
-    sqlOperator    xxx some prior all like and any escape exists in is not 
+    sqlOperator    xxx some prior all like and any escape exists in is not ~
-                       or intersect minus between distinct
+                       or intersect minus between distinct ~
-                       links to Operator
+                       links to Operator ~
-    sqlType        xxx varbit varchar nvarchar bigint int uniqueidentifier 
+    sqlType        xxx varbit varchar nvarchar bigint int uniqueidentifier ~
-                       date money long tinyint unsigned xml text smalldate 
+                       date money long tinyint unsigned xml text smalldate ~
-                       double datetime nchar smallint numeric time bit char 
+                       double datetime nchar smallint numeric time bit char ~
-                       varbinary binary smallmoney
+                       varbinary binary smallmoney ~
-                       image float integer timestamp real decimal
+                       image float integer timestamp real decimal ~
 
 There are two syntax groups listed here: sqlOperator and sqlType.  To retrieve
-a List of syntax items you can call OmniSyntaxList a number of different 
+a List of syntax items you can call OmniSyntaxList a number of different
 ways.  To retrieve all syntax items regardless of syntax group:  >
     echo OmniSyntaxList( [] )
 
@@ -1606,7 +1611,6 @@ From within a plugin, you would typically assign the output to a List: >
     let myKeywords = []
     let myKeywords = OmniSyntaxList( ['sqlKeyword'] )
 
-    
 
 SQL							*ft-sql-omni*
 

runtime/doc/intro.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Sep 24
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Jan 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -138,14 +138,19 @@ There are two ways to report bugs, both work:
    see the message.  If you don't want that, e.g. because it is a security
    issue, send it to <bugs@vim.org>, this only goes to the Vim maintainer
    (that's Bram).
-2. Open issue on GitHub: https://github.com/vim/vim/issues
+2. Open an issue on GitHub: https://github.com/vim/vim/issues
    The text will be forwarded to the vim-dev maillist.
 
 Please be brief; all the time that is spent on answering mail is subtracted
 from the time that is spent on improving Vim!  Always give a reproducible
-example and try to find out which settings or other things influence the
+example and try to find out which settings or other things trigger the bug.
-appearance of the bug.  Try different machines, if possible.  Send me patches
+
-if you can!
+Preferably start Vim with: >
+	vim --clean -u reproduce.vim
+Where reproduce.vim is a script that reproduces the problem.  Try different
+machines, if relevant (is this an MS-Windows specific bug perhaps?).
+
+Send me patches if you can!
 
 It will help to include information about the version of Vim you are using and
 your setup.  You can get the information with this command: >
@@ -259,6 +264,10 @@ Vim would never have become what it is now, without the help of these people!
 	Juergen Weigert		Lattice version, AUX improvements, UNIX and
 				MS-DOS ports, autoconf
 	Stefan 'Sec' Zehl	Maintainer of vim.org
+	Yasuhiro Matsumoto	many MS-Windows improvements
+	Ken Takata		fixes and features
+	Kazunobu Kuriyama	GTK 3
+	Christian Brabandt	many fixes, features, user support, etc.
 
 I wish to thank all the people that sent me bug reports and suggestions.  The
 list is too long to mention them all here.  Vim would not be the same without
@@ -525,7 +534,7 @@ examples and use them directly.  Or type them literally, including the '<' and
 ==============================================================================
 5. Modes, introduction				*vim-modes-intro* *vim-modes*
 
-Vim has six BASIC modes:
+Vim has seven BASIC modes:
 
 					*Normal* *Normal-mode* *command-mode*
 Normal mode		In Normal mode you can enter all the normal editor
@@ -561,7 +570,12 @@ Ex mode			Like Command-line mode, but after entering a command
 			you remain in Ex mode.  Very limited editing of the
 			command line.  |Ex-mode|
 
-There are six ADDITIONAL modes.  These are variants of the BASIC modes:
+Terminal-Job mode	Interacting with a job in a terminal window.  Typed
+			keys go to the job and the job output is displayed in
+			the terminal window.  See |terminal| about how to
+			switch to other modes.
+
+There are seven ADDITIONAL modes.  These are variants of the BASIC modes:
 
 				*Operator-pending* *Operator-pending-mode*
 Operator-pending mode	This is like Normal mode, but after an operator
@@ -587,6 +601,10 @@ Insert Normal mode	Entered when CTRL-O given in Insert mode.  This is
 			If the 'showmode' option is on "-- (insert) --" is
 			shown at the bottom of the window.
 
+Terminal-Normal mode	Using Normal mode in a terminal window.  Making
+			changes is impossible.  Use an insert command, such as
+			"a" or "i", to return to Terminal-Job mode.
+
 Insert Visual mode	Entered when starting a Visual selection from Insert
 			mode, e.g., by using CTRL-O and then "v", "V" or
 			CTRL-V.  When the Visual selection ends, Vim returns
@@ -661,6 +679,8 @@ Normal mode from any other mode.  This can be used to make sure Vim is in
 Normal mode, without causing a beep like <Esc> would.  However, this does not
 work in Ex mode.  When used after a command that takes an argument, such as
 |f| or |m|, the timeout set with 'ttimeoutlen' applies.
+When focus is in a terminal window, CTRL-\ CTRL-N goes to Normal mode for only
+one command, see |t_CTRL-\_CTRL-N|.
 
 	*CTRL-\_CTRL-G* *i_CTRL-\_CTRL-G* *c_CTRL-\_CTRL-G* *v_CTRL-\_CTRL-G*
 The command CTRL-\ CTRL-G or <C-\><C-G> can be used to go to Insert mode when
@@ -823,10 +843,12 @@ by Vim.  {Vi: not ok}
 ==============================================================================
 8. Definitions						*definitions*
 
+  buffer		Contains lines of text, usually read from a file.
   screen		The whole area that Vim uses to work in.  This can be
 			a terminal emulator window.  Also called "the Vim
 			window".
-  window		A view on a buffer.
+  window		A view on a buffer.  There can be multiple windows for
+			one buffer.
 
 A screen contains one or more windows, separated by status lines and with the
 command line at the bottom.

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 May 30
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ manual.
 1. Key mapping				*key-mapping* *mapping* *macro*
 
 Key mapping is used to change the meaning of typed keys.  The most common use
-is to define a sequence commands for a function key.  Example: >
+is to define a sequence of commands for a function key.  Example: >
 
 	:map <F2> a<C-R>=strftime("%c")<CR><Esc>
 
@@ -55,6 +55,7 @@ modes.
 :im[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-i|		*:im* *:imap*
 :lm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-l|		*:lm* *:lmap*
 :cm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-c|		*:cm* *:cmap*
+:tma[p]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-t|		*:tma* *:tmap*
 			Map the key sequence {lhs} to {rhs} for the modes
 			where the map command applies.  The result, including
 			{rhs}, is then further scanned for mappings.  This
@@ -71,6 +72,7 @@ modes.
 :ino[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-i|	*:ino* *:inoremap*
 :ln[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-l|	*:ln*  *:lnoremap*
 :cno[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-c|	*:cno* *:cnoremap*
+:tno[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-t|	*:tno* *:tnoremap*
 			Map the key sequence {lhs} to {rhs} for the modes
 			where the map command applies.  Disallow mapping of
 			{rhs}, to avoid nested and recursive mappings.  Often
@@ -87,6 +89,7 @@ modes.
 :iu[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-i|		*:iu*   *:iunmap*
 :lu[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-l|		*:lu*   *:lunmap*
 :cu[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-c|		*:cu*   *:cunmap*
+:tunma[p] {lhs}			|mapmode-t|		*:tunma* *:tunmap*
 			Remove the mapping of {lhs} for the modes where the
 			map command applies.  The mapping may remain defined
 			for other modes where it applies.
@@ -105,6 +108,7 @@ modes.
 :imapc[lear]			|mapmode-i|		*:imapc*  *:imapclear*
 :lmapc[lear]			|mapmode-l|		*:lmapc*  *:lmapclear*
 :cmapc[lear]			|mapmode-c|		*:cmapc*  *:cmapclear*
+:tmapc[lear]			|mapmode-t|		*:tmapc*  *:tmapclear*
 			Remove ALL mappings for the modes where the map
 			command applies.  {not in Vi}
 			Use the <buffer> argument to remove buffer-local
@@ -121,6 +125,7 @@ modes.
 :im[ap]				|mapmode-i|
 :lm[ap]				|mapmode-l|
 :cm[ap]				|mapmode-c|
+:tma[p]				|mapmode-t|
 			List all key mappings for the modes where the map
 			command applies.  Note that ":map" and ":map!" are
 			used most often, because they include the other modes.
@@ -135,6 +140,7 @@ modes.
 :im[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-i|		*:imap_l*
 :lm[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-l|		*:lmap_l*
 :cm[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-c|		*:cmap_l*
+:tma[p] {lhs}			|mapmode-t|		*:tmap_l*
 			List the key mappings for the key sequences starting
 			with {lhs} in the modes where the map command applies.
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -318,6 +324,7 @@ Overview of which map command works in which mode.  More details below.
 :imap  :inoremap :iunmap    Insert
 :lmap  :lnoremap :lunmap    Insert, Command-line, Lang-Arg
 :cmap  :cnoremap :cunmap    Command-line
+:tmap  :tnoremap :tunmap    Terminal-Job
 
 
     COMMANDS				      MODES ~
@@ -358,6 +365,10 @@ Therefore the ":map" and ":map!" commands enter and display mappings for
 several modes.  In Vim you can use the ":nmap", ":vmap", ":omap", ":cmap" and
 ":imap" commands to enter mappings for each mode separately.
 
+							*mapmode-t*
+The terminal mappings are used in a terminal window, when typing keys for the
+job running in the terminal.  See |terminal-typing|.
+
 							*omap-info*
 Operator-pending mappings can be used to define a movement command that can be
 used with any operator.  Simple example: ":omap { w" makes "y{" work like "yw"
@@ -418,6 +429,7 @@ When listing mappings the characters in the first two columns are:
 	i	Insert
 	l	":lmap" mappings for Insert, Command-line and Lang-Arg
 	c	Command-line
+	t	Terminal-Job
 
 Just before the {rhs} a special character can appear:
 	*	indicates that it is not remappable
@@ -530,9 +542,9 @@ scenario: >
 	:imap <M-C> foo
 	:set encoding=utf-8
 The mapping for <M-C> is defined with the latin1 encoding, resulting in a 0xc3
-byte.  If you type the character <EFBFBD> (0xe1 <M-a>) in UTF-8 encoding this is the
+byte.  If you type the character á (0xe1 <M-a>) in UTF-8 encoding this is the
 two bytes 0xc3 0xa1.  You don't want the 0xc3 byte to be mapped then or
-otherwise it would be impossible to type the <EFBFBD> character.
+otherwise it would be impossible to type the á character.
 
 					*<Leader>* *mapleader*
 To define a mapping which uses the "mapleader" variable, the special string
@@ -682,7 +694,7 @@ option).  After that it assumes that the 'q' is to be interpreted as such.  If
 you type slowly, or your system is slow, reset the 'timeout' option.  Then you
 might want to set the 'ttimeout' option.
 
-                            				*map-precedence*
+			      				*map-precedence*
 Buffer-local mappings (defined using |:map-<buffer>|) take precedence over
 global mappings.  When a buffer-local mapping is the same as a global mapping,
 Vim will use the buffer-local mapping.  In addition, Vim will use a complete
@@ -1260,6 +1272,7 @@ By default, the arguments of user defined commands do not undergo completion.
 However, by specifying one or the other of the following attributes, argument
 completion can be enabled:
 
+	-complete=arglist	file names in argument list
 	-complete=augroup	autocmd groups
 	-complete=buffer	buffer names
 	-complete=behave	:behave suboptions
@@ -1279,6 +1292,7 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=highlight	highlight groups
 	-complete=history	:history suboptions
 	-complete=locale	locale names (as output of locale -a)
+	-complete=mapclear	buffer argument
 	-complete=mapping	mapping name
 	-complete=menu		menus
 	-complete=messages	|:messages| suboptions
@@ -1414,6 +1428,8 @@ The valid escape sequences are
 	<line1>	The starting line of the command range.
 						*<line2>*
 	<line2>	The final line of the command range.
+						*<range>*
+	<range> The number of items in the command range: 0, 1 or 2
 						*<count>*
 	<count>	Any count supplied (as described for the '-range'
 		and '-count' attributes).

runtime/doc/mbyte.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Jul 21
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Jan 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -26,8 +26,9 @@ For changing the language of messages and menus see |mlang.txt|.
 7.  Input on X11			|mbyte-XIM|
 8.  Input on MS-Windows			|mbyte-IME|
 9.  Input with a keymap			|mbyte-keymap|
-10. Using UTF-8				|mbyte-utf8|
+10. Input with imactivatefunc()		|mbyte-func|
-11. Overview of options			|mbyte-options|
+11. Using UTF-8				|mbyte-utf8|
+12. Overview of options			|mbyte-options|
 
 NOTE: This file contains UTF-8 characters.  These may show up as strange
 characters or boxes when using another encoding.
@@ -832,6 +833,9 @@ Use the RPM or port for your system.
 
   Currently, GUI Vim supports three styles, |OverTheSpot|, |OffTheSpot| and
   |Root|.
+  When compiled with |+GUI_GTK| feature, GUI Vim supports two styles,
+  |OnTheSpot| and |OverTheSpot|.  You can select the style with the 'imstyle'
+  option.
 
 *.  on-the-spot						*OnTheSpot*
     Preedit Area and Status Area are performed by the client application in
@@ -1251,7 +1255,35 @@ Combining forms:
 ﭏ    0xfb4f  Xal  alef-lamed
 
 ==============================================================================
-10. Using UTF-8				*mbyte-utf8* *UTF-8* *utf-8* *utf8*
+10.  Input with imactivatefunc()				*mbyte-func*
+
+Vim has the 'imactivatefunc' and 'imstatusfunc' options. These are useful to
+activate/deactivate the input method from Vim in any way, also with an external
+command. For example, fcitx provide fcitx-remote command: >
+
+	set iminsert=2
+	set imsearch=2
+	set imcmdline
+
+	set imactivatefunc=ImActivate
+	function! ImActivate(active)
+	  if a:active
+	    call system('fcitx-remote -o')
+	  else
+	    call system('fcitx-remote -c')
+	  endif
+	endfunction
+
+	set imstatusfunc=ImStatus
+	function! ImStatus()
+	  return system('fcitx-remote')[0] is# '2'
+	endfunction
+
+Using this script, you can activate/deactivate XIM via Vim even when it is not
+compiled with |+xim|.
+
+==============================================================================
+11. Using UTF-8				*mbyte-utf8* *UTF-8* *utf-8* *utf8*
 							*Unicode* *unicode*
 The Unicode character set was designed to include all characters from other
 character sets.  Therefore it is possible to write text in any language using
@@ -1399,7 +1431,7 @@ not everybody is able to type a composing character.
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-11. Overview of options					*mbyte-options*
+12. Overview of options					*mbyte-options*
 
 These options are relevant for editing multi-byte files.  Check the help in
 options.txt for detailed information.

runtime/doc/message.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*message.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 25
+*message.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Feb 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ See `:messages` above.
 LIST OF MESSAGES
 			*E222* *E228* *E232* *E256* *E293* *E298* *E304* *E317*
 			*E318* *E356* *E438* *E439* *E440* *E316* *E320* *E322*
-			*E323* *E341* *E473* *E570* *E685*  >
+			*E323* *E341* *E473* *E570* *E685* *E950*  >
   Add to read buffer
   makemap: Illegal mode
   Cannot create BalloonEval with both message and callback
@@ -97,6 +97,7 @@ LIST OF MESSAGES
   Internal error
   Internal error: {function}
   fatal error in cs_manage_matches
+  Invalid count for del_bytes(): {N}
 
 This is an internal error.  If you can reproduce it, please send in a bug
 report. |bugs|
@@ -463,12 +464,6 @@ changed.  To avoid the message reset the 'warn' option.
 Something inside Vim went wrong and resulted in a NULL pointer.  If you know
 how to reproduce this problem, please report it. |bugs|
 
-							*E172*  >
-  Only one file name allowed
-
-The ":edit" command only accepts one file name.  When you want to specify
-several files for editing use ":next" |:next|.
-
 						*E41* *E82* *E83* *E342*  >
   Out of memory!
   Out of memory!  (allocating {number} bytes)
@@ -645,6 +640,9 @@ starts.  It can be fixed in one of these ways:
 - Just write the file again the next day.  Or set your clock to the next day,
   write the file twice and set the clock back.
 
+If you get W11 all the time, you may need to disable "Acronis Active
+Protection" or register Vim as a trusted service/application.
+
 							*W12*  >
   Warning: File "{filename}" has changed and the buffer was changed in Vim as well
 

runtime/doc/mlang.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 04
+*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -190,8 +190,8 @@ you can do it without restarting Vim: >
 	:source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
 
 Each part of a menu path is translated separately.  The result is that when
-"Help" is translated to "Hilfe" and "Overview" to "<EFBFBD>berblick" then
+"Help" is translated to "Hilfe" and "Overview" to "Überblick" then
-"Help.Overview" will be translated to "Hilfe.<EFBFBD>berblick".
+"Help.Overview" will be translated to "Hilfe.Überblick".
 
 ==============================================================================
 3. Scripts						*multilang-scripts*

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 12
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Oct 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1317,7 +1317,10 @@ the current line is included.  You can then use "%" to go to the matching line.
 H			To line [count] from top (Home) of window (default:
 			first line on the window) on the first non-blank
 			character |linewise|.  See also 'startofline' option.
-			Cursor is adjusted for 'scrolloff' option.
+			Cursor is adjusted for 'scrolloff' option, unless an
+			operator is pending, in which case the text may
+			scroll.  E.g. "yH" yanks from the first visible line
+			until the cursor line (inclusive).
 
 						*M*
 M			To Middle line of window, on the first non-blank
@@ -1327,7 +1330,10 @@ M			To Middle line of window, on the first non-blank
 L			To line [count] from bottom of window (default: Last
 			line on the window) on the first non-blank character
 			|linewise|.  See also 'startofline' option.
-			Cursor is adjusted for 'scrolloff' option.
+			Cursor is adjusted for 'scrolloff' option, unless an
+			operator is pending, in which case the text may
+			scroll.  E.g. "yL" yanks from the cursor to the last
+			visible line.
 
 <LeftMouse>		Moves to the position on the screen where the mouse
 			click is |exclusive|.  See also |<LeftMouse>|.  If the

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 18
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 22
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ achieve special effects.  These options come in three forms:
 :se[t] {option}&vi	Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi}
 :se[t] {option}&vim	Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi}
 
-:se[t] all&		Set all options to their default value.  The values of 
+:se[t] all&		Set all options to their default value.  The values of
 			these options are not changed:
 			  all terminal options, starting with t_
 			  'columns'
@@ -402,8 +402,8 @@ Setting the filetype
 			used to set the option value in, unless this is a help
 			window, in which case the window below help window is
 			used (skipping the option-window).
-			{not available when compiled without the |+eval| or
+			{not available when compiled without the |+eval|
-			|+autocmd| features}
+			feature}
 
 								*$HOME*
 Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an
@@ -417,12 +417,23 @@ On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too.  The name between {} can
 contain non-id characters then.  Note that if you want to use this for the
 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.
 
-On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then
-at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH.
-
 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".
 
+							*$HOME-windows*
+On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then
+at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH.
+If $HOMEDRIVE is not set then $USERPROFILE is used.
+
+This expanded value is not exported to the environment, this matters when
+running an external command: >
+	:echo system('set | findstr ^HOME=')
+and >
+	:echo luaeval('os.getenv("HOME")')
+should echo nothing (an empty string) despite exists('$HOME') being true.
+When setting $HOME to a non-empty string it will be exported to the
+subprocesses.
+
 
 Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited.  How much depends on
 the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
@@ -721,7 +732,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	Vim may set this option automatically at startup time when Vim is
 	compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and if |t_u7| is set to the
-	escape sequence to request cursor position report.
+	escape sequence to request cursor position report.  The response can
+	be found in |v:termu7resp|.
 
 			*'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'*
 'antialias' 'anti'	boolean (default: off)
@@ -869,11 +881,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 <	Vim will guess the value.  In the GUI this should work correctly,
 	in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.
 
-	When the t_BG option is set, Vim will use it to request the background
+	When the |t_RB| option is set, Vim will use it to request the background
 	color from the terminal.  If the returned RGB value is dark/light and
 	'background' is not dark/light, 'background' will be set and the
 	screen is redrawn.  This may have side effects, make t_BG empty in
-	your .vimrc if you suspect this problem.
+	your .vimrc if you suspect this problem.  The response to |t_RB| can
+	be found in |v:termrbgresp|.
 
 	When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be
 	"light".  When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects
@@ -889,6 +902,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	"screen.linux", "cygwin" or "putty", or $COLORFGBG suggests a dark
 	background.  Otherwise the default is "light".
 
+	The |:terminal| command and the |term_start()| function use the
+	'background' value to decide whether the terminal window will start
+	with a white or black background.
+
 	Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file.  Possibly
 	depending on the terminal name.  Example: >
 		:if &term == "pcterm"
@@ -1070,7 +1087,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 <	Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.
 
 						*'backupskip'* *'bsk'*
-'backupskip' 'bsk'	string	(default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
+'backupskip' 'bsk'	string	(default: "$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
+				 Unix: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
+				 Mac: "/private/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
@@ -1110,7 +1129,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
 			feature}
-	Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality.
+	Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality for the GUI.
+
+		       *'balloonevalterm'* *'bevalterm'* *'noballoonevalterm'*
+		       *'nobevalterm'*
+'balloonevalterm' 'bevalterm'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the
+			|+balloon_eval_term| feature}
+	Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality for the terminal.
 
 						     *'balloonexpr'* *'bexpr'*
 'balloonexpr' 'bexpr'	string	(default "")
@@ -1299,7 +1327,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			    characters.  It permits dynamic French paragraph
 			    indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line
 			    continuation (positive).
-		sbr	    Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the 
+		sbr	    Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the
 			    additional indent.
 	The default value for min is 20 and shift is 0.
 
@@ -1319,8 +1347,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'bufhidden' 'bh'	string (default: "")
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
-			feature}
 	This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
 	displayed in a window:
 	  <empty>	follow the global 'hidden' option
@@ -1355,20 +1381,19 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'buftype' 'bt'		string (default: "")
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
-			feature}
 	The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
 	  <empty>	normal buffer
 	  nofile	buffer which is not related to a file and will not be
 			written
 	  nowrite	buffer which will not be written
 	  acwrite	buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd
-			autocommands. {not available when compiled without the
+			autocommands.
-			|+autocmd| feature}
 	  quickfix	quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow|
 			or list of locations |:lwindow|
 	  help		help buffer (you are not supposed to set this
 			manually)
+	  terminal	buffer for a |terminal| (you are not supposed to set
+			this manually)
 
 	This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
 	specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
@@ -1784,7 +1809,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	'copyindent'	+ off		don't copy indent structure
 	'cpoptions'	& (all flags)	Vi-compatible flags
 	'cscopepathcomp'+ 0		don't show directories in tags list
-	'cscoperelative'+ off		
+	'cscoperelative'+ off		don't use basename of path as prefix
 	'cscopetag'	+ off		don't use cscope for ":tag"
 	'cscopetagorder'+ 0		see |cscopetagorder|
 	'cscopeverbose'	+ off		see |cscopeverbose|
@@ -2092,7 +2117,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 								*cpo-E*
 		E	It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
 			"gU" on an Empty region.  The operators only work when
-			at least one character is to be operate on.  Example:
+			at least one character is to be operated on.  Example:
 			This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
 								*cpo-f*
 		f	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
@@ -2442,8 +2467,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'cursorbind' 'crb'	boolean  (default off)
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+cursorbind|
-			feature}
 	When this option is set, as the cursor in the current
 	window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have
 	this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and
@@ -2610,6 +2633,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		vertical	Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless
 				explicitly specified otherwise).
 
+		hiddenoff	Do not use diff mode for a buffer when it
+				becomes hidden.
+
 		foldcolumn:{n}	Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when
 				starting diff mode.  Without this 2 is used.
 
@@ -2891,8 +2917,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'eventignore' 'ei'	string	(default "")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
-			feature}
 	A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
 	When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand
 	events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed.
@@ -3141,8 +3165,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'filetype' 'ft'		string (default: "")
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
-			feature}
 	When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
 	All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
 	executed.  Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
@@ -3441,7 +3463,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	when internal formatting is used.  Make sure the cursor is kept in the
 	same spot relative to the text then!  The |mode()| function will
 	return "i" or "R" in this situation.
-	
+
 	When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
 	the internal format mechanism.
 
@@ -3506,6 +3528,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always
 	off.
 	Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files.
+	'fsync' also applies to |writefile()|, unless a flag is used to
+	overrule it.
 
 				   *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'*
 'gdefault' 'gd'		boolean	(default off)
@@ -3823,7 +3847,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
 	"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
 
-	Valid letters are as follows:
+	Valid characters are as follows:
+								*'go-!'*
+	  '!'	External commands are executed in a terminal window.  Without
+		this flag the MS-Windows GUI will open a console window to
+		execute the command.  The Unix GUI will simulate a dumb
+		terminal to list the command output.
+		The terminal window will be positioned at the bottom, and grow
+		upwards as needed.
 							*guioptions_a* *'go-a'*
 	  'a'	Autoselect:  If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
 		or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
@@ -3880,7 +3911,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
 		switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc|
 		file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
-		":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
+		`:syntax on` and `:filetype on` commands load the menu too).
 								*'go-g'*
 	  'g'	Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey.  If
 		'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
@@ -3924,7 +3955,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
 								*'go-F'*
 	  'F'	Add a footer.  Only for Motif.  See |gui-footer|.
-
+								*'go-k'*
+	  'k'	Keep the GUI window size when adding/removing a scrollbar, or
+		toolbar, tabline, etc.  Instead, the behavior is similar to
+		when the window is maximized and will adjust 'lines' and
+		'columns' to fit to the window.  Without the 'k' flag Vim will
+		try to keep 'lines' and 'columns' the same when adding and
+		removing GUI components.
 
 						*'guipty'* *'noguipty'*
 'guipty'		boolean	(default on)
@@ -4042,7 +4079,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				     L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,+:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel,
 				     x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb,*:TabLine,
 				     #:TabLineSel,_:TabLineFill,!:CursorColumn,
-				     .:CursorLine,o:ColorColumn,q:QuickFixLine")
+				     .:CursorLine,o:ColorColumn,q:QuickFixLine,
+				     z:StatusLineTerm,Z:StatusLineTermNC")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
@@ -4067,7 +4105,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			    set.
 	|hl-Question|	 r  |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
 	|hl-StatusLine|	 s  status line of current window |status-line|
-	|hl-StatusLineNC| S  status lines of not-current windows
+	|hl-StatusLineNC|  S  status lines of not-current windows
 	|hl-Title|	 t  Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
 	|hl-VertSplit|	 c  column used to separate vertically split windows
 	|hl-Visual|	 v  Visual mode
@@ -4101,6 +4139,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		s	standout	(termcap entry "so" and "se")
 		u	underline	(termcap entry "us" and "ue")
 		c	undercurl	(termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce")
+		t	strikethrough	(termcap entry "Ts" and "Te")
 		n	no highlighting
 		-	no highlighting
 		:	use a highlight group
@@ -4222,10 +4261,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'imactivatefunc' 'imaf'	string (default "")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{only available when compiled with |+xim| and
+			{only available when compiled with |+mbyte|}
-			|+GUI_GTK|}
 	This option specifies a function that will be called to
-	activate/inactivate Input Method.
+	activate or deactivate the Input Method.
+	It is not used in the GUI.
 
 	Example: >
 		function ImActivateFunc(active)
@@ -4274,8 +4313,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'imcmdline' 'imc'	boolean (default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{only available when compiled with the |+xim|,
+			{only available when compiled with |+mbyte|}
-			|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| features}
 	When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
 	line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
 	Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
@@ -4286,15 +4324,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'imdisable' 'imd'	boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{only available when compiled with the |+xim|,
+			{only available when compiled with |+mbyte|}
-			|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| features}
 	When set the Input Method is never used.  This is useful to disable
 	the IM when it doesn't work properly.
 	Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines.  This
 	may change in later releases.
 
 						*'iminsert'* *'imi'*
-'iminsert' 'imi'	number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
+'iminsert' 'imi'	number (default 0)
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 	Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
@@ -4302,8 +4339,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		0	:lmap is off and IM is off
 		1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
 		2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
-	2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim|
-	or |global-ime|.
 	To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
 	this can be used: >
 		:inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
@@ -4316,8 +4351,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
 	methods.  Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
 
+	You can set 'imactivatefunc' and 'imstatusfunc' to handle IME/XIM
+	via external command if vim is not compiled with the |+xim|,
+	|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime|.
+
 						*'imsearch'* *'ims'*
-'imsearch' 'ims'	number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
+'imsearch' 'ims'	number (default -1)
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 	Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
@@ -4338,10 +4377,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'imstatusfunc' 'imsf'	string (default "")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{only available when compiled with |+xim| and
+			{only available when compiled with |+mbyte|}
-			|+GUI_GTK|}
 	This option specifies a function that is called to obtain the status
 	of Input Method.  It must return a positive number when IME is active.
+	It is not used in the GUI.
 
 	Example: >
 		function ImStatusFunc()
@@ -4352,6 +4391,23 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 <
 	NOTE: This function is invoked very often.  Keep it fast.
 
+						*'imstyle'* *'imst'*
+'imstyle' 'imst'	number (default 1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with |+xim| and
+			|+GUI_GTK|}
+	This option specifies the input style of Input Method:
+	0   use on-the-spot style
+	1   over-the-spot style
+	See: |xim-input-style|
+
+	For a long time on-the-spot style had been used in the GTK version of
+	vim, however, it is known that it causes troubles when using mappings,
+	|single-repeat|, etc.  Therefore over-the-spot style becomes the
+	default now.  This should work fine for most people, however if you
+	have any problem with it, try using on-the-spot style.
+
 						*'include'* *'inc'*
 'include' 'inc'		string	(default "^\s*#\s*include")
 			global or local to buffer |global-local|
@@ -4413,7 +4469,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	match may not be found.  This is to avoid that Vim hangs while you
 	are typing the pattern.
 	The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'.
-	See also: 'hlsearch'.
+	When 'hlsearch' is on, all matched strings are highlighted too while
+	typing a search command. See also: 'hlsearch'.
+	If you don't want turn 'hlsearch' on, but want to highlight all matches
+	while searching, you can turn on and off 'hlsearch' with autocmd.
+	Example: >
+		augroup vimrc-incsearch-highlight
+		  autocmd!
+		  autocmd CmdlineEnter /,\? :set hlsearch
+		  autocmd CmdlineLeave /,\? :set nohlsearch
+		augroup END
+<
 	CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match
 	to the command line.  If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the
 	command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is
@@ -4966,8 +5032,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
 	This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
 	of plugins.
-	Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
+	Note that using the "-u NONE", "-u DEFAULTS" and "--noplugin" command
-	reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
+	line arguments reset this option.  See |-u| and |--noplugin|.
 
 						*'luadll'*
 'luadll'		string	(default depends on the build)
@@ -5050,8 +5116,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global or local to buffer |global-local|
 			{not in Vi}
 	Program to use for the ":make" command.  See |:make_makeprg|.
-	This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see  |:_%| and |:_#|), 
+	This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see  |:_%| and |:_#|),
-	which are expanded to the current and alternate file name.  Use |::S| 
+	which are expanded to the current and alternate file name.  Use |::S|
 	to escape file names in case they contain special characters.
 	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
 	about including spaces and backslashes.
@@ -5083,7 +5149,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		:au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;
 
 <	For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
-	the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help|
+	the $VIMRUNTIME/pack/dist/opt/matchit directory. |add-local-help|
 
 						*'matchtime'* *'mat'*
 'matchtime' 'mat'	number	(default 5)
@@ -5139,8 +5205,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer.  When this
 	limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause
-	other memory to be freed.  The maximum usable value is about 2000000.
+	other memory to be freed.
-	Use this to work without a limit.  Also see 'maxmemtot'.
+	The maximum usable value is about 2000000.  Use this to work without a
+	limit.
+	The value is ignored when 'swapfile' is off.
+	Also see 'maxmemtot'.
 
 						*'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'*
 'maxmempattern' 'mmp'	number	(default 1000)
@@ -5169,6 +5238,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing?  Keep in mind that text is
 	stored in the swap file, one can edit files > 2 Gbyte anyway.  We do
 	need the memory to store undo info.
+	Buffers with 'swapfile' off still count to the total amount of memory
+	used.
 	Also see 'maxmem'.
 
 						*'menuitems'* *'mis'*
@@ -5265,6 +5336,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	an explanation.
 	When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
 	will be ignored.
+	Note that the text may actually be the same, e.g. 'modified' is set
+	when using "rA" on an "A".
 
 						*'more'* *'nomore'*
 'more'			boolean	(Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
@@ -5286,7 +5359,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	sysmouse and Linux console with gpm).  For using the mouse in the
 	GUI, see |gui-mouse|.
 	The mouse can be enabled for different modes:
-		n	Normal mode
+		n	Normal mode and Terminal modes
 		v	Visual mode
 		i	Insert mode
 		c	Command-line mode
@@ -5353,6 +5426,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
 	You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|.
+	In a terminal the popup menu works if Vim is compiled with the
+	|+insert_expand| option.
 
 	Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
 	See |gui-mouse-mapping|.  But mappings are NOT used for modeless
@@ -5434,6 +5509,33 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be
 	recognized as a multi click.
 
+						*'mzschemedll'*
+'mzschemedll'		string	(default depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the MzScheme shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_MZSCH_DLL which was specified at compile time.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	The value must be set in the |vimrc| script or earlier.  In the
+	startup, before the |load-plugins| step.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'mzschemegcdll'*
+'mzschemegcdll'		string	(default depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the MzScheme GC shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_MZGC_DLL which was specified at compile time.
+	The value can be equal to 'mzschemedll' if it includes the GC code.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
 						    *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'*
 'mzquantum' 'mzq'	number	(default 100)
 			global
@@ -5658,11 +5760,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	copy of the original file will be kept.  The name of the copy is the
 	name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
 	appended.  This option should start with a dot.  Use a string like
-	".org".  'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The
+	".orig" or ".org".  'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work
-	backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has
+	(Detail: The backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the
-	been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a
+	new file has been successfully written, that's why it must be possible
-	backup file).  If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is
+	to write a backup file).  If there was no file to be backed up, an
-	created.
+	empty file is created.
 	When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
 	Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
 	end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
@@ -5864,6 +5966,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Insert mode completion.  When zero as much space as available is used.
 	|ins-completion-menu|.
 
+						*'pumwidth'* *'pw'*
+'pumwidth' 'pw'		number	(default 15)
+			global
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+insert_expand| feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Determines the minimum width to use for the popup menu for Insert mode
+	completion.  |ins-completion-menu|.
+
 						*'pythondll'*
 'pythondll'		string	(default depends on the build)
 			global
@@ -5874,6 +5985,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
 	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'pythonhome'*
+'pythonhome'		string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the Python 2.x home directory. When 'pythonhome'
+	and the PYTHONHOME environment variable are not set, PYTHON_HOME,
+	which was specified at compile time, will be used for the Python 2.x
+	home directory.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
 						*'pythonthreedll'*
@@ -5886,6 +6011,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
 	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'pythonthreehome'*
+'pythonthreehome'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+python3/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the Python 3 home directory. When
+	'pythonthreehome' and the PYTHONHOME environment variable are not set,
+	PYTHON3_HOME, which was specified at compile time, will be used for
+	the Python 3 home directory.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
 						*'pyxversion'* *'pyx'*
@@ -5945,7 +6084,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{only available when compiled with the |+reltime|
 			feature}
 	The time in milliseconds for redrawing the display.  This applies to
-	searching for patterns for 'hlsearch', |:match| highlighting an syntax
+	searching for patterns for 'hlsearch', |:match| highlighting and syntax
 	highlighting.
 	When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further
 	matches will be highlighted.
@@ -5989,7 +6128,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	characters are put before the number.
 	See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
 	the number.
-	
+
 	The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of
 	'number', see |number_relativenumber| for all combinations of the two
 	options.
@@ -6031,9 +6170,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		  geom	    pixelGeometry	int	0 - 2 (see below)
 		  renmode   renderingMode	int	0 - 6 (see below)
 		  taamode   textAntialiasMode	int	0 - 3 (see below)
+		  scrlines  Scroll Lines	int	(deprecated)
 
-		See this URL for detail:
+		See this URL for detail (except for scrlines):
-		  http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368190.aspx
+		  https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368190.aspx
 
 		For geom: structure of a device pixel.
 		  0 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_FLAT
@@ -6041,7 +6181,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		  2 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_BGR
 
 		See this URL for detail:
-		  http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368114.aspx
+		  https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368114.aspx
 
 		For renmode: method of rendering glyphs.
 		  0 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_DEFAULT
@@ -6053,7 +6193,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		  6 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_OUTLINE
 
 		See this URL for detail:
-		  http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368118.aspx
+		  https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368118.aspx
 
 		For taamode: antialiasing mode used for drawing text.
 		  0 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_DEFAULT
@@ -6062,15 +6202,41 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		  3 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_ALIASED
 
 		See this URL for detail:
-		  http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368170.aspx
+		  https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368170.aspx
+
+		For scrlines:
+		This was used for optimizing scrolling behavior, however this
+		is now deprecated.  If specified, it is simply ignored.
 
 		Example: >
 		  set encoding=utf-8
-		  set gfn=Ricty_Diminished:h12:cSHIFTJIS
+		  set gfn=Ricty_Diminished:h12
 		  set rop=type:directx
 <
-		If select a raster font (Courier, Terminal or FixedSys) to
+		If select a raster font (Courier, Terminal or FixedSys which
-		'guifont', it fallbacks to be drawn by GDI automatically.
+		have ".fon" extension in file name) to 'guifont', it will be
+		drawn by GDI as a fallback.
+
+		NOTE: It is known that some fonts and options combination
+		causes trouble on drawing glyphs.
+
+		  - 'renmode:5' and 'renmode:6' will not work with some
+		    special made fonts (True-Type fonts which includes only
+		    bitmap glyphs).
+		  - 'taamode:3' will not work with some vector fonts.
+
+		NOTE: With this option, you can display colored emoji
+		(emoticon) in Windows 8.1 or later.  To display colored emoji,
+		there are some conditions which you should notice.
+
+		  - If your font includes non-colored emoji already, it will
+		    be used.
+		  - If your font doesn't have emoji, the system chooses an
+		    alternative symbol font.  On Windows 10, "Segoe UI Emoji"
+		    will be used.
+		  - When this alternative font didn't have fixed width glyph,
+		    emoji might be rendered beyond the bounding box of drawing
+		    cell.
 
 	Other render types are currently not supported.
 
@@ -6281,6 +6447,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	to find files which replace a distributed runtime files.  You can put
 	a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed
 	runtime files.
+	When Vim is started with |--clean| the home directory entries are not
+	included.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
@@ -6299,8 +6467,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'scrollbind' 'scb'	boolean  (default off)
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
-			feature}
 	See also |scroll-binding|.  When this option is set, the current
 	window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have
 	this option set) scroll.  This option is useful for viewing the
@@ -6338,8 +6504,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 						*'scrollopt'* *'sbo'*
 'scrollopt' 'sbo'	string	(default "ver,jump")
 			global
-			{not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
-			feature}
 			{not in Vi}
 	This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
 	'scrollbind' windows should behave.  'sbo' stands for ScrollBind
@@ -6429,7 +6593,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 						*'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
 'sessionoptions' 'ssop'	string	(default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,
-					       help,options,tabpages,winsize")
+					 help,options,tabpages,winsize,terminal")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+mksession|
@@ -6461,6 +6625,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   tabpages	all tab pages; without this only the current tab page
 			is restored, so that you can make a session for each
 			tab page separately
+	   terminal	include terminal windows where the command can be restored
 	   unix		with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
 			on Windows or DOS
 	   winpos	position of the whole Vim window
@@ -6484,14 +6649,21 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g.  "csh -f".
 	See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
 	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+
 	If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose
-	it in quotes.  Example: >
+	it in quotes or escape the space.  Example with quotes: >
 		:set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
 <	Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
 	each space (to avoid ending the option value).  Also note that the
 	"-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command
-	name.  And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path
+	name.  Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path
 	separators.
+	Example with escaped space (Vim will do this when initializing the
+	option from $SHELL): >
+		:set shell=/bin/with\\\ space/sh
+<	The resulting value of 'shell' is  "/bin/with\ space/sh", two
+	backslashes are consumed by `:set`.
+
 	Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be
 	included.  Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com"
 	works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g.,
@@ -7249,7 +7421,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	W F   Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
 	y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]".  See 'filetype'.
 	Y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM".  See 'filetype'.
-	      {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature}
 	q S   "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty.
 	k S   Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
 	      being used: "<keymap>"
@@ -7273,7 +7444,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	a S   Argument list status as in default title.  ({current} of {max})
 	      Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
 	{ NF  Evaluate expression between '%{' and '}' and substitute result.
-	      Note that there is no '%' before the closing '}'.
+	      Note that there is no '%' before the closing '}'.  The
+	      expression cannot contain a '}' character, call a function to
+	      work around that.
 	( -   Start of item group.  Can be used for setting the width and
 	      alignment of a section.  Must be followed by %) somewhere.
 	) -   End of item group.  No width fields allowed.
@@ -7330,7 +7503,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	Watch out for errors in expressions.  They may render Vim unusable!
 	If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
-	edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.
+	edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim --clean" to get it right.
 
 	Examples:
 	Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
@@ -7394,6 +7567,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|.
 	If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it,
 	use the |:noswapfile| modifier.
+	See 'directory' for where the swap file is created.
 
 	This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
 	specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
@@ -7740,20 +7914,75 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		:set encoding=utf-8
 <	You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.
 
-						*'termguicolors'* *'tgc'*
+					*'termguicolors'* *'tgc'* *E954*
 'termguicolors' 'tgc'	boolean (default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the
 			|+termguicolors| feature}
 	When on, uses |highlight-guifg| and |highlight-guibg| attributes in
-	the terminal (thus using 24-bit color). Requires a ISO-8613-3
+	the terminal (thus using 24-bit color).
-	compatible terminal.
+
-	If setting this option does not work (produces a colorless UI)
+	Requires a ISO-8613-3 compatible terminal.  If setting this option
-	reading |xterm-true-color| might help.
+	does not work (produces a colorless UI) reading |xterm-true-color|
+	might help.
+
+	For Win32 console, Windows 10 version 1703 (Creators Update) or later
+	is required. Use this check to find out: >
+		if has('vcon')
+<	This requires Vim to be built with the |+vtp| feature.
+
 	Note that the "cterm" attributes are still used, not the "gui" ones.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
+						*'termwinscroll'* *'twsl'*
+'termwinscroll' 'twsl'	number	(default 10000)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+terminal| feature}
+	Number of scrollback lines to keep.  When going over this limit the
+	first 10% of the scrollback lines are deleted.  This is just to reduce
+	the memory usage.  See |Terminal-Normal|.
+
+						*'termwinkey'* *'twk'*
+'termwinkey' 'twk'	string	(default "")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+	The key that starts a CTRL-W command in a terminal window.  Other keys
+	are sent to the job running in the window.
+	The <> notation can be used, e.g.: >
+		:set termwinkey=<C-L>
+<	The string must be one key stroke but can be multiple bytes.
+	When not set CTRL-W is used, so that CTRL-W : gets you to the command
+	line.  If 'termwinkey' is set to CTRL-L then CTRL-L : gets you to the
+	command line.
+
+						*'termwinsize'* *'tws'*
+'termwinsize' 'tws'	string	(default "")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+	Size of the |terminal| window.  Format: {rows}x{columns} or
+	{rows}*{columns}.
+	- When empty the terminal gets the size from the window.
+	- When set with a "x" (e.g., "24x80") the terminal size is not
+	  adjusted to the window size.  If the window is smaller only the
+	  top-left part is displayed.
+	- When set with a "*" (e.g., "10*50") the terminal size follows the
+	  window size, but will not be smaller than the specified rows and/or
+	  columns.
+	- When rows is zero then use the height of the window.
+	- When columns is zero then use the width of the window.
+	- Using "0x0" or "0*0" is the same as empty.
+
+	Examples:
+	  "30x0" uses 30 rows and the current window width.
+	  "20*0" uses at least 20 rows and the current window width.
+	  "0*40" uses the current window height and at least 40 columns.
+	Note that the command running in the terminal window may still change
+	the size of the terminal.  In that case the Vim window will be
+	adjusted to that size, if possible.
+
 						*'terse'* *'noterse'*
 'terse'			boolean	(default off)
 			global
@@ -7807,7 +8036,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	non-keyword characters (white space is preferred).  Maximum line
 	length is 510 bytes.
 	To obtain a file to be used here, check out this ftp site:
-	[Sorry this link doesn't work anymore, do you know the right one?] 
+	[Sorry this link doesn't work anymore, do you know the right one?]
 	ftp://ftp.ox.ac.uk/pub/wordlists/  First get the README file.
 	To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
 	after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
@@ -8114,7 +8343,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	number, more intelligent detection process runs.
 	The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
 	from 95 to 276.  The "sgr" value will be set if the xterm version is
-	277 or highter.
+	277 or higher and when Vim detects Mac Terminal.app or iTerm2.
 	If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" or "sgr"
 	automatically, set t_RV to an empty string: >
 		:set t_RV=
@@ -8195,7 +8424,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it.  This applies to the
 	":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of
 	Vim. |FileChangedShell|
-	The save only happens when this options is negative or when the number
+	The save only happens when this option is negative or when the number
 	of lines is smaller than the value of this option.
 	Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload.
 
@@ -8280,7 +8509,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	security reasons.
 
 						*'viewoptions'* *'vop'*
-'viewoptions' 'vop'	string	(default: "folds,options,cursor")
+'viewoptions' 'vop'	string	(default: "folds,options,cursor,curdir")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+mksession|
@@ -8298,6 +8527,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			slashes
 	   unix		with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
 			on Windows or DOS
+	   curdir	the window-local directory, if set with `:lcd`
 
 	"slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files
 	with Unix.  The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
@@ -8313,13 +8543,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
 			feature}
 	When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
-	when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|).  The string should be a comma
+	when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). Except when 'viminfofile' is
-	separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
+	"NONE".
-	identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
+	The string should be a comma separated list of parameters, each
-	which specifies the value of that parameter.  If a particular
+	consisting of a single character identifying the particular parameter,
-	character is left out, then the default value is used for that
+	followed by a number or string which specifies the value of that
-	parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
+	parameter.  If a particular character is left out, then the default
-	the effect of their value.
+	value is used for that parameter.  The following is a list of the
+	identifying characters and the effect of their value.
 	CHAR	VALUE	~
 							*viminfo-!*
 	!	When included, save and restore global variables that start
@@ -8379,9 +8610,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		has been used since the last search command.
 							*viminfo-n*
 	n	Name of the viminfo file.  The name must immediately follow
-		the 'n'.  Must be at the end of the option!  If the "-i"
+		the 'n'.  Must be at the end of the option!  If the
-		argument was given when starting Vim, that file name overrides
+		'viminfofile' option is set, that file name overrides the one
-		the one given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are
+		given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are
 		expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option.
 							*viminfo-r*
 	r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
@@ -8422,6 +8653,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible'
 	is reset.
 
+				*'viminfofile'* *'vif'*
+'viminfofile' 'vif'	string	(default: "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
+			feature}
+	When non-empty, overrides the file name used for viminfo.
+	When equal to "NONE" no viminfo file will be read or written.
+	This option can be set with the |-i| command line flag.  The |--clean|
+	command line flag sets it to "NONE".
+
 					    *'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
 'virtualedit' 've'	string	(default "")
 			global
@@ -8455,14 +8697,27 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'visualbell' 'vb'	boolean	(default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-	Use visual bell instead of beeping.  The terminal code to display the
+	Use a visual bell instead of beeping.  The terminal code to display the
 	visual bell is given with 't_vb'.  When no beep or flash is wanted,
-	use ":set vb t_vb=".
+	use: >
-	Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value.  You
+		:set vb t_vb=
-	might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
+<	If you want a short flash, you can use this on many terminals: >
+		:set vb t_vb=[?5h$<100>[?5l
+<	Here $<100> specifies the time, you can use a smaller or bigger value
+	to get a shorter or longer flash.
+
+	Note: Vim will limit the bell to once per half a second.  This avoids
+	having to wait for the flashing to finish when there are lots of
+	bells, e.g. on key repeat.  This also happens without 'visualbell'
+	set.
+
 	In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display
 	for 20 msec.  If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",
 	where 40 is the time in msec.
+
+	Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value.  You
+	might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
+
 	Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash.
 	Also see 'errorbells'.
 
@@ -8777,6 +9032,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
 	windows.  A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
 
+						*'winptydll'*
+'winptydll'		string	(default "winpty32.dll" or "winpty64.dll")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |terminal|
+			feature on MS-Windows}
+	Specifies the name of the winpty shared library, used for the
+	|:terminal| command. The default depends on whether was build as a
+	32-bit or 64-bit executable.  If not found, "winpty.dll" is tried as
+	a fallback.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
 						*'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
 'winwidth' 'wiw'	number	(default 20)
 			global

runtime/doc/os_mac.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_mac.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 28
+*os_mac.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Jan 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -164,8 +164,9 @@ If you want to disable it, pass `--disable-darwin` to the configure script: >
 and then run `make` to build Vim.  The order of the options doesn't matter.
 
 To make sure at runtime whether or not the darwin feature is compiled in, you
-can use `has('macunix')` which returns 1 if the feature is compiled in; 0
+can use `has('osxdarwin')` which returns 1 if the feature is compiled in; 0
-otherwise.
+otherwise.  For backward compatibility, you can still use `macunix` instead of
+`osxdarwin`.
 
 Notable use cases where `--disable-darwin` is turned out to be useful are:
 

runtime/doc/os_vms.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Aug 29
+*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
@@ -702,13 +702,13 @@ In a cluster that contains nodes with different architectures like below:
 $show cluster
 View of Cluster from system ID 11655  node: TOR                                                                     18-AUG-2008 11:58:31
 +---------------------------------+
-<EFBFBD>        SYSTEMS        <EFBFBD> MEMBERS <EFBFBD>
+|        SYSTEMS        | MEMBERS |
-+-----------------------+---------<EFBFBD>
++-----------------------+---------|
-<EFBFBD>  NODE  <EFBFBD>   SOFTWARE   <EFBFBD>  STATUS <EFBFBD>
+|  NODE  |   SOFTWARE   |  STATUS |
-+--------+--------------+---------<EFBFBD>
++--------+--------------+---------|
-<EFBFBD> TOR    <EFBFBD> VMS V7.3-2   <EFBFBD> MEMBER  <EFBFBD>
+| TOR    | VMS V7.3-2   | MEMBER  |
-<EFBFBD> TITAN2 <EFBFBD> VMS V8.3     <EFBFBD> MEMBER  <EFBFBD>
+| TITAN2 | VMS V8.3     | MEMBER  |
-<EFBFBD> ODIN   <EFBFBD> VMS V7.3-2   <EFBFBD> MEMBER  <EFBFBD>
+| ODIN   | VMS V7.3-2   | MEMBER  |
 +---------------------------------+
 
 It is convenient to have a common VIM directory but execute different

runtime/doc/os_win32.txt

@@ -81,10 +81,45 @@ The directory of the Vim executable is appended to $PATH.  This is mostly to
 make "!xxd" work, as it is in the Tools menu.  And it also means that when
 executable() returns 1 the executable can actually be executed.
 
-Quotes in file names					*win32-quotes*
+Command line arguments					*win32-cmdargs*
 
-Quotes inside a file name (or any other command line argument) can be escaped
+Analysis of a command line into parameters is not standardised in MS Windows.
-with a backslash.  E.g. >
+Vim and gvim used to use different logic to parse it (before 7.4.432), and the
+logic was also depended on what it was compiled with.  Now Vim and gvim both
+use the CommandLineToArgvW() Win32 API, so they behave in the same way.
+
+The basic rules are:					*win32-backslashes*
+      a) A parameter is a sequence of graphic characters.
+      b) Parameters are separated by white space.
+      c) A parameter can be enclosed in double quotes to include white space.
+      d) A sequence of zero or more backslashes (\) and a double quote (")
+	is special.  The effective number of backslashes is halved, rounded
+	down.  An even number of backslashes reverses the acceptability of
+	spaces and tabs, an odd number of backslashes produces a literal
+	double quote.
+
+So:
+	"	is a special double quote
+	\"	is a literal double quote
+	\\"	is a literal backslash and a special double quote
+	\\\"	is a literal backslash and a literal double quote
+	\\\\"	is 2 literal backslashes and a special double quote
+	\\\\\"	is 2 literal backslashes and a literal double quote
+	etc.
+
+Example: >
+	vim "C:\My Music\freude" +"set ignorecase" +/"\"foo\\" +\"bar\\\"
+
+opens "C:\My Music\freude" and executes the line mode commands: >
+	set ignorecase; /"foo\ and /bar\"
+
+These rules are also described in the reference of the CommandLineToArgvW API:
+    https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/bb776391.aspx
+
+							*win32-quotes*
+There are additional rules for quotes (which are not well documented).
+As described above, quotes inside a file name (or any other command line
+argument) can be escaped with a backslash.  E.g. >
 	vim -c "echo 'foo\"bar'"
 
 Alternatively use three quotes to get one: >

runtime/doc/pattern.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 05
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 13
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -905,7 +905,7 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 	becomes invalid.  Vim doesn't automatically update the matches.
 	Similar to moving the cursor for "\%#" |/\%#|.
 
-						*/\%l* */\%>l* */\%<l*
+						*/\%l* */\%>l* */\%<l* *E951*
 \%23l	Matches in a specific line.
 \%<23l	Matches above a specific line (lower line number).
 \%>23l	Matches below a specific line (higher line number).
@@ -1166,7 +1166,8 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	- Matching with a collection can be slow, because each character in
 	  the text has to be compared with each character in the collection.
 	  Use one of the other atoms above when possible.  Example: "\d" is
-	  much faster than "[0-9]" and matches the same characters.
+	  much faster than "[0-9]" and matches the same characters.  However,
+	  the new |NFA| regexp engine deals with this better than the old one.
 
 						*/\%[]* *E69* *E70* *E369*
 \%[]	A sequence of optionally matched atoms.  This always matches.

runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_getscript.txt*  For Vim version 7.0.  Last change: 2013 Nov 29
+*pi_getscript.txt*  For Vim version 7.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 01
 >
 		GETSCRIPT REFERENCE MANUAL  by Charles E. Campbell
 <
@@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ v36 Apr 22, 2013 : * (glts) suggested use of plugin/**/*.vim instead of
 		     plugin/*.vim in globpath() call.
 		   * (Andy Wokula) got warning message when setting
 		     g:loaded_getscriptPlugin
-v35 Apr 07, 2012 : * (MengHuan Yu) pointed out that the script url has
+v35 Apr 07, 2012 : * (MengHuan Yu) pointed out that the script URL has
 		     changed (somewhat).  However, it doesn't work, and
 		     the original one does (under Linux). I'll make it
 		     yet-another-option.

runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Apr 20
+*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Nov 03
 
 	    ------------------------------------------------
 	    NETRW REFERENCE MANUAL    by Charles E. Campbell
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 Author:  Charles E. Campbell  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first)
 
-Copyright: Copyright (C) 2016 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
+Copyright: Copyright (C) 2017 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
 	The VIM LICENSE applies to the files in this package, including
 	netrw.vim, pi_netrw.txt, netrwFileHandlers.vim, netrwSettings.vim, and
 	syntax/netrw.vim.  Like anything else that's free, netrw.vim and its
@@ -17,7 +17,6 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 2016 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
 	holder be liable for any damages resulting from the use of this
 	software. Use at your own risk!
 
-
 		*netrw*
 		*dav*    *ftp*    *netrw-file*  *rcp*    *scp*
 		*davs*   *http*   *netrw.vim*   *rsync*  *sftp*
@@ -73,7 +72,7 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 2016 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
       Improving Browsing..................................|netrw-ssh-hack|
       Listing Bookmarks And History.......................|netrw-qb|
       Making A New Directory..............................|netrw-d|
-      Making The Browsing Directory The Current Directory.|netrw-c|
+      Making The Browsing Directory The Current Directory.|netrw-cd|
       Marking Files.......................................|netrw-mf|
       Unmarking Files.....................................|netrw-mF|
       Marking Files By Location List......................|netrw-qL|
@@ -83,6 +82,7 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 2016 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
       Marked Files: Arbitrary Shell Command, En Bloc......|netrw-mX|
       Marked Files: Arbitrary Vim Command.................|netrw-mv|
       Marked Files: Argument List.........................|netrw-ma| |netrw-mA|
+      Marked Files: Buffer List...........................|netrw-cb| |netrw-cB|
       Marked Files: Compression And Decompression.........|netrw-mz|
       Marked Files: Copying...............................|netrw-mc|
       Marked Files: Diff..................................|netrw-md|
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Windows' ftp doesn't support .netrc; however, one may have in one's .vimrc:  >
 
    let g:netrw_ftp_cmd= 'c:\Windows\System32\ftp -s:C:\Users\MyUserName\MACHINE'
 <
-Netrw will substitute the host's machine name for "MACHINE" from the url it is
+Netrw will substitute the host's machine name for "MACHINE" from the URL it is
 attempting to open, and so one may specify >
 	userid
 	password
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS AND PROTOCOLS			*netrw-externapp* {{{2
           http:   g:netrw_http_cmd     = "fetch"      elseif fetch is available
 	  http:   *g:netrw_http_put_cmd* = "curl -T"
 	   rcp:   *g:netrw_rcp_cmd*      = "rcp"
-	 rsync:   *g:netrw_rsync_cmd*    = "rsync -a"
+	 rsync:   *g:netrw_rsync_cmd*    = "rsync"     (see |g:netrw_rsync_sep|)
 	   scp:   *g:netrw_scp_cmd*      = "scp -q"
 	  sftp:   *g:netrw_sftp_cmd*     = "sftp"
 	  file:   *g:netrw_file_cmd*     = "elinks" or "links"
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS AND PROTOCOLS			*netrw-externapp* {{{2
 
 		    elinks : "-source >"
 		    links  : "-dump >"
-		    curl   : "-o"
+		    curl   : "-L -o"
 		    wget   : "-q -O"
 		    fetch  : "-o"
 <
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS AND PROTOCOLS			*netrw-externapp* {{{2
 
 READING						*netrw-read* *netrw-nread* {{{2
 
-	Generally, one may just use the url notation with a normal editing
+	Generally, one may just use the URL notation with a normal editing
 	command, such as >
 
 		:e ftp://[user@]machine/path
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ READING						*netrw-read* *netrw-nread* {{{2
 
 WRITING					*netrw-write* *netrw-nwrite* {{{2
 
-	One may just use the url notation with a normal file writing
+	One may just use the URL notation with a normal file writing
 	command, such as >
 
 		:w ftp://[user@]machine/path
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ WRITING					*netrw-write* *netrw-nwrite* {{{2
 
 SOURCING					*netrw-source* {{{2
 
-	One may just use the url notation with the normal file sourcing
+	One may just use the URL notation with the normal file sourcing
 	command, such as >
 
 		:so ftp://[user@]machine/path
@@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ file using root-relative paths, use the full path:
 ==============================================================================
 4. Network-Oriented File Transfer			*netrw-xfer* {{{1
 
-Network-oriented file transfer under Vim is implemented by a VimL-based script
+Network-oriented file transfer under Vim is implemented by a vim script
 (<netrw.vim>) using plugin techniques.  It currently supports both reading and
 writing across networks using rcp, scp, ftp or ftp+<.netrc>, scp, fetch,
 dav/cadaver, rsync, or sftp.
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ variable (ex. scp uses the variable g:netrw_scp_cmd, which is defaulted to
 	let g:netrw_sftp_cmd= '"c:\Program Files\PuTTY\psftp.exe"'
 <
 (note: it has been reported that windows 7 with putty v0.6's "-batch" option
-       doesn't work, so it's best to leave it off for that system)
+       doesn't work, so its best to leave it off for that system)
 
 See |netrw-p8| for more about putty, pscp, psftp, etc.
 
@@ -734,11 +734,11 @@ such as netrw.
 The usual read/write commands are supported.  There are also a few
 additional commands available.  Often you won't need to use Nwrite or
 Nread as shown in |netrw-transparent| (ie. simply use >
-  :e url
+  :e URL
-  :r url
+  :r URL
-  :w url
+  :w URL
 instead, as appropriate) -- see |netrw-urls|.  In the explanations
-below, a {netfile} is an url to a remote file.
+below, a {netfile} is a URL to a remote file.
 
 						*:Nwrite*  *:Nw*
 :[range]Nw[rite]	Write the specified lines to the current
@@ -868,9 +868,11 @@ variables listed below, and may be modified by the user.
     g:netrw_http_cmd     var   ="fetch -o"     if      fetch is available
     g:netrw_http_cmd     var   ="wget -O"      else if wget  is available
     g:netrw_http_put_cmd var   ="curl -T"
-    |g:netrw_list_cmd|    var   ="ssh USEPORT HOSTNAME ls -Fa"
+    |g:netrw_list_cmd|     var   ="ssh USEPORT HOSTNAME ls -Fa"
     g:netrw_rcp_cmd      var   ="rcp"
-    g:netrw_rsync_cmd    var   ="rsync -a"
+    g:netrw_rsync_cmd    var   ="rsync"
+    *g:netrw_rsync_sep*    var   ="/"            used to separate the hostname
+                                               from the file spec
     g:netrw_scp_cmd      var   ="scp -q"
     g:netrw_sftp_cmd     var   ="sftp" >
     -------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -1007,7 +1009,7 @@ where [protocol] is typically scp or ftp.  As an example, try: >
 	vim ftp://ftp.home.vim.org/pub/vim/
 <
 For local directories, the trailing slash is not required.  Again, because it's
-easy to miss: to browse remote directories, the url must terminate with a
+easy to miss: to browse remote directories, the URL must terminate with a
 slash!
 
 If you'd like to avoid entering the password repeatedly for remote directory
@@ -1077,9 +1079,9 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 	 <c-r>	Browse using a gvim server                           |netrw-ctrl-r|
 	 <c-tab> Shrink/expand a netrw/explore window                |netrw-c-tab|
 	   -	Makes Netrw go up one directory                      |netrw--|
-	   a	Toggles between normal display,                      |netrw-a|
+	   a	Cycles between normal display,                       |netrw-a|
 	    	hiding (suppress display of files matching g:netrw_list_hide)
-	    	showing (display only files which match g:netrw_list_hide)
+	    	and showing (display only files which match g:netrw_list_hide)
 	   c	Make browsing directory the current directory        |netrw-c|
 	   C	Setting the editing window                           |netrw-C|
 	   d	Make a directory                                     |netrw-d|
@@ -1090,6 +1092,7 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 	   gh	Quick hide/unhide of dot-files                       |netrw-gh|
 	   gn	Make top of tree the directory below the cursor      |netrw-gn|
 	   i	Cycle between thin, long, wide, and tree listings    |netrw-i|
+	   I	Toggle the displaying of the banner                  |netrw-I|
 	   mb	Bookmark current directory                           |netrw-mb|
 	   mc	Copy marked files to marked-file target directory    |netrw-mc|
 	   md	Apply diff to marked files (up to 3)                 |netrw-md|
@@ -1169,25 +1172,26 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: COMMANDS	*netrw-explore-cmds* *netrw-browse-cmds* {{{2
 
 BANNER DISPLAY						*netrw-I*
 
-One may toggle the banner display on and off by pressing "I".
+One may toggle the displaying of the banner by pressing "I".
 
 Also See: |g:netrw_banner|
 
 
-BOOKMARKING A DIRECTORY *netrw-mb* *netrw-bookmark* *netrw-bookmarks* {{{2
+BOOKMARKING A DIRECTORY		*netrw-mb* *netrw-bookmark* *netrw-bookmarks* {{{2
 
 One may easily "bookmark" the currently browsed directory by using >
 
 	mb
 <
 								*.netrwbook*
-Bookmarks are retained in between sessions in a $HOME/.netrwbook file, and are
+Bookmarks are retained in between sessions of vim in a file called .netrwbook
-kept in sorted order.
+as a |List|, which is typically stored in the first directory on the user's
+'|runtimepath|'; entries are kept in sorted order.
 
 If there are marked files and/or directories, mb will add them to the bookmark
 list.
 
-*netrw-:NetrwMB*
+								*netrw-:NetrwMB*
 Addtionally, one may use :NetrwMB to bookmark files or directories. >
 
 	:NetrwMB[!] [files/directories]
@@ -1206,7 +1210,7 @@ The :NetrwMB command is available outside of netrw buffers (once netrw has been
 invoked in the session).
 
 The file ".netrwbook" holds bookmarks when netrw (and vim) is not active.  By
-default, it's stored on the first directory on the user's |'runtimepath'|.
+default, its stored on the first directory on the user's |'runtimepath'|.
 
 Related Topics:
 	|netrw-gb| how to return (go) to a bookmark
@@ -1418,20 +1422,20 @@ Related Topics:
 
 CHANGING TO A PREDECESSOR DIRECTORY		*netrw-u* *netrw-updir* {{{2
 
-Every time you change to a new directory (new for the current session),
+Every time you change to a new directory (new for the current session), netrw
-netrw will save the directory in a recently-visited directory history
+will save the directory in a recently-visited directory history list (unless
-list (unless |g:netrw_dirhistmax| is zero; by default, it's ten).  With the
+|g:netrw_dirhistmax| is zero; by default, it holds ten entries).  With the "u"
-"u" map, one can change to an earlier directory (predecessor).  To do
+map, one can change to an earlier directory (predecessor).  To do the
-the opposite, see |netrw-U|.
+opposite, see |netrw-U|.
 
-The "u" map also accepts counts to go back in the history several slots.
+The "u" map also accepts counts to go back in the history several slots.  For
-For your convenience, qb (see |netrw-qb|) lists the history number which may
+your convenience, qb (see |netrw-qb|) lists the history number which may be
-be used in that count.
+used in that count.
 
 						*.netrwhist*
 See |g:netrw_dirhistmax| for how to control the quantity of history stack
 slots.  The file ".netrwhist" holds history when netrw (and vim) is not
-active.  By default, it's stored on the first directory on the user's
+active.  By default, its stored on the first directory on the user's
 |'runtimepath'|.
 
 Related Topics:
@@ -1467,10 +1471,10 @@ changing the top of the tree listing.
 
 NETRW CLEAN					*netrw-clean* *:NetrwClean* {{{2
 
-With NetrwClean one may easily remove netrw from one's home directory;
+With :NetrwClean one may easily remove netrw from one's home directory;
 more precisely, from the first directory on your |'runtimepath'|.
 
-With NetrwClean!, netrw will attempt to remove netrw from all directories on
+With :NetrwClean!, netrw will attempt to remove netrw from all directories on
 your |'runtimepath'|.  Of course, you have to have write/delete permissions
 correct to do this.
 
@@ -1502,7 +1506,7 @@ Netrw determines which special handler by the following method:
     If g:netrw_browsex_viewer == '-', then netrwFileHandlers#Invoke() will be
     used instead (see |netrw_filehandler|).
 
-  * for Windows 32 or 64, the url and FileProtocolHandler dlls are used.
+  * for Windows 32 or 64, the URL and FileProtocolHandler dlls are used.
   * for Gnome (with gnome-open): gnome-open is used.
   * for KDE (with kfmclient)   : kfmclient is used
   * for Mac OS X               : open is used.
@@ -1518,9 +1522,10 @@ will apply a special handler to it (like "x" works when in a netrw buffer).
 One may also use visual mode (see |visual-start|) to select the text that the
 special handler will use.  Normally gx uses expand("<cfile>") to pick up the
 text under the cursor; one may change what |expand()| uses via the
-|g:netrw_gx| variable.  Alternatively, one may select the text to be used by
+|g:netrw_gx| variable (options include "<cword>", "<cWORD>").  Note that
-gx via first making a visual selection (see |visual-block|) or by changing
+expand("<cfile>") depends on the |'isfname'| setting.  Alternatively, one may
-the |'isfname'| option (which is global, so netrw doesn't modify it).
+select the text to be used by gx by making a visual selection (see
+|visual-block|) and then pressing gx.
 
 Associated setting variables:
 	|g:netrw_gx|	control how gx picks up the text under the cursor
@@ -1612,6 +1617,11 @@ A further approach is to delete files which match a pattern.
       This will cause the matching files to be marked.  Then,
       press "D".
 
+If your vim has 7.4 with patch#1107, then |g:netrw_localrmdir| no longer
+is used to remove directories; instead, vim's |delete()| is used with
+the "d" option.  Please note that only empty directories may be deleted
+with the "D" mapping.  Regular files are deleted with |delete()|, too.
+
 The |g:netrw_rm_cmd|, |g:netrw_rmf_cmd|, and |g:netrw_rmdir_cmd| variables are
 used to control the attempts to remove remote files and directories.  The
 g:netrw_rm_cmd is used with files, and its default value is:
@@ -1675,17 +1685,18 @@ DIRECTORY EXPLORATION COMMANDS  {{{2
 	  The [N] specifies a |g:netrw_winsize| just for the new :Lexplore
 	  window.
 
-	  Those who like this method often also often like tree style displays;
+	  Those who like this method often also like tree style displays;
 	  see |g:netrw_liststyle|.
 
+:[N]Lexplore! [dir] is similar to :Lexplore, except that the full-height
+	  Explorer window will open on the right hand side and an
+	  uninitialized |g:netrw_chgwin| will be set to 1 (eg. edits will
+	  preferentially occur in the leftmost window).
+
 	  Also see: |netrw-C|           |g:netrw_browse_split|   |g:netrw_wiw|
 		    |netrw-p| |netrw-P|   |g:netrw_chgwin|
 		    |netrw-c-tab|       |g:netrw_winsize|
 
-:[N]Lexplore! is like :Lexplore, except that the full-height Explorer window
-	  will open on the right hand side and an uninitialized |g:netrw_chgwin|
-	  will be set to 1.
-
 						*netrw-:Sexplore*
 :[N]Sexplore will always split the window before invoking the local-directory
 	  browser.  As with Explore, the splitting is normally done
@@ -1847,9 +1858,11 @@ EXECUTING FILE UNDER CURSOR VIA SYSTEM()			*netrw-X* {{{2
 
 Pressing X while the cursor is atop an executable file will yield a prompt
 using the filename asking for any arguments.  Upon pressing a [return], netrw
-will then call |system()| with that command and arguments.  The result will
+will then call |system()| with that command and arguments.  The result will be
-be displayed by |:echomsg|, and so |:messages| will repeat display of the
+displayed by |:echomsg|, and so |:messages| will repeat display of the result.
-result.  Ansi escape sequences will be stripped out.
+Ansi escape sequences will be stripped out.
+
+See |cmdline-window| for directions for more on how to edit the arguments.
 
 
 FORCING TREATMENT AS A FILE OR DIRECTORY	*netrw-gd* *netrw-gf* {{{2
@@ -2072,7 +2085,7 @@ Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_localmkdir|   |g:netrw_mkdir_cmd|
 				|g:netrw_remote_mkdir| |netrw-%|
 
 
-MAKING THE BROWSING DIRECTORY THE CURRENT DIRECTORY	*netrw-c* {{{2
+MAKING THE BROWSING DIRECTORY THE CURRENT DIRECTORY	*netrw-cd* {{{2
 
 By default, |g:netrw_keepdir| is 1.  This setting means that the current
 directory will not track the browsing directory. (done for backwards
@@ -2087,6 +2100,9 @@ the two directories the same, use the "c" map (just type c).  That map will
 set Vim's notion of the current directory to netrw's current browsing
 directory.
 
+*netrw-c* : This map's name has been changed from "c" to cd (see |netrw-cd|).
+          This change was done to allow for |netrw-cb| and |netrw-cB| maps.
+
 Associated setting variable: |g:netrw_keepdir|
 
 MARKING FILES					*netrw-:MF*	*netrw-mf* {{{2
@@ -2131,6 +2147,7 @@ The following netrw maps make use of marked files:
     |netrw-mg|	Apply vimgrep to marked files
     |netrw-mm|	Move marked files to target
     |netrw-mp|	Print marked files
+    |netrw-ms|	Netrw will source marked files
     |netrw-mt|	Set target for |netrw-mm| and |netrw-mc|
     |netrw-mT|	Generate tags using marked files
     |netrw-mv|	Apply vim command to marked files
@@ -2205,6 +2222,9 @@ converts "*" into ".*" (see |regexp|) and marks files based on that.  In the
 future I may make it possible to use |regexp|s instead of glob()-style
 expressions (yet-another-option).
 
+See |cmdline-window| for directions on more on how to edit the regular
+expression.
+
 
 MARKED FILES, ARBITRARY VIM COMMAND				*netrw-mv*  {{{2
 	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
@@ -2218,8 +2238,9 @@ the local marked file list, individually:
 	* run vim command
 	* sil! keepalt wq!
 
-A prompt, "Enter vim command: ", will be issued to elicit the vim command
+A prompt, "Enter vim command: ", will be issued to elicit the vim command you
-you wish used.
+wish used.  See |cmdline-window| for directions for more on how to edit the
+command.
 
 
 MARKED FILES, ARBITRARY SHELL COMMAND				*netrw-mx* {{{2
@@ -2270,7 +2291,17 @@ MARKED FILES: ARGUMENT LIST				*netrw-ma* *netrw-mA*
 Using ma, one moves filenames from the marked file list to the argument list.
 Using mA, one moves filenames from the argument list to the marked file list.
 
-See Also: |netrw-qF| |argument-list| |:args|
+See Also: |netrw-cb| |netrw-cB| |netrw-qF| |argument-list| |:args|
+
+
+MARKED FILES: BUFFER LIST				*netrw-cb* *netrw-cB*
+	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
+		      (uses the global marked-file list)
+
+Using cb, one moves  filenames from the marked file list to the buffer list.
+Using cB, one copies filenames from the buffer list to the marked file list.
+
+See Also: |netrw-ma| |netrw-mA| |netrw-qF| |buffer-list| |:buffers|
 
 
 MARKED FILES: COMPRESSION AND DECOMPRESSION		*netrw-mz* {{{2
@@ -2306,8 +2337,8 @@ One may also copy directories and their contents (local only) to a target
 directory.
 
 Associated setting variables:
-	|g:netrw_localcopycmd|
+	|g:netrw_localcopycmd|		|g:netrw_localcopycmdopt|
-	|g:netrw_localcopydircmd|
+	|g:netrw_localcopydircmd|	|g:netrw_localcopydircmdopt|
 	|g:netrw_ssh_cmd|
 
 MARKED FILES: DIFF						*netrw-md* {{{2
@@ -2452,8 +2483,8 @@ When a remote set of files are tagged, the resulting tags file is "obtained";
 ie. a copy is transferred to the local system's directory.  The now local tags
 file is then modified so that one may use it through the network.  The
 modification made concerns the names of the files in the tags; each filename is
-preceded by the netrw-compatible url used to obtain it.  When one subsequently
+preceded by the netrw-compatible URL used to obtain it.  When one subsequently
-uses one of the go to tag actions (|tags|), the url will be used by netrw to
+uses one of the go to tag actions (|tags|), the URL will be used by netrw to
 edit the desired file and go to the tag.
 
 Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_ctags| |g:netrw_ssh_cmd|
@@ -2555,8 +2586,8 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				    editing.  It will also use the specified tab
 				    and window numbers to perform editing
 				    (see |clientserver|, |netrw-ctrl-r|)
-				This option does not affect |:Lexplore|
+				This option does not affect the production of
-				windows.
+				|:Lexplore| windows.
 
 				Related topics:
 				    |g:netrw_alto|	|g:netrw_altv|
@@ -2715,6 +2746,7 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
   *g:netrw_home*		The home directory for where bookmarks and
 				history are saved (as .netrwbook and
 				.netrwhist).
+				Netrw uses |expand()|on the string.
 				 default: the first directory on the
 				         |'runtimepath'|
 
@@ -2735,7 +2767,7 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				 default: (if ssh is executable)
 				          "ssh HOSTNAME ls -FLa"
 
- *g:netrw_list_cmd_options*	If this variable exists, then its contents are
+  *g:netrw_list_cmd_options*	If this variable exists, then its contents are
 				appended to the g:netrw_list_cmd.  For
 				example, use "2>/dev/null" to get rid of banner
 				messages on unix systems.
@@ -2761,26 +2793,52 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				 let g:netrw_list_hide= netrw_gitignore#Hide().'.*\.swp$'
 				default: ""
 
-  *g:netrw_localcopycmd*	="cp" Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
+  *g:netrw_localcopycmd*	="cp"           Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
-				="copy" Windows
+				=expand("$COMSPEC")             Windows
 				Copies marked files (|netrw-mf|) to target
 				directory (|netrw-mt|, |netrw-mc|)
 
- *g:netrw_localcopydircmd*	="cp -R"	Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
+  *g:netrw_localcopycmdopt*	=''             Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
-				="xcopy /e /c /h/ /i /k"	Windows
+  				=' \c copy'                     Windows
+				Options for the |g:netrw_localcopycmd|
+
+  *g:netrw_localcopydircmd*	="cp"           Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
+ 				=expand("$COMSPEC")             Windows
 				Copies directories to target directory.
 				(|netrw-mc|, |netrw-mt|)
 
-  *g:netrw_localmkdir*		command for making a local directory
+  *g:netrw_localcopydircmdopt*	=" -R"          Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
-				 default: "mkdir"
+				=" /c xcopy /e /c /h/ /i /k"    Windows
+				Options for |g:netrw_localcopydircmd|
 
-  *g:netrw_localmovecmd*	="mv" Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
+  *g:netrw_localmkdir*		="mkdir"        Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
-				="move" Windows
+				=expand("$COMSPEC")             Windows
+                                command for making a local directory
+
+  *g:netrw_localmkdiropt*	=""             Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
+				=" /c mkdir"                    Windows
+				Options for |g:netrw_localmkdir|
+
+  *g:netrw_localmovecmd*	="mv"           Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
+				=expand("$COMSPEC")             Windows
 				Moves marked files (|netrw-mf|) to target
 				directory (|netrw-mt|, |netrw-mm|)
 
-  *g:netrw_localrmdir*		remove directory command (rmdir)
+  *g:netrw_localmovecmdopt*	=""             Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
-				 default: "rmdir"
+				=" /c move"                     Windows
+				Options for |g:netrw_localmovecmd|
+
+  *g:netrw_localrmdir*		="rmdir"        Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
+ 				=expand("$COMSPEC")             Windows
+				Remove directory command (rmdir)
+				This variable is only used if your vim is
+				earlier than 7.4 or if your vim doesn't
+				have patch#1107.  Otherwise, |delete()|
+				is used with the "d" option.
+
+  *g:netrw_localrmdiropt*	=""             Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin
+				=" /c rmdir"                    Windows
+				Options for |g:netrw_localrmdir|
 
   *g:netrw_maxfilenamelen*	=32 by default, selected so as to make long
 				    listings fit on 80 column displays.
@@ -2893,17 +2951,23 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 					netrwTilde   : *
 					netrwTmp     : tmp* *tmp
 
-				These syntax highlighting groups are linked
+				In addition, those groups mentioned in
-				to Folded or DiffChange by default
+				|'suffixes'| are also added to the special
-				(see |hl-Folded| and |hl-DiffChange|), but
+				file highlighting group.
-				one may put lines like >
+				 These syntax highlighting groups are linked
+				to netrwGray or Folded by default
+				(see |hl-Folded|), but one may put lines like >
 					hi link netrwCompress Visual
 <				into one's <.vimrc> to use one's own
 				preferences.  Alternatively, one may
-				put such specifications into
+				put such specifications into >
-				.vim/after/syntax/netrw.vim.
+					.vim/after/syntax/netrw.vim.
-
+<				 The netrwGray highlighting is set up by
-				As an example, I myself use a dark-background
+				netrw when >
+	       				* netrwGray has not been previously
+					  defined
+					* the gui is running
+<				 As an example, I myself use a dark-background
 				colorscheme with the following in
 				.vim/after/syntax/netrw.vim: >
 
@@ -3138,8 +3202,8 @@ If there are no marked files: (see |netrw-mf|)
 
     Renaming files and directories involves moving the cursor to the
     file/directory to be moved (renamed) and pressing "R".  You will then be
-    queried for what you want the file/directory to be renamed to  You may select
+    queried for what you want the file/directory to be renamed to.  You may
-    a range of lines with the "V" command (visual selection), and then
+    select a range of lines with the "V" command (visual selection), and then
     press "R"; you will be queried for each file as to what you want it
     renamed to.
 
@@ -3171,16 +3235,20 @@ If there are marked files:  (see |netrw-mf|)
 
     Note that moving files is a dangerous operation; copies are safer.  That's
     because a "move" for remote files is actually a copy + delete -- and if
-    the copy fails and the delete does not, you may lose the file.
+    the copy fails and the delete succeeds you may lose the file.
     Use at your own risk.
 
-The g:netrw_rename_cmd variable is used to implement remote renaming.  By
+The *g:netrw_rename_cmd* variable is used to implement remote renaming.  By
-default its value is:
+default its value is: >
 
 	ssh HOSTNAME mv
-
+<
 One may rename a block of files and directories by selecting them with
-V (|linewise-visual|) when using thin style
+V (|linewise-visual|) when using thin style.
+
+See |cmdline-editing| for more on how to edit the command line; in particular,
+you'll find <ctrl-f> (initiates cmdline window editing) and <ctrl-c> (uses the
+command line under the cursor) useful in conjunction with the R command.
 
 
 SELECTING SORTING STYLE			*netrw-s* *netrw-sort* {{{2
@@ -3201,8 +3269,8 @@ number.  Subsequent selection of a file to edit (|netrw-cr|) will use that
 window.
 
 	* C : by itself, will select the current window holding a netrw buffer
-	  for editing via |netrw-cr|.  The C mapping is only available while in
+	  for subsequent editing via |netrw-cr|.  The C mapping is only available
-	  netrw buffers.
+	  while in netrw buffers.
 
 	* [count]C : the count will be used as the window number to be used
 	  for subsequent editing via |netrw-cr|.
@@ -3215,7 +3283,7 @@ window.
 Using >
 	let g:netrw_chgwin= -1
 will restore the default editing behavior
-(ie. editing will use the current window).
+(ie. subsequent editing will use the current window).
 
 Related topics:			|netrw-cr| |g:netrw_browse_split|
 Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
@@ -3236,9 +3304,9 @@ only if your terminal supports differentiating <c-tab> from a plain
 
   * Else bring up a |:Lexplore| window
 
-If |g:netrw_usetab| exists or is zero, or if there is a pre-existing mapping
+If |g:netrw_usetab| exists and is zero, or if there is a pre-existing mapping
 for <c-tab>, then the <c-tab> will not be mapped.  One may map something other
-than a <c-tab>, too: (but you'll still need to have had g:netrw_usetab set) >
+than a <c-tab>, too: (but you'll still need to have had |g:netrw_usetab| set). >
 
 	nmap <unique> (whatever)	<Plug>NetrwShrink
 <
@@ -3271,9 +3339,10 @@ The user function is passed one argument; it resembles >
 
 	fun! ExampleUserMapFunc(islocal)
 <
-where a:islocal is 1 if it's a local-directory system call or 0 when
+where a:islocal is 1 if its a local-directory system call or 0 when
 remote-directory system call.
 
+			        *netrw-call*  *netrw-expose*  *netrw-modify*
 Use netrw#Expose("varname")          to access netrw-internal (script-local)
 				     variables.
 Use netrw#Modify("varname",newvalue) to change netrw-internal variables.
@@ -3595,7 +3664,7 @@ Example: Clear netrw's marked file list via a mapping on gu >
 
 								*netrw-p16*
 	P16. When editing remote files (ex. :e ftp://hostname/path/file),
-	     under Windows I get an |E303| message complaining that it's unable
+	     under Windows I get an |E303| message complaining that its unable
 	     to open a swap file.
 
 	     (romainl) It looks like you are starting Vim from a protected
@@ -3649,7 +3718,7 @@ Example: Clear netrw's marked file list via a mapping on gu >
 	P21. I've made a directory (or file) with an accented character, but
 		netrw isn't letting me enter that directory/read that file:
 
-		It's likely that the shell or o/s is using a different encoding
+		Its likely that the shell or o/s is using a different encoding
 		than you have vim (netrw) using.  A patch to vim supporting
 		"systemencoding" may address this issue in the future; for
 		now, just have netrw use the proper encoding.  For example: >
@@ -3765,6 +3834,102 @@ netrw:
 ==============================================================================
 12. History						*netrw-history* {{{1
 
+	v162:	Sep 19, 2016	* (haya14busa) pointed out two syntax errors
+				  with a patch; these are now fixed.
+		Oct 26, 2016	* I started using mate-terminal and found that
+				  x and gx (|netrw-x| and |netrw-gx|) were no
+				  longer working.  Fixed (using atril when
+				  $DESKTOP_SESSION is "mate").
+		Nov 04, 2016	* (Martin Vuille) pointed out that @+ was
+				  being restored with keepregstar rather than
+				  keepregplus.
+		Nov 09, 2016	* Broke apart the command from the options,
+				  mostly for Windows.  Introduced new netrw
+				  settings: |g:netrw_localcopycmdopt|
+				  |g:netrw_localcopydircmdopt| |g:netrw_localmkdiropt|
+				  |g:netrw_localmovecmdopt| |g:netrw_localrmdiropt|
+		Nov 21, 2016	* (mattn) provided a patch for preview; swapped
+				  winwidth() with winheight()
+		Nov 22, 2016	* (glacambre) reported that files containing
+				  spaces weren't being obtained properly via
+				  scp.  Fix: apparently using single quotes
+				  such as with 'file name' wasn't enough; the
+				  spaces inside the quotes also had to be
+				  escaped (ie. 'file\ name').
+				* Also fixed obtain (|netrw-O|) to be able to
+				  obtain files with spaces in their names
+		Dec 20, 2016	* (xc1427) Reported that using "I" (|netrw-I|)
+				  when atop "Hiding" in the banner also caused
+				  the active-banner hiding control to occur
+		Jan 03, 2017	* (Enno Nagel) reported that attempting to
+				  apply netrw to a directory that was without
+				  read permission caused a syntax error.
+		Jan 13, 2017	* (Ingo Karkat) provided a patch which makes
+				  using netrw#Call() better.  Now returns
+				  value of internal routines return, for example.
+		Jan 13, 2017	* (Ingo Karkat) changed netrw#FileUrlRead to
+				  use |:edit| instead of |:read|.  I also
+				  changed the routine name to netrw#FileUrlEdit.
+		Jan 16, 2017	* (Sayem) reported a problem where :Lexplore
+				  could generate a new listing buffer and
+				  window instead of toggling the netrw display.
+				  Unfortunately, the directions for eliciting
+				  the problem weren't complete, so I may or
+				  may not have fixed that issue.
+		Feb 06, 2017	* Implemented cb and cB.  Changed "c" to "cd".
+				  (see |netrw-cb|, |netrw-cB|, and |netrw-cd|)
+		Mar 21, 2017	* previously, netrw would specify (safe) settings
+				  even when the setting was already safe for
+				  netrw.  Netrw now attempts to leave such
+				  already-netrw-safe settings alone.
+				  (affects s:NetrwOptionRestore() and
+				  s:NetrwSafeOptions(); also introduced
+				  s:NetrwRestoreSetting())
+		Jun 26, 2017	* (Christian Brabandt) provided a patch to
+				  allow curl to follow redirects (ie. -L
+				  option)
+		Jun 26, 2017	* (Callum Howard) reported a problem with
+				  :Lexpore not removing the Lexplore window
+				  after a change-directory
+		Aug 30, 2017	* (Ingo Karkat) one cannot switch to the
+				  previously edited file (e.g. with CTRL-^)
+				  after editing a file:// URL.  Patch to
+				  have a "keepalt" included.
+		Oct 17, 2017	* (Adam Faryna) reported that gn (|netrw-gn|)
+				  did not work on directories in the current
+				  tree
+	v157:	Apr 20, 2016	* (Nicola) had set up a "nmap <expr> ..." with
+				  a function that returned a 0 while silently
+				  invoking a shell command.  The shell command
+				  activated a ShellCmdPost event which in turn
+				  called s:LocalBrowseRefresh().  That looks
+				  over all netrw buffers for changes needing
+				  refreshes.  However, inside a |:map-<expr>|,
+				  tab and window changes are disallowed.  Fixed.
+				  (affects netrw's s:LocalBrowseRefresh())
+				* |g:netrw_localrmdir| not used any more, but
+				  the relevant patch that causes |delete()| to
+				  take over was #1107 (not #1109).
+				* |expand()| is now used on |g:netrw_home|;
+				  consequently, g:netrw_home may now use
+				  environment variables
+				* s:NetrwLeftmouse and s:NetrwCLeftmouse will
+				  return without doing anything if invoked
+				  when inside a non-netrw window
+		Jun 15, 2016	* gx now calls netrw#GX() which returns
+				  the word under the cursor.  The new
+				  wrinkle: if one is in a netrw buffer,
+				  then netrw's s:NetrwGetWord().
+		Jun 22, 2016	* Netrw was executing all its associated
+				  Filetype commands silently; I'm going
+				  to try doing that "noisily" and see if
+				  folks have a problem with that.
+		Aug 12, 2016	* Changed order of tool selection for
+				  handling http://... viewing.
+				  (Nikolay Aleksandrovich Pavlov)
+		Aug 21, 2016	* Included hiding/showing/all for tree
+				  listings
+				* Fixed refresh (^L) for tree listings
 	v156:	Feb 18, 2016	* Changed =~ to =~# where appropriate
 		Feb 23, 2016	* s:ComposePath(base,subdir) now uses
 				  fnameescape() on the base portion
@@ -3796,9 +3961,9 @@ netrw:
 				  tell me how they're useful and should be
 				  retained?
 		Nov 20, 2015	* Added |netrw-ma| and |netrw-mA| support
-		Nov 20, 2015	* gx (|netrw-gx|) on an url downloaded the
+		Nov 20, 2015	* gx (|netrw-gx|) on a URL downloaded the
 				  file in addition to simply bringing up the
-				  url in a browser.  Fixed.
+				  URL in a browser.  Fixed.
 		Nov 23, 2015	* Added |g:netrw_sizestyle| support
 		Nov 27, 2015	* Inserted a lot of <c-u>s into various netrw
 				  maps.

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 13
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -44,6 +44,13 @@ From inside Vim an easy way to run a command and handle the output is with the
 The 'errorformat' option should be set to match the error messages from your
 compiler (see |errorformat| below).
 
+							*quickfix-ID*
+Each quickfix list has a unique identifier called the quickfix ID and this
+number will not change within a Vim session. The getqflist() function can be
+used to get the identifier assigned to a list. There is also a quickfix list
+number which may change whenever more than ten lists are added to a quickfix
+stack.
+
 						*location-list* *E776*
 A location list is a window-local quickfix list. You get one after commands
 like `:lvimgrep`, `:lgrep`, `:lhelpgrep`, `:lmake`, etc., which create a
@@ -57,6 +64,14 @@ When a window with a location list is split, the new window gets a copy of the
 location list.  When there are no longer any references to a location list,
 the location list is destroyed.
 
+						*quickfix-changedtick*
+Every quickfix and location list has a read-only changedtick variable that
+tracks the total number of changes made to the list.  Every time the quickfix
+list is modified, this count is incremented. This can be used to perform an
+action only when the list has changed.  The getqflist() and getloclist()
+functions can be used to query the current value of changedtick.  You cannot
+change the changedtick variable.
+
 The following quickfix commands can be used.  The location list commands are
 similar to the quickfix commands, replacing the 'c' prefix in the quickfix
 command with 'l'.
@@ -315,9 +330,9 @@ deleted for some reason, the message "line changed" is shown to warn you that
 the error location may not be correct.  If you quit Vim and start again the
 marks are lost and the error locations may not be correct anymore.
 
-If vim is built with |+autocmd| support, two autocommands are available for
+Two autocommands are available for running commands before and after a
-running commands before and after a quickfix command (':make', ':grep' and so
+quickfix command (':make', ':grep' and so on) is executed. See
-on) is executed. See |QuickFixCmdPre| and |QuickFixCmdPost| for details.
+|QuickFixCmdPre| and |QuickFixCmdPost| for details.
 
 						*QuickFixCmdPost-example*
 When 'encoding' differs from the locale, the error messages may have a
@@ -334,6 +349,50 @@ use this code: >
 	au QuickfixCmdPost make call QfMakeConv()
 Another option is using 'makeencoding'.
 
+							*quickfix-title*
+Every quickfix and location list has a title. By default the title is set to
+the command that created the list. The |getqflist()| and |getloclist()|
+functions can be used to get the title of a quickfix and a location list
+respectively. The |setqflist()| and |setloclist()| functions can be used to
+modify the title of a quickfix and location list respectively. Examples: >
+	call setqflist([], 'a', {'title' : 'Cmd output'})
+	echo getqflist({'title' : 1})
+	call setloclist(3, [], 'a', {'title' : 'Cmd output'})
+	echo getloclist(3, {'title' : 1})
+<
+							*quickfix-size*
+You can get the number of entries (size) in a quickfix and a location list
+using the |getqflist()| and |getloclist()| functions respectively. Examples: >
+	echo getqflist({'size' : 1})
+	echo getloclist(5, {'size' : 1})
+<
+							*quickfix-context*
+Any Vim type can be associated as a context with a quickfix or location list.
+The |setqflist()| and the |setloclist()| functions can be used to associate a
+context with a quickfix and a location list respectively. The |getqflist()|
+and the |getloclist()| functions can be used to retrieve the context of a
+quickfix and a location list respectively. This is useful for a Vim plugin
+dealing with multiple quickfix/location lists.
+Examples: >
+
+	let somectx = {'name' : 'Vim', 'type' : 'Editor'}
+	call setqflist([], 'a', {'context' : somectx})
+	echo getqflist({'context' : 1})
+
+	let newctx = ['red', 'green', 'blue']
+	call setloclist(2, [], 'a', {'id' : qfid, 'context' : newctx})
+	echo getloclist(2, {'id' : qfid, 'context' : 1})
+<
+							*quickfix-parse*
+You can parse a list of lines using 'errorformat' without creating or
+modifying a quickfix list using the |getqflist()| function. Examples: >
+	echo getqflist({'lines' : ["F1:10:Line10", "F2:20:Line20"]})
+	echo getqflist({'lines' : systemlist('grep -Hn quickfix *')})
+This returns a dictionary where the 'items' key contains the list of quickfix
+entries parsed from lines. The following shows how to use a custom
+'errorformat' to parse the lines without modifying the 'errorformat' option: >
+	echo getqflist({'efm' : '%f#%l#%m', 'lines' : ['F1#10#Line']})
+<
 
 EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 							*:cdo*
@@ -360,8 +419,7 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 			autocommand event is disabled by adding it to
 			'eventignore'.  This considerably speeds up editing
 			each buffer.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 			Also see |:bufdo|, |:tabdo|, |:argdo|, |:windo|,
 			|:ldo|, |:cfdo| and |:lfdo|.
 
@@ -374,8 +432,7 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 				:{cmd}
 				etc.
 <			Otherwise it works the same as `:cdo`.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 
 							*:ldo*
 :ld[o][!] {cmd}		Execute {cmd} in each valid entry in the location list
@@ -388,8 +445,7 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 				etc.
 <			Only valid entries in the location list are used.
 			Otherwise it works the same as `:cdo`.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 
 							*:lfdo*
 :lfdo[!] {cmd}		Execute {cmd} in each file in the location list for
@@ -401,8 +457,7 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 				:{cmd}
 				etc.
 <			Otherwise it works the same as `:ldo`.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 
 =============================================================================
 2. The error window					*quickfix-window*
@@ -425,7 +480,9 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 			which will indicate the command that produced the
 			quickfix list. This can be used to compose a custom
 			status line if the value of 'statusline' is adjusted
-			properly.
+			properly. Whenever this buffer is modified by a
+			quickfix command or function, the |b:changedtick|
+			variable is incremented.
 
 							*:lop* *:lopen*
 :lop[en] [height]	Open a window to show the location list for the
@@ -533,6 +590,103 @@ In all of the above cases, if the location list for the selected window is not
 yet set, then it is set to the location list displayed in the location list
 window.
 
+							*quickfix-window-ID*
+You can use the |getqflist()| and |getloclist()| functions to obtain the
+window ID of the quickfix window and location list window respectively (if
+present).  Examples: >
+	echo getqflist({'winid' : 1}).winid
+	echo getloclist(2, {'winid' : 1}).winid
+<
+							*getqflist-examples*
+The getqflist() and getloclist() functions can be used to get the various
+attributes of a quickfix and location list respectively. Some examples for
+using these functions are below:
+>
+    " get the title of the current quickfix list
+    :echo getqflist({'title' : 0}).title
+
+    " get the identifier of the current quickfix list
+    :let qfid = getqflist({'id' : 0}).id
+
+    " get the index of the current quickfix list in the stack
+    :let qfnum = getqflist({'nr' : 0}).nr
+
+    " get the items of a quickfix list specified by an identifier
+    :echo getqflist({'id' : qfid, 'items' : 0}).items
+
+    " get the number of entries in a quickfix list specified by an id
+    :echo getqflist({'id' : qfid, 'size' : 0}).size
+
+    " get the context of the third quickfix list in the stack
+    :echo getqflist({'nr' : 3, 'context' : 0}).context
+
+    " get the number of quickfix lists in the stack
+    :echo getqflist({'nr' : '$'}).nr
+
+    " get the number of times the current quickfix list is changed
+    :echo getqflist({'changedtick' : 0}).changedtick
+
+    " get the current entry in a quickfix list specified by an identifier
+    :echo getqflist({'id' : qfid, 'idx' : 0}).idx
+
+    " get all the quickfix list attributes using an identifier
+    :echo getqflist({'id' : qfid, 'all' : 0})
+
+    " parse text from a List of lines and return a quickfix list
+    :let myList = ["a.java:10:L10", "b.java:20:L20"]
+    :echo getqflist({'lines' : myList}).items
+
+    " parse text using a custom 'efm' and return a quickfix list
+    :echo getqflist({'lines' : ['a.c#10#Line 10'], 'efm':'%f#%l#%m'}).items
+
+    " get the quickfix list window id
+    :echo getqflist({'winid' : 0}).winid
+
+    " get the context of the current location list
+    :echo getloclist(0, {'context' : 0}).context
+
+    " get the location list window id of the third window
+    :echo getloclist(3, {'winid' : 0}).winid
+<
+							*setqflist-examples*
+The setqflist() and setloclist() functions can be used to set the various
+attributes of a quickfix and location list respectively. Some examples for
+using these functions are below:
+>
+    " set the title of the current quickfix list
+    :call setqflist([], 'a', {'title' : 'Mytitle'})
+
+    " set the context of a quickfix list specified by an identifier
+    :call setqflist([], 'a', {'id' : qfid, 'context' : {'val' : 100}})
+
+    " create a new quickfix list from a command output
+    :call setqflist([], ' ', {'lines' : systemlist('grep -Hn main *.c')})
+
+    " parse text using a custom efm and add to a particular quickfix list
+    :call setqflist([], 'a', {'id' : qfid,
+		\ 'lines' : ["a.c#10#L10", "b.c#20#L20"], 'efm':'%f#%l#%m'})
+
+    " add items to the quickfix list specified by an identifier
+    :let newItems = [{'filename' : 'a.txt', 'lnum' : 10, 'text' : "Apple"},
+		    \ {'filename' : 'b.txt', 'lnum' : 20, 'text' : "Orange"}]
+    :call setqflist([], 'a', {'id' : qfid, 'items' : newItems})
+
+    " free all the quickfix lists in the stack
+    :call setqflist([], 'f')
+
+    " set the title of the fourth quickfix list
+    :call setqflist([], 'a', {'nr' : 4, 'title' : 'SomeTitle'})
+
+    " create a new quickfix list at the end of the stack
+    :call setqflist([], ' ', {'nr' : '$',
+			\ 'lines' : systemlist('grep -Hn class *.java')})
+
+    " create a new location list from a command output
+    :call setloclist(0, [], ' ', {'lines' : systemlist('grep -Hn main *.c')})
+
+    " replace the location list entries for the third window
+    :call setloclist(3, [], 'r', {'items' : newItems})
+<
 =============================================================================
 3. Using more than one list of errors			*quickfix-error-lists*
 
@@ -577,12 +731,20 @@ list, one newer list is overwritten.  This is especially useful if you are
 browsing with ":grep" |grep|.  If you want to keep the more recent error
 lists, use ":cnewer 99" first.
 
+To get the number of lists in the quickfix and location list stack, you can
+use the |getqflist()| and |getloclist()| functions respectively with the list
+number set to the special value '$'. Examples: >
+	echo getqflist({'nr' : '$'}).nr
+	echo getloclist(3, {'nr' : '$'}).nr
+To get the number of the current list in the stack: >
+	echo getqflist({'nr' : 0}).nr
+<
 =============================================================================
 4. Using :make						*:make_makeprg*
 
 							*:mak* *:make*
-:mak[e][!] [arguments]	1. If vim was built with |+autocmd|, all relevant
+:mak[e][!] [arguments]	1. All relevant |QuickFixCmdPre| autocommands are
-			   |QuickFixCmdPre| autocommands are executed.
+			   executed.
 			2. If the 'autowrite' option is on, write any changed
 			   buffers
 			3. An errorfile name is made from 'makeef'.  If
@@ -594,9 +756,8 @@ lists, use ":cnewer 99" first.
 			   errorfile (for Unix it is also echoed on the
 			   screen).
 			5. The errorfile is read using 'errorformat'.
-			6. If vim was built with |+autocmd|, all relevant
+			6. All relevant |QuickFixCmdPost| autocommands are
-			   |QuickFixCmdPost| autocommands are executed.
+			   executed.  See example below.
-			   See example below.
 			7. If [!] is not given the first error is jumped to.
 			8. The errorfile is deleted.
 			9. You can now move through the errors with commands
@@ -1059,6 +1220,7 @@ you want to match case, add "\C" to the pattern |/\C|.
 Basic items
 
 	%f		file name (finds a string)
+	%o		module name (finds a string)
 	%l		line number (finds a number)
 	%c		column number (finds a number representing character
 			column of the error, (1 <tab> == 1 character column))
@@ -1095,7 +1257,7 @@ or >
 to indicate the column of the error.  This is to be used in a multi-line error
 message.  See |errorformat-javac| for a  useful example.
 
-The "%s" conversion specifies the text to search for to locate the error line.
+The "%s" conversion specifies the text to search for, to locate the error line.
 The text is used as a literal string.  The anchors "^" and "$" are added to
 the text to locate the error line exactly matching the search text and the
 text is prefixed with the "\V" atom to make it "very nomagic".  The "%s"
@@ -1103,6 +1265,11 @@ conversion can be used to locate lines without a line number in the error
 output.  Like the output of the "grep" shell command.
 When the pattern is present the line number will not be used.
 
+The "%o" conversion specifies the module name in quickfix entry.  If present
+it will be used in quickfix error window instead of the filename.  The module
+name is used only for displaying purposes, the file name is used when jumping
+to the file.
+
 Changing directory
 
 The following uppercase conversion characters specify the type of special

runtime/doc/quickref.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Dec 16
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -618,7 +618,8 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'backupext'	  'bex'     extension used for the backup file
 'backupskip'	  'bsk'     no backup for files that match these patterns
 'balloondelay'	  'bdlay'   delay in mS before a balloon may pop up
-'ballooneval'	  'beval'   switch on balloon evaluation
+'ballooneval'	  'beval'     switch on balloon evaluation in the GUI
+'balloonevalterm' 'bevalterm' switch on balloon evaluation in the terminal
 'balloonexpr'	  'bexpr'   expression to show in balloon
 'belloff'	  'bo'	    do not ring the bell for these reasons
 'binary'	  'bin'     read/write/edit file in binary mode
@@ -749,6 +750,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'iminsert'	  'imi'     use :lmap or IM in Insert mode
 'imsearch'	  'ims'     use :lmap or IM when typing a search pattern
 'imstatusfunc'    'imsf'    function to obtain X input method status
+'imstyle'	  'imst'    specifies the input style of the input method
 'include'	  'inc'     pattern to be used to find an include file
 'includeexpr'	  'inex'    expression used to process an include line
 'incsearch'	  'is'	    highlight match while typing search pattern
@@ -779,6 +781,8 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'listchars'	  'lcs'     characters for displaying in list mode
 'loadplugins'	  'lpl'     load plugin scripts when starting up
 'luadll'		    name of the Lua dynamic library
+'mzschemedll'		    name of the MzScheme dynamic library
+'mzschemegcdll'		    name of the MzScheme dynamic library for GC
 'macatsui'		    Mac GUI: use ATSUI text drawing
 'magic'			    changes special characters in search patterns
 'makeef'	  'mef'     name of the errorfile for ":make"
@@ -834,8 +838,11 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'printoptions'	  'popt'    controls the format of :hardcopy output
 'prompt'	  'prompt'  enable prompt in Ex mode
 'pumheight'	  'ph'	    maximum height of the popup menu
+'pumwidth'	  'pw'	    minimum width of the popup menu
 'pythondll'		    name of the Python 2 dynamic library
+'pythonhome'		    name of the Python 2 home directory
 'pythonthreedll'	    name of the Python 3 dynamic library
+'pythonthreehome'	    name of the Python 3 home directory
 'pyxversion'	  'pyx'	    Python version used for pyx* commands
 'quoteescape'	  'qe'	    escape characters used in a string
 'readonly'	  'ro'	    disallow writing the buffer
@@ -920,6 +927,9 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'termbidi'	  'tbidi'   terminal takes care of bi-directionality
 'termencoding'	  'tenc'    character encoding used by the terminal
 'termguicolors'	  'tgc'     use GUI colors for the terminal
+'termwinkey'	  'twk'	    key that precedes a Vim command in a terminal
+'termwinscroll'   'twsl'    max number of scrollback lines in a terminal window
+'termwinsize'	  'tws'	    size of a terminal window
 'terse'			    shorten some messages
 'textauto'	  'ta'	    obsolete, use 'fileformats'
 'textmode'	  'tx'	    obsolete, use 'fileformat'
@@ -952,6 +962,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'viewdir'	  'vdir'    directory where to store files with :mkview
 'viewoptions'	  'vop'     specifies what to save for :mkview
 'viminfo'	  'vi'	    use .viminfo file upon startup and exiting
+'viminfofile'	  'vif'	    file name used for the viminfo file
 'virtualedit'	  've'	    when to use virtual editing
 'visualbell'	  'vb'	    use visual bell instead of beeping
 'warn'			    warn for shell command when buffer was changed
@@ -971,6 +982,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'winfixwidth'	  'wfw'     keep window width when opening/closing windows
 'winminheight'	  'wmh'     minimum number of lines for any window
 'winminwidth'	  'wmw'     minimal number of columns for any window
+'winptydll'		    name of the winpty dynamic library
 'winwidth'	  'wiw'     minimal number of columns for current window
 'wrap'			    long lines wrap and continue on the next line
 'wrapmargin'	  'wm'	    chars from the right where wrapping starts
@@ -1309,6 +1321,7 @@ Context-sensitive completion on the command-line:
 
 |:sfind|	:sf[ind] {file}		split window, find {file} in 'path'
 					   and edit it
+|:terminal|	:terminal {cmd}		open a terminal window
 |CTRL-W_]|	CTRL-W ]		split window and jump to tag under
 					   cursor
 |CTRL-W_f|	CTRL-W f		split window and edit file name under

runtime/doc/quotes.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quotes.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2010 Nov 03
+*quotes.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Coming with a very GUI mindset from Windows, I always thought of people using
 Vi as some kind of outer space alien in human clothes.  Once I tried I really
 got addicted by its power and now I found myself typing Vim keypresses in the
 oddest places! That's why I would like to see Vim embedded in every
-application which deals with text editing.  (Jos<EFBFBD> Fonseca)
+application which deals with text editing.  (José Fonseca)
 
 I was a 12-year emacs user who switched to Vim about a year ago after finally
 giving up on the multiple incompatible versions, flaky contributed packages,

runtime/doc/remote.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*remote.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 18
+*remote.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Nov 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Tell the remote server "BLA" to write all files and exit: >
     vim --servername BLA --remote-send '<C-\><C-N>:wqa<CR>'
 
 
-SERVER NAME
+SERVER NAME						*client-server-name*
 
 By default Vim will try to register the name under which it was invoked (gvim,
 egvim ...).  This can be overridden with the --servername argument.  If the
@@ -181,7 +181,8 @@ name on the 'VimRegistry' property on the root window.
 
 A non GUI Vim with access to the X11 display (|xterm-clipboard| enabled), can
 also act as a command server if a server name is explicitly given with the
---servername argument.
+--servername argument, or when Vim was build with the |+autoservername|
+feature.
 
 An empty --servername argument will cause the command server to be disabled.
 

runtime/doc/repeat.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 10
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -242,6 +242,10 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			If the directory pack/*/opt/{name}/after exists it is
 			added at the end of 'runtimepath'.
 
+			If loading packages from "pack/*/start" was skipped,
+			then this directory is searched first:
+				pack/*/start/{name} ~
+
 			Note that {name} is the directory name, not the name
 			of the .vim file.  All the files matching the pattern
 				pack/*/opt/{name}/plugin/**/*.vim ~
@@ -261,6 +265,7 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			loaded during initialization, see |load-plugins|.
 
 			Also see |pack-add|.
+			{only available when compiled with +eval}
 
 						*:packl* *:packloadall*
 :packl[oadall][!]	Load all packages in the "start" directory under each
@@ -284,6 +289,7 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			An error only causes sourcing the script where it
 			happens to be aborted, further plugins will be loaded.
 			See |packages|.
+			{only available when compiled with +eval}
 
 :scripte[ncoding] [encoding]		*:scripte* *:scriptencoding* *E167*
 			Specify the character encoding used in the script.
@@ -802,6 +808,19 @@ DEFINING BREAKPOINTS
 <		Note that this only works for commands that are executed when
 		sourcing the file, not for a function defined in that file.
 
+:breaka[dd] expr {expression}
+		Sets a breakpoint, that will break whenever the {expression}
+		evaluates to a different value. Example: >
+			:breakadd expr g:lnum
+
+<		Will break, whenever the global variable lnum changes.
+		Note if you watch a |script-variable| this will break
+		when switching scripts, since the script variable is only
+		valid in the script where it has been defined and if that
+		script is called from several other scripts, this will stop
+		whenever that particular variable will become visible or
+		unaccessible again.
+
 The [lnum] is the line number of the breakpoint.  Vim will stop at or after
 this line.  When omitted line 1 is used.
 

runtime/doc/scroll.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*scroll.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Nov 10
+*scroll.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -32,6 +32,7 @@ seen):
 
 							*CTRL-E*
 CTRL-E			Scroll window [count] lines downwards in the buffer.
+			The text moves upwards on the screen.
 			Mnemonic: Extra lines.
 
 							*CTRL-D*
@@ -70,6 +71,7 @@ seen):
 
 							*CTRL-Y*
 CTRL-Y			Scroll window [count] lines upwards in the buffer.
+			The text moves downwards on the screen.
 			Note: When using the MS-Windows key bindings CTRL-Y is
 			remapped to redo.
 

runtime/doc/spell.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*spell.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Jan 08
+*spell.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ Additionally the following items are recognized:
     =		Case must match exactly.
     ?		Rare word.
     !		Bad (wrong) word.
-    digit	A region in which the word is valid.  If no regions are
+    1 to 9	A region in which the word is valid.  If no regions are
 		specified the word is valid in all regions.
 
 Example:
@@ -907,9 +907,9 @@ when using "cp1250" on Unix.
 						*spell-LOW* *spell-UPP*
 Three lines in the affix file are needed.  Simplistic example:
 
-	FOL  <EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD> ~
+	FOL  áëñ ~
-	LOW  <EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD> ~
+	LOW  áëñ ~
-	UPP  <EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD> ~
+	UPP  ÁËÑ ~
 
 All three lines must have exactly the same number of characters.
 
@@ -924,9 +924,9 @@ The "UPP" line specifies the characters with upper-case.  That is, a character
 is upper-case where it's different from the character at the same position in
 "FOL".
 
-An exception is made for the German sharp s <EFBFBD>.  The upper-case version is
+An exception is made for the German sharp s ß.  The upper-case version is
 "SS".  In the FOL/LOW/UPP lines it should be included, so that it's recognized
-as a word character, but use the <EFBFBD> character in all three.
+as a word character, but use the ß character in all three.
 
 ASCII characters should be omitted, Vim always handles these in the same way.
 When the encoding is UTF-8 no word characters need to be specified.
@@ -1397,7 +1397,7 @@ suggestions would spend most time trying all kind of weird compound words.
 							*spell-SYLLABLE*
 The SYLLABLE item defines characters or character sequences that are used to
 count the number of syllables in a word.  Example:
-	SYLLABLE a<EFBFBD>e<EFBFBD>i<EFBFBD>o<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>u<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>y/aa/au/ea/ee/ei/ie/oa/oe/oo/ou/uu/ui ~
+	SYLLABLE aáeéiíoóöõuúüûy/aa/au/ea/ee/ei/ie/oa/oe/oo/ou/uu/ui ~
 
 Before the first slash is the set of characters that are counted for one
 syllable, also when repeated and mixed, until the next character that is not
@@ -1478,8 +1478,8 @@ alike.  This is mostly used for a letter with different accents.  This is used
 to prefer suggestions with these letters substituted.  Example:
 
 	MAP 2 ~
-	MAP e<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD> ~
+	MAP eéëêè ~
-	MAP u<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD> ~
+	MAP uüùúû ~
 
 The first line specifies the number of MAP lines following.  Vim ignores the
 number, but the line must be there.

runtime/doc/starting.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jan 15
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -58,9 +58,9 @@ filename	One or more file names.  The first one will be the current
 		that is read from stdin.  The commands that would normally be
 		read from stdin will now be read from stderr.  Example: >
 			find . -name "*.c" -print | vim -
-<		The buffer will be marked modified, because it contains text
+<		The buffer will not be marked as modified, so that it's easy
-		that needs to be saved.  Except when in readonly mode, then
+		to exit.  Be careful to mark it as modified if you don't want
-		the buffer is not marked modified.  Example: >
+		to accidentally lose it.  Example: >
 			ls | view -
 <
 		Starting in Ex mode: >
@@ -127,7 +127,8 @@ argument.
 On VMS all option arguments are assumed to be lowercase, unless preceded with
 a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 
---help							*-h* *--help*
+--help							*-h* *--help* *-?*
+-?
 -h		Give usage (help) message and exit.  {not in Vi}
 		See |info-message| about capturing the text.
 
@@ -140,11 +141,12 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 --noplugin	Skip loading plugins.  Resets the 'loadplugins' option.
 		{not in Vi}
 		Note that the |-u| argument may also disable loading plugins:
-			argument	load vimrc files	load plugins ~
+			argument   load: vimrc files  plugins  defaults.vim ~
-			(nothing)		yes		    yes
+			(nothing)	     yes	yes	  yes
-			-u NONE			no		    no
+			-u NONE		     no		no	  no
-			-u NORC			no		    yes
+			-u DEFAULTS	     no		no	  yes
-			--noplugin		yes		    no
+			-u NORC		     no		yes	  no
+			--noplugin	     yes	no	  yes
 
 --startuptime {fname}					*--startuptime*
 		During startup write timing messages to the file {fname}.
@@ -420,7 +422,9 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 							*--not-a-term*
 --not-a-term	Tells Vim that the user knows that the input and/or output is
 		not connected to a terminal.  This will avoid the warning and
-		the two second delay that would happen. {not in Vi}
+		the two second delay that would happen.
+		Also avoids the "Reading from stdin..." message.
+		{not in Vi}
 
 							*--ttyfail*
 --ttyfail	When the stdin or stdout is not a terminal (tty) then exit
@@ -465,21 +469,30 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 --nofork	GUI: Do not fork.  Same as |-f|.
 							*-u* *E282*
 -u {vimrc}	The file {vimrc} is read for initializations.  Most other
-		initializations are skipped; see |initialization|.  This can
+		initializations are skipped; see |initialization|.
-		be used to start Vim in a special mode, with special
+
+		This can be used to start Vim in a special mode, with special
 		mappings and settings.  A shell alias can be used to make
 		this easy to use.  For example: >
 			alias vimc vim -u ~/.c_vimrc !*
 <		Also consider using autocommands; see |autocommand|.
+
 		When {vimrc} is equal to "NONE" (all uppercase), all
 		initializations from files and environment variables are
 		skipped, including reading the |gvimrc| file when the GUI
 		starts.  Loading plugins is also skipped.
+
 		When {vimrc} is equal to "NORC" (all uppercase), this has the
 		same effect as "NONE", but loading plugins is not skipped.
-		Using the "-u" argument has the side effect that the
+
-		'compatible' option will be on by default.  This can have
+		When {vimrc} is equal to "DEFAULTS" (all uppercase), this has
-		unexpected effects.  See |'compatible'|.
+		the same effect as "NONE", but the |defaults.vim| script is
+		loaded, which will also set 'nocompatible'.
+
+		Using the "-u" argument with another argument than DEFAULTS
+		has the side effect that the 'compatible' option will be on by
+		default.  This can have unexpected effects.  See
+		|'compatible'|.
 		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-U* *E230*
@@ -497,6 +510,15 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		":rv" or ":wv" are used.  See also |viminfo-file|.
 		{not in Vi}
 
+							*--clean*
+--clean		Equal to "-u DEFAULTS -U NONE -i NONE":
+		- initializations from files and environment variables is
+		  skipped
+		- the |defaults.vim| script is loaded, which implies
+		  'nocompatible': use Vim defaults
+		- no |gvimrc| script is loaded
+		- no viminfo file is read or written
+		- the home directory is excluded from 'runtimepath'
 							*-x*
 -x		Use encryption to read/write files.  Will prompt for a key,
 		which is then stored in the 'key' option.  All writes will
@@ -856,6 +878,9 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
      (*) Using this file or environment variable will cause 'compatible' to be
 	 off by default.  See |compatible-default|.
 
+     Note: When using the |mzscheme| interface, it is initialized after loading
+     the vimrc file.  Changing 'mzschemedll' later has no effect.
+
 4. Load the plugin scripts.					*load-plugins*
 	This does the same as the command: >
 		:runtime! plugin/**/*.vim
@@ -868,6 +893,7 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 	Loading plugins won't be done when:
 	- The 'loadplugins' option was reset in a vimrc file.
 	- The |--noplugin| command line argument is used.
+	- The |--clean| command line argument is used.
 	- The "-u NONE" command line argument is used |-u|.
 	- When Vim was compiled without the |+eval| feature.
 	Note that using "-c 'set noloadplugins'" doesn't work, because the
@@ -987,13 +1013,13 @@ Vi compatible default value ~
 When Vim starts, the 'compatible' option is on.  This will be used when Vim
 starts its initializations.  But as soon as:
 - a user vimrc file is found, or
-- a vimrc file in the current directory, or
+- a vimrc file in the current directory is found, or
 - the "VIMINIT" environment variable is set, or
 - the "-N" command line argument is given, or
-  even when no vimrc file exists.
+- the "--clean" command line argument is given, or
 - the |defaults.vim| script is loaded, or
-- gvimrc file was found,
+- a gvimrc file was found,
-then it will be set to 'nocompatible'.
+then the option will be set to 'nocompatible'.
 
 Note that this does NOT happen when a system-wide vimrc file was found.
 
@@ -1019,13 +1045,13 @@ giving the mapping.
 Defaults without a .vimrc file ~
 							*defaults.vim*
 If Vim is started normally and no user vimrc file is found, the
-$VIMRUTIME/defaults.vim script is loaded.  This will set 'compatible' off,
+$VIMRUNTIME/defaults.vim script is loaded.  This will set 'compatible' off,
 switch on syntax highlighting and a few more things.  See the script for
 details.  NOTE: this is done since Vim 8.0, not in Vim 7.4. (it was added in
 patch 7.4.2111 to be exact).
 
 This should work well for new Vim users.  If you create your own .vimrc, it is
-recommended to add this line somewhere near the top: >
+recommended to add these lines somewhere near the top: >
 	unlet! skip_defaults_vim
 	source $VIMRUNTIME/defaults.vim
 Then Vim works like before you had a .vimrc. Copying $VIMRUNTIME/vimrc_example
@@ -1396,7 +1422,7 @@ The output of ":mkview" contains these items:
 5. The scroll position and the cursor position in the file.  Doesn't work very
    well when there are closed folds.
 6. The local current directory, if it is different from the global current
-   directory.
+   directory and 'viewoptions' contains "curdir".
 
 Note that Views and Sessions are not perfect:
 - They don't restore everything.  For example, defined functions, autocommands
@@ -1508,7 +1534,7 @@ Notes for Unix:
   you have worked with.
 - If you want to share the viminfo file with other users (e.g. when you "su"
   to another user), you can make the file writable for the group or everybody.
-  Vim will preserve this when writing new viminfo files.  Be careful, don't
+  Vim will preserve this when replacing the viminfo file.  Be careful, don't
   allow just anybody to read and write your viminfo file!
 - Vim will not overwrite a viminfo file that is not writable by the current
   "real" user.  This helps for when you did "su" to become root, but your

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 04
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -61,10 +61,12 @@ fine.  If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
 directory where the Vim stuff is located.  For example, if your syntax files
 are in the "/usr/vim/vim50/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
 "/usr/vim/vim50".  You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
+This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
+will start soon.  See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
 
 							*:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
-The ":syntax enable" command will keep your current color settings.  This
+The `:syntax enable` command will keep your current color settings.  This
-allows using ":highlight" commands to set your preferred colors before or
+allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
 after using this command.  If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
 defaults, use: >
 	:syntax on
@@ -810,12 +812,9 @@ See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
 
 APACHE						*apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
 
-The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting depending on Apache HTTP
+The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
-server version, by default for 1.3.x.  Set "apache_version" to Apache version
+version 2.2.3.
-(as a string) to get highlighting for another version.	Example: >
 
-	:let apache_version = "2.0"
-<
 
 		*asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
 ASSEMBLY	*ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
@@ -2138,6 +2137,16 @@ set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire.  Example: >
 	:let msql_minlines = 200
 
 
+N1QL						*n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
+
+N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
+Couchbase Server databases.
+
+Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
+and special values.  Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
+many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
+
+
 NCF						*ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
 
 There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
@@ -2770,13 +2779,10 @@ Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
 
 SCHEME						*scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
 
-By default only R5RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
+By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
 
-MzScheme-specific stuff will be used if b:is_mzscheme or g:is_mzscheme
+scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
-variables are defined.
+Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
-
-Also scheme.vim supports keywords of the Chicken Scheme->C compiler.  Define
-b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
 
 
 SDL						*sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
@@ -4621,7 +4627,9 @@ in their own color.
 				runtime colors/evening.vim
 				hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
 
-<			After the color scheme has been loaded the
+<			Before the color scheme will be loaded the
+			|ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
+			After the color scheme has been loaded the
 			|ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
 			For info about writing a colorscheme file: >
 				:edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
@@ -4689,23 +4697,26 @@ the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
 
 					*bold* *underline* *undercurl*
 					*inverse* *italic* *standout*
+					*nocombine* *strikethrough*
 term={attr-list}			*attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
 	attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
 	following items (in any order):
 		bold
 		underline
 		undercurl	not always available
+		strikethrough	not always available
 		reverse
 		inverse		same as reverse
 		italic
 		standout
+		nocombine	override attributes instead of combining them
 		NONE		no attributes used (used to reset it)
 
 	Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font.  They
 	have the same effect.
 	"undercurl" is a curly underline.  When "undercurl" is not possible
-	then "underline" is used.  In general "undercurl" is only available in
+	then "underline" is used.  In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
-	the GUI.  The color is set with |highlight-guisp|.
+	is only available in the GUI.  The color is set with |highlight-guisp|.
 
 start={term-list}				*highlight-start* *E422*
 stop={term-list}				*term-list* *highlight-stop*
@@ -4870,7 +4881,8 @@ guifg={color-name}					*highlight-guifg*
 guibg={color-name}					*highlight-guibg*
 guisp={color-name}					*highlight-guisp*
 	These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
-	(guisp) color to use in the GUI.  "guisp" is used for undercurl.
+	(guisp) color to use in the GUI.  "guisp" is used for undercurl and
+	strikethrough.
 	There are a few special names:
 		NONE		no color (transparent)
 		bg		use normal background color
@@ -4982,10 +4994,11 @@ PmenuSbar	Popup menu: scrollbar.
 PmenuThumb	Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
 							*hl-Question*
 Question	|hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
+							*hl-QuickFixLine*
+QuickFixLine	Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
 							*hl-Search*
 Search		Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
-		Also used for highlighting the current line in the quickfix
+		Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
-		window and similar items that need to stand out.
 							*hl-SpecialKey*
 SpecialKey	Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
 		to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
@@ -5011,12 +5024,19 @@ StatusLine	status line of current window
 StatusLineNC	status lines of not-current windows
 		Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
 		the status line of the current window.
+							*hl-StatusLineTerm*
+StatusLineTerm	status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
+							*hl-StatusLineTermNC*
+StatusLineTermNC   status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
+		window.
 							*hl-TabLine*
 TabLine		tab pages line, not active tab page label
 							*hl-TabLineFill*
 TabLineFill	tab pages line, where there are no labels
 							*hl-TabLineSel*
 TabLineSel	tab pages line, active tab page label
+							*hl-Terminal*
+Terminal	|terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
 							*hl-Title*
 Title		titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
 							*hl-Visual*

runtime/doc/tabpage.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*tabpage.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Oct 20
+*tabpage.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -286,8 +286,7 @@ LOOPING OVER TAB PAGES:
 		current tab page.
 		{cmd} can contain '|' to concatenate several commands.
 		{cmd} must not open or close tab pages or reorder them.
-		{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+		{not in Vi}
-		|+listcmds| feature}
 		Also see |:windo|, |:argdo|, |:bufdo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|, |:cfdo|
 		and |:lfdo|
 

runtime/doc/tags

@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@
 $	motion.txt	/*$*
 $HOME	options.txt	/*$HOME*
 $HOME-use	version5.txt	/*$HOME-use*
+$HOME-windows	options.txt	/*$HOME-windows*
 $MYGVIMRC	gui.txt	/*$MYGVIMRC*
 $MYVIMRC	starting.txt	/*$MYVIMRC*
 $VIM	starting.txt	/*$VIM*
@@ -73,12 +74,14 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'backupskip'	options.txt	/*'backupskip'*
 'balloondelay'	options.txt	/*'balloondelay'*
 'ballooneval'	options.txt	/*'ballooneval'*
+'balloonevalterm'	options.txt	/*'balloonevalterm'*
 'balloonexpr'	options.txt	/*'balloonexpr'*
 'bdir'	options.txt	/*'bdir'*
 'bdlay'	options.txt	/*'bdlay'*
 'beautify'	vi_diff.txt	/*'beautify'*
 'belloff'	options.txt	/*'belloff'*
 'beval'	options.txt	/*'beval'*
+'bevalterm'	options.txt	/*'bevalterm'*
 'bex'	options.txt	/*'bex'*
 'bexpr'	options.txt	/*'bexpr'*
 'bf'	vi_diff.txt	/*'bf'*
@@ -291,6 +294,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'gfw'	options.txt	/*'gfw'*
 'ghr'	options.txt	/*'ghr'*
 'go'	options.txt	/*'go'*
+'go-!'	options.txt	/*'go-!'*
 'go-A'	options.txt	/*'go-A'*
 'go-F'	options.txt	/*'go-F'*
 'go-L'	options.txt	/*'go-L'*
@@ -306,6 +310,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'go-g'	options.txt	/*'go-g'*
 'go-h'	options.txt	/*'go-h'*
 'go-i'	options.txt	/*'go-i'*
+'go-k'	options.txt	/*'go-k'*
 'go-l'	options.txt	/*'go-l'*
 'go-m'	options.txt	/*'go-m'*
 'go-p'	options.txt	/*'go-p'*
@@ -366,7 +371,9 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'ims'	options.txt	/*'ims'*
 'imsearch'	options.txt	/*'imsearch'*
 'imsf'	options.txt	/*'imsf'*
+'imst'	options.txt	/*'imst'*
 'imstatusfunc'	options.txt	/*'imstatusfunc'*
+'imstyle'	options.txt	/*'imstyle'*
 'inc'	options.txt	/*'inc'*
 'include'	options.txt	/*'include'*
 'includeexpr'	options.txt	/*'includeexpr'*
@@ -474,6 +481,8 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'msm'	options.txt	/*'msm'*
 'mzq'	options.txt	/*'mzq'*
 'mzquantum'	options.txt	/*'mzquantum'*
+'mzschemedll'	options.txt	/*'mzschemedll'*
+'mzschemegcdll'	options.txt	/*'mzschemegcdll'*
 'nf'	options.txt	/*'nf'*
 'noacd'	options.txt	/*'noacd'*
 'noai'	options.txt	/*'noai'*
@@ -499,7 +508,9 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'noawa'	options.txt	/*'noawa'*
 'nobackup'	options.txt	/*'nobackup'*
 'noballooneval'	options.txt	/*'noballooneval'*
+'noballoonevalterm'	options.txt	/*'noballoonevalterm'*
 'nobeval'	options.txt	/*'nobeval'*
+'nobevalterm'	options.txt	/*'nobevalterm'*
 'nobin'	options.txt	/*'nobin'*
 'nobinary'	options.txt	/*'nobinary'*
 'nobiosk'	options.txt	/*'nobiosk'*
@@ -772,10 +783,14 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'prompt'	options.txt	/*'prompt'*
 'pt'	options.txt	/*'pt'*
 'pumheight'	options.txt	/*'pumheight'*
+'pumwidth'	options.txt	/*'pumwidth'*
 'pvh'	options.txt	/*'pvh'*
 'pvw'	options.txt	/*'pvw'*
+'pw'	options.txt	/*'pw'*
 'pythondll'	options.txt	/*'pythondll'*
+'pythonhome'	options.txt	/*'pythonhome'*
 'pythonthreedll'	options.txt	/*'pythonthreedll'*
+'pythonthreehome'	options.txt	/*'pythonthreehome'*
 'pyx'	options.txt	/*'pyx'*
 'pyxversion'	options.txt	/*'pyxversion'*
 'qe'	options.txt	/*'qe'*
@@ -935,6 +950,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 't_Co'	term.txt	/*'t_Co'*
 't_Cs'	term.txt	/*'t_Cs'*
 't_DL'	term.txt	/*'t_DL'*
+'t_EC'	term.txt	/*'t_EC'*
 't_EI'	term.txt	/*'t_EI'*
 't_F1'	term.txt	/*'t_F1'*
 't_F2'	term.txt	/*'t_F2'*
@@ -971,12 +987,20 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 't_PE'	term.txt	/*'t_PE'*
 't_PS'	term.txt	/*'t_PS'*
 't_RB'	term.txt	/*'t_RB'*
+'t_RC'	term.txt	/*'t_RC'*
+'t_RF'	term.txt	/*'t_RF'*
 't_RI'	term.txt	/*'t_RI'*
+'t_RS'	term.txt	/*'t_RS'*
 't_RV'	term.txt	/*'t_RV'*
+'t_SC'	term.txt	/*'t_SC'*
+'t_SH'	term.txt	/*'t_SH'*
 't_SI'	term.txt	/*'t_SI'*
 't_SR'	term.txt	/*'t_SR'*
 't_Sb'	term.txt	/*'t_Sb'*
 't_Sf'	term.txt	/*'t_Sf'*
+'t_Te'	term.txt	/*'t_Te'*
+'t_Ts'	term.txt	/*'t_Ts'*
+'t_VS'	term.txt	/*'t_VS'*
 't_WP'	term.txt	/*'t_WP'*
 't_WS'	term.txt	/*'t_WS'*
 't_ZH'	term.txt	/*'t_ZH'*
@@ -1064,6 +1088,9 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'termbidi'	options.txt	/*'termbidi'*
 'termencoding'	options.txt	/*'termencoding'*
 'termguicolors'	options.txt	/*'termguicolors'*
+'termwinkey'	options.txt	/*'termwinkey'*
+'termwinscroll'	options.txt	/*'termwinscroll'*
+'termwinsize'	options.txt	/*'termwinsize'*
 'terse'	options.txt	/*'terse'*
 'textauto'	options.txt	/*'textauto'*
 'textmode'	options.txt	/*'textmode'*
@@ -1101,6 +1128,9 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'ttyscroll'	options.txt	/*'ttyscroll'*
 'ttytype'	options.txt	/*'ttytype'*
 'tw'	options.txt	/*'tw'*
+'twk'	options.txt	/*'twk'*
+'tws'	options.txt	/*'tws'*
+'twsl'	options.txt	/*'twsl'*
 'tx'	options.txt	/*'tx'*
 'uc'	options.txt	/*'uc'*
 'udf'	options.txt	/*'udf'*
@@ -1124,7 +1154,9 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'vi'	options.txt	/*'vi'*
 'viewdir'	options.txt	/*'viewdir'*
 'viewoptions'	options.txt	/*'viewoptions'*
+'vif'	options.txt	/*'vif'*
 'viminfo'	options.txt	/*'viminfo'*
+'viminfofile'	options.txt	/*'viminfofile'*
 'virtualedit'	options.txt	/*'virtualedit'*
 'visualbell'	options.txt	/*'visualbell'*
 'vop'	options.txt	/*'vop'*
@@ -1161,6 +1193,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'winheight'	options.txt	/*'winheight'*
 'winminheight'	options.txt	/*'winminheight'*
 'winminwidth'	options.txt	/*'winminwidth'*
+'winptydll'	options.txt	/*'winptydll'*
 'winwidth'	options.txt	/*'winwidth'*
 'wiv'	options.txt	/*'wiv'*
 'wiw'	options.txt	/*'wiw'*
@@ -1201,7 +1234,9 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 +acl	various.txt	/*+acl*
 +arabic	various.txt	/*+arabic*
 +autocmd	various.txt	/*+autocmd*
++autoservername	various.txt	/*+autoservername*
 +balloon_eval	various.txt	/*+balloon_eval*
++balloon_eval_term	various.txt	/*+balloon_eval_term*
 +browse	various.txt	/*+browse*
 +builtin_terms	various.txt	/*+builtin_terms*
 +byte_offset	various.txt	/*+byte_offset*
@@ -1309,6 +1344,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 +tcl	various.txt	/*+tcl*
 +tcl/dyn	various.txt	/*+tcl\/dyn*
 +termguicolors	various.txt	/*+termguicolors*
++terminal	various.txt	/*+terminal*
 +terminfo	various.txt	/*+terminfo*
 +termresponse	various.txt	/*+termresponse*
 +textobjects	various.txt	/*+textobjects*
@@ -1316,6 +1352,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 +timers	various.txt	/*+timers*
 +title	various.txt	/*+title*
 +toolbar	various.txt	/*+toolbar*
++unix	eval.txt	/*+unix*
 +user_commands	various.txt	/*+user_commands*
 +vertsplit	various.txt	/*+vertsplit*
 +viminfo	various.txt	/*+viminfo*
@@ -1323,6 +1360,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 +visual	various.txt	/*+visual*
 +visualextra	various.txt	/*+visualextra*
 +vreplace	various.txt	/*+vreplace*
++vtp	various.txt	/*+vtp*
 +wildignore	various.txt	/*+wildignore*
 +wildmenu	various.txt	/*+wildmenu*
 +windows	various.txt	/*+windows*
@@ -1344,6 +1382,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 -+rv	gui_x11.txt	/*-+rv*
 --	starting.txt	/*--*
 ---	starting.txt	/*---*
+--clean	starting.txt	/*--clean*
 --cmd	starting.txt	/*--cmd*
 --echo-wid	starting.txt	/*--echo-wid*
 --help	starting.txt	/*--help*
@@ -1369,6 +1408,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 --ttyfail	starting.txt	/*--ttyfail*
 --version	starting.txt	/*--version*
 --windowid	starting.txt	/*--windowid*
+-?	starting.txt	/*-?*
 -A	starting.txt	/*-A*
 -C	starting.txt	/*-C*
 -D	starting.txt	/*-D*
@@ -1879,6 +1919,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :<afile>	cmdline.txt	/*:<afile>*
 :<amatch>	cmdline.txt	/*:<amatch>*
 :<cWORD>	cmdline.txt	/*:<cWORD>*
+:<cexpr>	cmdline.txt	/*:<cexpr>*
 :<cfile>	cmdline.txt	/*:<cfile>*
 :<cword>	cmdline.txt	/*:<cword>*
 :<sfile>	cmdline.txt	/*:<sfile>*
@@ -1894,11 +1935,18 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :AdaTagDir	ft_ada.txt	/*:AdaTagDir*
 :AdaTagFile	ft_ada.txt	/*:AdaTagFile*
 :AdaTypes	ft_ada.txt	/*:AdaTypes*
+:Arguments	terminal.txt	/*:Arguments*
+:Break	terminal.txt	/*:Break*
+:Clear	terminal.txt	/*:Clear*
 :CompilerSet	usr_41.txt	/*:CompilerSet*
+:Continue	terminal.txt	/*:Continue*
 :DiffOrig	diff.txt	/*:DiffOrig*
 :DoMatchParen	pi_paren.txt	/*:DoMatchParen*
+:Evaluate	terminal.txt	/*:Evaluate*
 :Explore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Explore*
+:Finish	terminal.txt	/*:Finish*
 :GLVS	pi_getscript.txt	/*:GLVS*
+:Gdb	terminal.txt	/*:Gdb*
 :GetLatestVimScripts_dat	pi_getscript.txt	/*:GetLatestVimScripts_dat*
 :GnatFind	ft_ada.txt	/*:GnatFind*
 :GnatPretty	ft_ada.txt	/*:GnatPretty*
@@ -1923,11 +1971,14 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :Ntree	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Ntree*
 :Nw	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Nw*
 :Nwrite	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Nwrite*
+:Over	terminal.txt	/*:Over*
 :P	various.txt	/*:P*
 :Pexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Pexplore*
 :Print	various.txt	/*:Print*
+:Program	terminal.txt	/*:Program*
 :Rexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Rexplore*
 :RmVimball	pi_vimball.txt	/*:RmVimball*
+:Run	terminal.txt	/*:Run*
 :RustEmitAsm	ft_rust.txt	/*:RustEmitAsm*
 :RustEmitIr	ft_rust.txt	/*:RustEmitIr*
 :RustExpand	ft_rust.txt	/*:RustExpand*
@@ -1936,13 +1987,19 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :RustPlay	ft_rust.txt	/*:RustPlay*
 :RustRun	ft_rust.txt	/*:RustRun*
 :Sexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Sexplore*
+:Source	terminal.txt	/*:Source*
+:Step	terminal.txt	/*:Step*
+:Stop	terminal.txt	/*:Stop*
 :TOhtml	syntax.txt	/*:TOhtml*
 :TarDiff	pi_tar.txt	/*:TarDiff*
+:Termdebug	terminal.txt	/*:Termdebug*
+:TermdebugCommand	terminal.txt	/*:TermdebugCommand*
 :Texplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Texplore*
 :UseVimball	pi_vimball.txt	/*:UseVimball*
 :Vexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Vexplore*
 :VimballList	pi_vimball.txt	/*:VimballList*
 :Vimuntar	pi_tar.txt	/*:Vimuntar*
+:Winbar	terminal.txt	/*:Winbar*
 :X	editing.txt	/*:X*
 :XMLent	insert.txt	/*:XMLent*
 :XMLns	insert.txt	/*:XMLns*
@@ -3098,6 +3155,8 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :tclfile	if_tcl.txt	/*:tclfile*
 :te	gui_w32.txt	/*:te*
 :tearoff	gui_w32.txt	/*:tearoff*
+:ter	terminal.txt	/*:ter*
+:terminal	terminal.txt	/*:terminal*
 :tf	tagsrch.txt	/*:tf*
 :tfirst	tagsrch.txt	/*:tfirst*
 :th	eval.txt	/*:th*
@@ -3107,9 +3166,16 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :tl	tagsrch.txt	/*:tl*
 :tlast	tagsrch.txt	/*:tlast*
 :tm	gui.txt	/*:tm*
+:tma	map.txt	/*:tma*
+:tmap	map.txt	/*:tmap*
+:tmap_l	map.txt	/*:tmap_l*
+:tmapc	map.txt	/*:tmapc*
+:tmapclear	map.txt	/*:tmapclear*
 :tmenu	gui.txt	/*:tmenu*
 :tn	tagsrch.txt	/*:tn*
 :tnext	tagsrch.txt	/*:tnext*
+:tno	map.txt	/*:tno*
+:tnoremap	map.txt	/*:tnoremap*
 :topleft	windows.txt	/*:topleft*
 :tp	tagsrch.txt	/*:tp*
 :tprevious	tagsrch.txt	/*:tprevious*
@@ -3119,6 +3185,8 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :ts	tagsrch.txt	/*:ts*
 :tselect	tagsrch.txt	/*:tselect*
 :tu	gui.txt	/*:tu*
+:tunma	map.txt	/*:tunma*
+:tunmap	map.txt	/*:tunmap*
 :tunmenu	gui.txt	/*:tunmenu*
 :u	undo.txt	/*:u*
 :un	undo.txt	/*:un*
@@ -3383,6 +3451,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 <bang>	map.txt	/*<bang>*
 <buffer=N>	autocmd.txt	/*<buffer=N>*
 <buffer=abuf>	autocmd.txt	/*<buffer=abuf>*
+<cexpr>	cmdline.txt	/*<cexpr>*
 <cfile>	cmdline.txt	/*<cfile>*
 <character>	intro.txt	/*<character>*
 <count>	map.txt	/*<count>*
@@ -3413,6 +3482,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 <mods>	map.txt	/*<mods>*
 <nomodeline>	autocmd.txt	/*<nomodeline>*
 <q-args>	map.txt	/*<q-args>*
+<range>	map.txt	/*<range>*
 <reg>	map.txt	/*<reg>*
 <register>	map.txt	/*<register>*
 <sfile>	cmdline.txt	/*<sfile>*
@@ -3460,6 +3530,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 @r	eval.txt	/*@r*
 A	insert.txt	/*A*
 ACL	editing.txt	/*ACL*
+ANSI-C	develop.txt	/*ANSI-C*
 ATTENTION	usr_11.txt	/*ATTENTION*
 Abbreviations	map.txt	/*Abbreviations*
 Aleph	options.txt	/*Aleph*
@@ -3496,6 +3567,8 @@ BufWritePre	autocmd.txt	/*BufWritePre*
 C	change.txt	/*C*
 C-editing	tips.txt	/*C-editing*
 C-indenting	indent.txt	/*C-indenting*
+C89	develop.txt	/*C89*
+C99	develop.txt	/*C99*
 COMSPEC	starting.txt	/*COMSPEC*
 CR-used-for-NL	pattern.txt	/*CR-used-for-NL*
 CTRL-6	editing.txt	/*CTRL-6*
@@ -3526,6 +3599,8 @@ CTRL-V-alternative	gui_w32.txt	/*CTRL-V-alternative*
 CTRL-W	index.txt	/*CTRL-W*
 CTRL-W_+	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_+*
 CTRL-W_-	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_-*
+CTRL-W_.	terminal.txt	/*CTRL-W_.*
+CTRL-W_:	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_:*
 CTRL-W_<	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_<*
 CTRL-W_<BS>	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_<BS>*
 CTRL-W_<CR>	quickfix.txt	/*CTRL-W_<CR>*
@@ -3564,6 +3639,7 @@ CTRL-W_H	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_H*
 CTRL-W_J	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_J*
 CTRL-W_K	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_K*
 CTRL-W_L	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_L*
+CTRL-W_N	terminal.txt	/*CTRL-W_N*
 CTRL-W_P	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_P*
 CTRL-W_R	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_R*
 CTRL-W_S	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_S*
@@ -3591,6 +3667,7 @@ CTRL-W_n	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_n*
 CTRL-W_o	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_o*
 CTRL-W_p	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_p*
 CTRL-W_q	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_q*
+CTRL-W_quote	terminal.txt	/*CTRL-W_quote*
 CTRL-W_r	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_r*
 CTRL-W_s	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_s*
 CTRL-W_t	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_t*
@@ -3614,9 +3691,13 @@ Cmd-event	autocmd.txt	/*Cmd-event*
 CmdUndefined	autocmd.txt	/*CmdUndefined*
 Cmdline	cmdline.txt	/*Cmdline*
 Cmdline-mode	cmdline.txt	/*Cmdline-mode*
+CmdlineChanged	autocmd.txt	/*CmdlineChanged*
+CmdlineEnter	autocmd.txt	/*CmdlineEnter*
+CmdlineLeave	autocmd.txt	/*CmdlineLeave*
 CmdwinEnter	autocmd.txt	/*CmdwinEnter*
 CmdwinLeave	autocmd.txt	/*CmdwinLeave*
 ColorScheme	autocmd.txt	/*ColorScheme*
+ColorSchemePre	autocmd.txt	/*ColorSchemePre*
 Command-line	cmdline.txt	/*Command-line*
 Command-line-mode	cmdline.txt	/*Command-line-mode*
 CompleteDone	autocmd.txt	/*CompleteDone*
@@ -3636,6 +3717,7 @@ Dictionaries	eval.txt	/*Dictionaries*
 Dictionary	eval.txt	/*Dictionary*
 Dictionary-function	eval.txt	/*Dictionary-function*
 Digraphs	digraph.txt	/*Digraphs*
+DirChanged	autocmd.txt	/*DirChanged*
 E	motion.txt	/*E*
 E10	message.txt	/*E10*
 E100	diff.txt	/*E100*
@@ -3716,7 +3798,6 @@ E169	message.txt	/*E169*
 E17	message.txt	/*E17*
 E170	eval.txt	/*E170*
 E171	eval.txt	/*E171*
-E172	message.txt	/*E172*
 E173	message.txt	/*E173*
 E174	map.txt	/*E174*
 E175	map.txt	/*E175*
@@ -4521,7 +4602,17 @@ E942	eval.txt	/*E942*
 E943	message.txt	/*E943*
 E944	pattern.txt	/*E944*
 E945	pattern.txt	/*E945*
+E946	terminal.txt	/*E946*
+E947	terminal.txt	/*E947*
+E948	terminal.txt	/*E948*
+E949	editing.txt	/*E949*
 E95	message.txt	/*E95*
+E950	message.txt	/*E950*
+E951	pattern.txt	/*E951*
+E952	autocmd.txt	/*E952*
+E953	eval.txt	/*E953*
+E954	options.txt	/*E954*
+E955	eval.txt	/*E955*
 E96	diff.txt	/*E96*
 E97	diff.txt	/*E97*
 E98	diff.txt	/*E98*
@@ -4533,6 +4624,7 @@ EncodingChanged	autocmd.txt	/*EncodingChanged*
 Eterm	syntax.txt	/*Eterm*
 Ex	intro.txt	/*Ex*
 Ex-mode	intro.txt	/*Ex-mode*
+ExitPre	autocmd.txt	/*ExitPre*
 Exuberant_ctags	tagsrch.txt	/*Exuberant_ctags*
 F	motion.txt	/*F*
 FALSE	eval.txt	/*FALSE*
@@ -4762,8 +4854,14 @@ TabNew	autocmd.txt	/*TabNew*
 Tcl	if_tcl.txt	/*Tcl*
 TermChanged	autocmd.txt	/*TermChanged*
 TermResponse	autocmd.txt	/*TermResponse*
+Terminal-Job	terminal.txt	/*Terminal-Job*
+Terminal-Normal	terminal.txt	/*Terminal-Normal*
+Terminal-mode	terminal.txt	/*Terminal-mode*
+TerminalOpen	autocmd.txt	/*TerminalOpen*
 TextChanged	autocmd.txt	/*TextChanged*
 TextChangedI	autocmd.txt	/*TextChangedI*
+TextChangedP	autocmd.txt	/*TextChangedP*
+TextYankPost	autocmd.txt	/*TextYankPost*
 Transact-SQL	ft_sql.txt	/*Transact-SQL*
 U	undo.txt	/*U*
 UTF-8	mbyte.txt	/*UTF-8*
@@ -4802,9 +4900,11 @@ W18	syntax.txt	/*W18*
 W19	autocmd.txt	/*W19*
 W20	if_pyth.txt	/*W20*
 W21	if_pyth.txt	/*W21*
+W22	eval.txt	/*W22*
 WORD	motion.txt	/*WORD*
 WWW	intro.txt	/*WWW*
 Win32	os_win32.txt	/*Win32*
+WinBar	gui.txt	/*WinBar*
 WinEnter	autocmd.txt	/*WinEnter*
 WinLeave	autocmd.txt	/*WinLeave*
 WinNew	autocmd.txt	/*WinNew*
@@ -5021,7 +5121,10 @@ asin()	eval.txt	/*asin()*
 asm.vim	syntax.txt	/*asm.vim*
 asm68k	syntax.txt	/*asm68k*
 asmh8300.vim	syntax.txt	/*asmh8300.vim*
+assert-return	eval.txt	/*assert-return*
+assert_beeps()	eval.txt	/*assert_beeps()*
 assert_equal()	eval.txt	/*assert_equal()*
+assert_equalfile()	eval.txt	/*assert_equalfile()*
 assert_exception()	eval.txt	/*assert_exception()*
 assert_fails()	eval.txt	/*assert_fails()*
 assert_false()	eval.txt	/*assert_false()*
@@ -5094,6 +5197,7 @@ backup-extension	version4.txt	/*backup-extension*
 backup-table	editing.txt	/*backup-table*
 balloon-eval	debugger.txt	/*balloon-eval*
 balloon_show()	eval.txt	/*balloon_show()*
+balloon_split()	eval.txt	/*balloon_split()*
 bar	motion.txt	/*bar*
 bars	help.txt	/*bars*
 base_font_name_list	mbyte.txt	/*base_font_name_list*
@@ -5182,6 +5286,7 @@ c_<C-Left>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<C-Left>*
 c_<C-R>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<C-R>*
 c_<C-R>_<C-A>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<C-R>_<C-A>*
 c_<C-R>_<C-F>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<C-R>_<C-F>*
+c_<C-R>_<C-L>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<C-R>_<C-L>*
 c_<C-R>_<C-O>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<C-R>_<C-O>*
 c_<C-R>_<C-P>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<C-R>_<C-P>*
 c_<C-R>_<C-R>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<C-R>_<C-R>*
@@ -5230,6 +5335,7 @@ c_CTRL-R	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-R*
 c_CTRL-R_=	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-R_=*
 c_CTRL-R_CTRL-A	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-A*
 c_CTRL-R_CTRL-F	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-F*
+c_CTRL-R_CTRL-L	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-L*
 c_CTRL-R_CTRL-O	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-O*
 c_CTRL-R_CTRL-P	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-P*
 c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R*
@@ -5398,6 +5504,7 @@ cinoptions-values	indent.txt	/*cinoptions-values*
 clear-undo	undo.txt	/*clear-undo*
 clearmatches()	eval.txt	/*clearmatches()*
 client-server	remote.txt	/*client-server*
+client-server-name	remote.txt	/*client-server-name*
 clientserver	remote.txt	/*clientserver*
 clipboard	gui.txt	/*clipboard*
 clipboard-autoselect	options.txt	/*clipboard-autoselect*
@@ -5809,6 +5916,7 @@ eval()	eval.txt	/*eval()*
 eval-examples	eval.txt	/*eval-examples*
 eval-sandbox	eval.txt	/*eval-sandbox*
 eval.txt	eval.txt	/*eval.txt*
+event-variable	eval.txt	/*event-variable*
 eventhandler()	eval.txt	/*eventhandler()*
 eview	starting.txt	/*eview*
 evim	starting.txt	/*evim*
@@ -6115,6 +6223,7 @@ ft-mathematica-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-mathematica-syntax*
 ft-mma-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-mma-syntax*
 ft-moo-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-moo-syntax*
 ft-msql-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-msql-syntax*
+ft-n1ql-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-n1ql-syntax*
 ft-nasm-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-nasm-syntax*
 ft-ncf-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-ncf-syntax*
 ft-nroff-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-nroff-syntax*
@@ -6169,6 +6278,7 @@ ft-vb-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-vb-syntax*
 ft-verilog-indent	indent.txt	/*ft-verilog-indent*
 ft-vhdl-indent	indent.txt	/*ft-vhdl-indent*
 ft-vim-indent	indent.txt	/*ft-vim-indent*
+ft-vim-plugin	filetype.txt	/*ft-vim-plugin*
 ft-vim-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-vim-syntax*
 ft-xf86conf-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-xf86conf-syntax*
 ft-xhtml-omni	insert.txt	/*ft-xhtml-omni*
@@ -6176,6 +6286,7 @@ ft-xml-omni	insert.txt	/*ft-xml-omni*
 ft-xml-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-xml-syntax*
 ft-xpm-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-xpm-syntax*
 ft-yaml-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-yaml-syntax*
+ft-zimbu-plugin	filetype.txt	/*ft-zimbu-plugin*
 ft-zsh-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-zsh-syntax*
 ft_ada.txt	ft_ada.txt	/*ft_ada.txt*
 ft_rust.txt	ft_rust.txt	/*ft_rust.txt*
@@ -6341,10 +6452,15 @@ g:netrw_list_cmd_options	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_list_cmd_options*
 g:netrw_list_hide	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_list_hide*
 g:netrw_liststyle	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_liststyle*
 g:netrw_localcopycmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localcopycmd*
+g:netrw_localcopycmdopt	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localcopycmdopt*
 g:netrw_localcopydircmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localcopydircmd*
+g:netrw_localcopydircmdopt	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localcopydircmdopt*
 g:netrw_localmkdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localmkdir*
+g:netrw_localmkdiropt	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localmkdiropt*
 g:netrw_localmovecmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localmovecmd*
+g:netrw_localmovecmdopt	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localmovecmdopt*
 g:netrw_localrmdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localrmdir*
+g:netrw_localrmdiropt	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localrmdiropt*
 g:netrw_maxfilenamelen	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_maxfilenamelen*
 g:netrw_menu	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_menu*
 g:netrw_mkdir_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_mkdir_cmd*
@@ -6354,11 +6470,13 @@ g:netrw_nogx	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_nogx*
 g:netrw_preview	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_preview*
 g:netrw_rcp_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rcp_cmd*
 g:netrw_remote_mkdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_remote_mkdir*
+g:netrw_rename_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rename_cmd*
 g:netrw_retmap	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_retmap*
 g:netrw_rm_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rm_cmd*
 g:netrw_rmdir_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rmdir_cmd*
 g:netrw_rmf_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rmf_cmd*
 g:netrw_rsync_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rsync_cmd*
+g:netrw_rsync_sep	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rsync_sep*
 g:netrw_scp_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_scp_cmd*
 g:netrw_scpport	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_scpport*
 g:netrw_sepchr	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_sepchr*
@@ -6409,6 +6527,7 @@ g:tar_nomax	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_nomax*
 g:tar_readoptions	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_readoptions*
 g:tar_secure	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_secure*
 g:tar_writeoptions	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_writeoptions*
+g:terminal_ansi_colors	terminal.txt	/*g:terminal_ansi_colors*
 g:tex_comment_nospell	syntax.txt	/*g:tex_comment_nospell*
 g:tex_conceal	syntax.txt	/*g:tex_conceal*
 g:tex_fast	syntax.txt	/*g:tex_fast*
@@ -6476,12 +6595,14 @@ ga	various.txt	/*ga*
 garbagecollect()	eval.txt	/*garbagecollect()*
 gd	pattern.txt	/*gd*
 gdb	debug.txt	/*gdb*
+gdb-version	terminal.txt	/*gdb-version*
 ge	motion.txt	/*ge*
 get()	eval.txt	/*get()*
 get-ms-debuggers	debug.txt	/*get-ms-debuggers*
 getbufinfo()	eval.txt	/*getbufinfo()*
 getbufline()	eval.txt	/*getbufline()*
 getbufvar()	eval.txt	/*getbufvar()*
+getchangelist()	eval.txt	/*getchangelist()*
 getchar()	eval.txt	/*getchar()*
 getcharmod()	eval.txt	/*getcharmod()*
 getcharsearch()	eval.txt	/*getcharsearch()*
@@ -6497,6 +6618,7 @@ getfperm()	eval.txt	/*getfperm()*
 getfsize()	eval.txt	/*getfsize()*
 getftime()	eval.txt	/*getftime()*
 getftype()	eval.txt	/*getftype()*
+getjumplist()	eval.txt	/*getjumplist()*
 getlatestvimscripts-install	pi_getscript.txt	/*getlatestvimscripts-install*
 getline()	eval.txt	/*getline()*
 getloclist()	eval.txt	/*getloclist()*
@@ -6504,6 +6626,7 @@ getmatches()	eval.txt	/*getmatches()*
 getpid()	eval.txt	/*getpid()*
 getpos()	eval.txt	/*getpos()*
 getqflist()	eval.txt	/*getqflist()*
+getqflist-examples	quickfix.txt	/*getqflist-examples*
 getreg()	eval.txt	/*getreg()*
 getregtype()	eval.txt	/*getregtype()*
 getscript	pi_getscript.txt	/*getscript*
@@ -6516,6 +6639,7 @@ gettabinfo()	eval.txt	/*gettabinfo()*
 gettabvar()	eval.txt	/*gettabvar()*
 gettabwinvar()	eval.txt	/*gettabwinvar()*
 getwininfo()	eval.txt	/*getwininfo()*
+getwinpos()	eval.txt	/*getwinpos()*
 getwinposx()	eval.txt	/*getwinposx()*
 getwinposy()	eval.txt	/*getwinposy()*
 getwinvar()	eval.txt	/*getwinvar()*
@@ -6571,6 +6695,7 @@ gs	various.txt	/*gs*
 gsp.vim	syntax.txt	/*gsp.vim*
 gstar	pattern.txt	/*gstar*
 gt	tabpage.txt	/*gt*
+gtk-css	gui_x11.txt	/*gtk-css*
 gtk-tooltip-colors	gui_x11.txt	/*gtk-tooltip-colors*
 gu	change.txt	/*gu*
 gugu	change.txt	/*gugu*
@@ -6740,6 +6865,7 @@ hl-PmenuSbar	syntax.txt	/*hl-PmenuSbar*
 hl-PmenuSel	syntax.txt	/*hl-PmenuSel*
 hl-PmenuThumb	syntax.txt	/*hl-PmenuThumb*
 hl-Question	syntax.txt	/*hl-Question*
+hl-QuickFixLine	syntax.txt	/*hl-QuickFixLine*
 hl-Scrollbar	syntax.txt	/*hl-Scrollbar*
 hl-Search	syntax.txt	/*hl-Search*
 hl-SignColumn	syntax.txt	/*hl-SignColumn*
@@ -6750,9 +6876,12 @@ hl-SpellLocal	syntax.txt	/*hl-SpellLocal*
 hl-SpellRare	syntax.txt	/*hl-SpellRare*
 hl-StatusLine	syntax.txt	/*hl-StatusLine*
 hl-StatusLineNC	syntax.txt	/*hl-StatusLineNC*
+hl-StatusLineTerm	syntax.txt	/*hl-StatusLineTerm*
+hl-StatusLineTermNC	syntax.txt	/*hl-StatusLineTermNC*
 hl-TabLine	syntax.txt	/*hl-TabLine*
 hl-TabLineFill	syntax.txt	/*hl-TabLineFill*
 hl-TabLineSel	syntax.txt	/*hl-TabLineSel*
+hl-Terminal	syntax.txt	/*hl-Terminal*
 hl-Title	syntax.txt	/*hl-Title*
 hl-Tooltip	syntax.txt	/*hl-Tooltip*
 hl-User1	syntax.txt	/*hl-User1*
@@ -6763,6 +6892,8 @@ hl-Visual	syntax.txt	/*hl-Visual*
 hl-VisualNOS	syntax.txt	/*hl-VisualNOS*
 hl-WarningMsg	syntax.txt	/*hl-WarningMsg*
 hl-WildMenu	syntax.txt	/*hl-WildMenu*
+hl-debugBreakpoint	terminal.txt	/*hl-debugBreakpoint*
+hl-debugPC	terminal.txt	/*hl-debugPC*
 hlID()	eval.txt	/*hlID()*
 hlexists()	eval.txt	/*hlexists()*
 hlsearch-variable	eval.txt	/*hlsearch-variable*
@@ -7242,6 +7373,7 @@ mapmode-n	map.txt	/*mapmode-n*
 mapmode-nvo	map.txt	/*mapmode-nvo*
 mapmode-o	map.txt	/*mapmode-o*
 mapmode-s	map.txt	/*mapmode-s*
+mapmode-t	map.txt	/*mapmode-t*
 mapmode-v	map.txt	/*mapmode-v*
 mapmode-x	map.txt	/*mapmode-x*
 mapping	map.txt	/*mapping*
@@ -7274,6 +7406,7 @@ mbyte-encoding	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-encoding*
 mbyte-first	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-first*
 mbyte-fonts-MSwin	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-fonts-MSwin*
 mbyte-fonts-X11	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-fonts-X11*
+mbyte-func	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-func*
 mbyte-keymap	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-keymap*
 mbyte-locale	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-locale*
 mbyte-options	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-options*
@@ -7356,6 +7489,7 @@ mzscheme-vim	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-vim*
 mzscheme-vimext	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-vimext*
 mzscheme-window	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-window*
 n	pattern.txt	/*n*
+n1ql.vim	syntax.txt	/*n1ql.vim*
 nasm.vim	syntax.txt	/*nasm.vim*
 navigation	motion.txt	/*navigation*
 nb-commands	netbeans.txt	/*nb-commands*
@@ -7428,7 +7562,11 @@ netrw-browser-var	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browser-var*
 netrw-browsing	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browsing*
 netrw-c	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-c*
 netrw-c-tab	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-c-tab*
+netrw-cB	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-cB*
 netrw-cadaver	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-cadaver*
+netrw-call	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-call*
+netrw-cb	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-cb*
+netrw-cd	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-cd*
 netrw-chgup	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-chgup*
 netrw-clean	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-clean*
 netrw-contents	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-contents*
@@ -7454,6 +7592,7 @@ netrw-enter	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-enter*
 netrw-ex	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ex*
 netrw-explore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-explore*
 netrw-explore-cmds	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-explore-cmds*
+netrw-expose	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-expose*
 netrw-externapp	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-externapp*
 netrw-file	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-file*
 netrw-filigree	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-filigree*
@@ -7503,6 +7642,7 @@ netrw-mh	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-mh*
 netrw-middlemouse	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-middlemouse*
 netrw-ml_get	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ml_get*
 netrw-mm	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-mm*
+netrw-modify	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-modify*
 netrw-mouse	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-mouse*
 netrw-move	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-move*
 netrw-mp	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-mp*
@@ -7699,6 +7839,7 @@ no-type-checking	eval.txt	/*no-type-checking*
 no_buffers_menu	gui.txt	/*no_buffers_menu*
 no_mail_maps	filetype.txt	/*no_mail_maps*
 no_plugin_maps	filetype.txt	/*no_plugin_maps*
+nocombine	syntax.txt	/*nocombine*
 non-greedy	pattern.txt	/*non-greedy*
 non-zero-arg	eval.txt	/*non-zero-arg*
 none-variable	eval.txt	/*none-variable*
@@ -7745,8 +7886,11 @@ option-backslash	options.txt	/*option-backslash*
 option-list	quickref.txt	/*option-list*
 option-summary	options.txt	/*option-summary*
 option-window	options.txt	/*option-window*
+option_restore()	todo.txt	/*option_restore()*
+option_save()	todo.txt	/*option_save()*
 options	options.txt	/*options*
 options-changed	version5.txt	/*options-changed*
+options-in-terminal	terminal.txt	/*options-in-terminal*
 options.txt	options.txt	/*options.txt*
 optwin	options.txt	/*optwin*
 or()	eval.txt	/*or()*
@@ -7975,14 +8119,21 @@ qnx-terminal	os_qnx.txt	/*qnx-terminal*
 quake.vim	syntax.txt	/*quake.vim*
 quickfix	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix*
 quickfix-6	version6.txt	/*quickfix-6*
+quickfix-ID	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-ID*
+quickfix-changedtick	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-changedtick*
+quickfix-context	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-context*
 quickfix-directory-stack	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-directory-stack*
 quickfix-error-lists	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-error-lists*
 quickfix-functions	usr_41.txt	/*quickfix-functions*
 quickfix-gcc	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-gcc*
 quickfix-manx	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-manx*
+quickfix-parse	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-parse*
 quickfix-perl	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-perl*
+quickfix-size	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-size*
+quickfix-title	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-title*
 quickfix-valid	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-valid*
 quickfix-window	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-window*
+quickfix-window-ID	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-window-ID*
 quickfix.txt	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix.txt*
 quickref	quickref.txt	/*quickref*
 quickref.txt	quickref.txt	/*quickref.txt*
@@ -8204,6 +8355,7 @@ servername-variable	eval.txt	/*servername-variable*
 session-file	starting.txt	/*session-file*
 set-option	options.txt	/*set-option*
 set-spc-auto	spell.txt	/*set-spc-auto*
+setbufline()	eval.txt	/*setbufline()*
 setbufvar()	eval.txt	/*setbufvar()*
 setcharsearch()	eval.txt	/*setcharsearch()*
 setcmdpos()	eval.txt	/*setcmdpos()*
@@ -8213,6 +8365,7 @@ setloclist()	eval.txt	/*setloclist()*
 setmatches()	eval.txt	/*setmatches()*
 setpos()	eval.txt	/*setpos()*
 setqflist()	eval.txt	/*setqflist()*
+setqflist-examples	quickfix.txt	/*setqflist-examples*
 setreg()	eval.txt	/*setreg()*
 settabvar()	eval.txt	/*settabvar()*
 settabwinvar()	eval.txt	/*settabwinvar()*
@@ -8410,6 +8563,7 @@ star	pattern.txt	/*star*
 starstar	editing.txt	/*starstar*
 starstar-wildcard	editing.txt	/*starstar-wildcard*
 start-of-file	pattern.txt	/*start-of-file*
+start-vimdiff	diff.txt	/*start-vimdiff*
 starting	starting.txt	/*starting*
 starting-amiga	starting.txt	/*starting-amiga*
 starting.txt	starting.txt	/*starting.txt*
@@ -8430,6 +8584,7 @@ strdisplaywidth()	eval.txt	/*strdisplaywidth()*
 strftime()	eval.txt	/*strftime()*
 strgetchar()	eval.txt	/*strgetchar()*
 stridx()	eval.txt	/*stridx()*
+strikethrough	syntax.txt	/*strikethrough*
 string	eval.txt	/*string*
 string()	eval.txt	/*string()*
 string-functions	usr_41.txt	/*string-functions*
@@ -8516,11 +8671,14 @@ t_AL	term.txt	/*t_AL*
 t_BD	term.txt	/*t_BD*
 t_BE	term.txt	/*t_BE*
 t_CS	term.txt	/*t_CS*
+t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C*
+t_CTRL-\_CTRL-N	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-\\_CTRL-N*
 t_CV	term.txt	/*t_CV*
 t_Ce	term.txt	/*t_Ce*
 t_Co	term.txt	/*t_Co*
 t_Cs	term.txt	/*t_Cs*
 t_DL	term.txt	/*t_DL*
+t_EC	term.txt	/*t_EC*
 t_EI	term.txt	/*t_EI*
 t_F1	term.txt	/*t_F1*
 t_F2	term.txt	/*t_F2*
@@ -8557,12 +8715,20 @@ t_KL	term.txt	/*t_KL*
 t_PE	term.txt	/*t_PE*
 t_PS	term.txt	/*t_PS*
 t_RB	term.txt	/*t_RB*
+t_RC	term.txt	/*t_RC*
+t_RF	term.txt	/*t_RF*
 t_RI	term.txt	/*t_RI*
+t_RS	term.txt	/*t_RS*
 t_RV	term.txt	/*t_RV*
+t_SC	term.txt	/*t_SC*
+t_SH	term.txt	/*t_SH*
 t_SI	term.txt	/*t_SI*
 t_SR	term.txt	/*t_SR*
 t_Sb	term.txt	/*t_Sb*
 t_Sf	term.txt	/*t_Sf*
+t_Te	term.txt	/*t_Te*
+t_Ts	term.txt	/*t_Ts*
+t_VS	term.txt	/*t_VS*
 t_WP	term.txt	/*t_WP*
 t_WS	term.txt	/*t_WS*
 t_ZH	term.txt	/*t_ZH*
@@ -8775,9 +8941,34 @@ temp-file-name	eval.txt	/*temp-file-name*
 tempfile	change.txt	/*tempfile*
 template	autocmd.txt	/*template*
 tempname()	eval.txt	/*tempname()*
+term++close	terminal.txt	/*term++close*
+term++open	terminal.txt	/*term++open*
 term-dependent-settings	term.txt	/*term-dependent-settings*
 term-list	syntax.txt	/*term-list*
 term.txt	term.txt	/*term.txt*
+term_dumpdiff()	eval.txt	/*term_dumpdiff()*
+term_dumpload()	eval.txt	/*term_dumpload()*
+term_dumpwrite()	eval.txt	/*term_dumpwrite()*
+term_getaltscreen()	eval.txt	/*term_getaltscreen()*
+term_getansicolors()	eval.txt	/*term_getansicolors()*
+term_getattr()	eval.txt	/*term_getattr()*
+term_getcursor()	eval.txt	/*term_getcursor()*
+term_getjob()	eval.txt	/*term_getjob()*
+term_getline()	eval.txt	/*term_getline()*
+term_getscrolled()	eval.txt	/*term_getscrolled()*
+term_getsize()	eval.txt	/*term_getsize()*
+term_getstatus()	eval.txt	/*term_getstatus()*
+term_gettitle()	eval.txt	/*term_gettitle()*
+term_gettty()	eval.txt	/*term_gettty()*
+term_list()	eval.txt	/*term_list()*
+term_scrape()	eval.txt	/*term_scrape()*
+term_sendkeys()	eval.txt	/*term_sendkeys()*
+term_setansicolors()	eval.txt	/*term_setansicolors()*
+term_setkill()	eval.txt	/*term_setkill()*
+term_setrestore()	eval.txt	/*term_setrestore()*
+term_setsize()	eval.txt	/*term_setsize()*
+term_start()	eval.txt	/*term_start()*
+term_wait()	eval.txt	/*term_wait()*
 termcap	term.txt	/*termcap*
 termcap-changed	version4.txt	/*termcap-changed*
 termcap-colors	term.txt	/*termcap-colors*
@@ -8785,16 +8976,48 @@ termcap-cursor-color	term.txt	/*termcap-cursor-color*
 termcap-cursor-shape	term.txt	/*termcap-cursor-shape*
 termcap-options	term.txt	/*termcap-options*
 termcap-title	term.txt	/*termcap-title*
+termdebug-commands	terminal.txt	/*termdebug-commands*
+termdebug-communication	terminal.txt	/*termdebug-communication*
+termdebug-customizing	terminal.txt	/*termdebug-customizing*
+termdebug-example	terminal.txt	/*termdebug-example*
+termdebug-starting	terminal.txt	/*termdebug-starting*
+termdebug-stepping	terminal.txt	/*termdebug-stepping*
+termdebug-variables	terminal.txt	/*termdebug-variables*
+termdebug_popup	terminal.txt	/*termdebug_popup*
+termdebug_wide	terminal.txt	/*termdebug_wide*
+terminal	terminal.txt	/*terminal*
+terminal-api	terminal.txt	/*terminal-api*
+terminal-client-server	terminal.txt	/*terminal-client-server*
 terminal-colors	os_unix.txt	/*terminal-colors*
+terminal-communication	terminal.txt	/*terminal-communication*
+terminal-cursor-style	terminal.txt	/*terminal-cursor-style*
+terminal-debug	terminal.txt	/*terminal-debug*
+terminal-diff	terminal.txt	/*terminal-diff*
+terminal-diffscreendump	terminal.txt	/*terminal-diffscreendump*
+terminal-dumptest	terminal.txt	/*terminal-dumptest*
+terminal-functions	usr_41.txt	/*terminal-functions*
 terminal-info	term.txt	/*terminal-info*
 terminal-key-codes	term.txt	/*terminal-key-codes*
+terminal-ms-windows	terminal.txt	/*terminal-ms-windows*
 terminal-options	term.txt	/*terminal-options*
 terminal-output-codes	term.txt	/*terminal-output-codes*
+terminal-resizing	terminal.txt	/*terminal-resizing*
+terminal-screendump	terminal.txt	/*terminal-screendump*
+terminal-session	terminal.txt	/*terminal-session*
+terminal-size-color	terminal.txt	/*terminal-size-color*
+terminal-special-keys	terminal.txt	/*terminal-special-keys*
+terminal-testing	terminal.txt	/*terminal-testing*
+terminal-to-job	terminal.txt	/*terminal-to-job*
+terminal-typing	terminal.txt	/*terminal-typing*
+terminal-unix	terminal.txt	/*terminal-unix*
+terminal-use	terminal.txt	/*terminal-use*
+terminal.txt	terminal.txt	/*terminal.txt*
 terminfo	term.txt	/*terminfo*
 termresponse-variable	eval.txt	/*termresponse-variable*
 test-functions	usr_41.txt	/*test-functions*
 test_alloc_fail()	eval.txt	/*test_alloc_fail()*
 test_autochdir()	eval.txt	/*test_autochdir()*
+test_feedinput()	eval.txt	/*test_feedinput()*
 test_garbagecollect_now()	eval.txt	/*test_garbagecollect_now()*
 test_ignore_error()	eval.txt	/*test_ignore_error()*
 test_null_channel()	eval.txt	/*test_null_channel()*
@@ -8856,6 +9079,7 @@ tolower()	eval.txt	/*tolower()*
 toolbar-icon	gui.txt	/*toolbar-icon*
 toupper()	eval.txt	/*toupper()*
 tr()	eval.txt	/*tr()*
+trim()	eval.txt	/*trim()*
 trojan-horse	starting.txt	/*trojan-horse*
 true-variable	eval.txt	/*true-variable*
 trunc()	eval.txt	/*trunc()*
@@ -8968,6 +9192,7 @@ v:ctype	eval.txt	/*v:ctype*
 v:dying	eval.txt	/*v:dying*
 v:errmsg	eval.txt	/*v:errmsg*
 v:errors	eval.txt	/*v:errors*
+v:event	eval.txt	/*v:event*
 v:exception	eval.txt	/*v:exception*
 v:false	eval.txt	/*v:false*
 v:fcs_choice	eval.txt	/*v:fcs_choice*
@@ -9021,7 +9246,12 @@ v:t_list	eval.txt	/*v:t_list*
 v:t_none	eval.txt	/*v:t_none*
 v:t_number	eval.txt	/*v:t_number*
 v:t_string	eval.txt	/*v:t_string*
+v:termblinkresp	eval.txt	/*v:termblinkresp*
+v:termrbgresp	eval.txt	/*v:termrbgresp*
 v:termresponse	eval.txt	/*v:termresponse*
+v:termrfgresp	eval.txt	/*v:termrfgresp*
+v:termstyleresp	eval.txt	/*v:termstyleresp*
+v:termu7resp	eval.txt	/*v:termu7resp*
 v:testing	eval.txt	/*v:testing*
 v:this_session	eval.txt	/*v:this_session*
 v:throwpoint	eval.txt	/*v:throwpoint*
@@ -9304,6 +9534,8 @@ wildmenumode()	eval.txt	/*wildmenumode()*
 win32	os_win32.txt	/*win32*
 win32-!start	gui_w32.txt	/*win32-!start*
 win32-PATH	os_win32.txt	/*win32-PATH*
+win32-backslashes	os_win32.txt	/*win32-backslashes*
+win32-cmdargs	os_win32.txt	/*win32-cmdargs*
 win32-colors	gui_w32.txt	/*win32-colors*
 win32-compiling	os_win32.txt	/*win32-compiling*
 win32-curdir	os_win32.txt	/*win32-curdir*
@@ -9328,6 +9560,7 @@ win_getid()	eval.txt	/*win_getid()*
 win_gotoid()	eval.txt	/*win_gotoid()*
 win_id2tabwin()	eval.txt	/*win_id2tabwin()*
 win_id2win()	eval.txt	/*win_id2win()*
+win_screenpos()	eval.txt	/*win_screenpos()*
 winbufnr()	eval.txt	/*winbufnr()*
 wincol()	eval.txt	/*wincol()*
 window	windows.txt	/*window*
@@ -9341,6 +9574,7 @@ window-resize	windows.txt	/*window-resize*
 window-size	term.txt	/*window-size*
 window-size-functions	usr_41.txt	/*window-size-functions*
 window-tag	windows.txt	/*window-tag*
+window-toolbar	gui.txt	/*window-toolbar*
 window-variable	eval.txt	/*window-variable*
 windowid	windows.txt	/*windowid*
 windowid-variable	eval.txt	/*windowid-variable*
@@ -9506,6 +9740,7 @@ zz	scroll.txt	/*zz*
 {Visual}	intro.txt	/*{Visual}*
 {address}	cmdline.txt	/*{address}*
 {arglist}	editing.txt	/*{arglist}*
+{bufname}	windows.txt	/*{bufname}*
 {char1-char2}	intro.txt	/*{char1-char2}*
 {event}	autocmd.txt	/*{event}*
 {file}	editing.txt	/*{file}*

runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Sep 20
+*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -36,12 +36,12 @@ An easy way back is with the CTRL-T command.  Also read about the tag stack
 below.
 
 						*:ta* *:tag* *E426* *E429*
-:[count]ta[g][!] {ident}
+:[count]ta[g][!] {name}
-			Jump to the definition of {ident}, using the
+			Jump to the definition of {name}, using the
-			information in the tags file(s).  Put {ident} in the
+			information in the tags file(s).  Put {name} in the
 			tag stack.  See |tag-!| for [!].
-			{ident} can be a regexp pattern, see |tag-regexp|.
+			{name} can be a regexp pattern, see |tag-regexp|.
-			When there are several matching tags for {ident}, jump
+			When there are several matching tags for {name}, jump
 			to the [count] one.  When [count] is omitted the
 			first one is jumped to. See |tag-matchlist| for
 			jumping to other matching tags.
@@ -49,16 +49,16 @@ below.
 g<LeftMouse>						*g<LeftMouse>*
 <C-LeftMouse>					*<C-LeftMouse>* *CTRL-]*
 CTRL-]			Jump to the definition of the keyword under the
-			cursor.  Same as ":tag {ident}", where {ident} is the
+			cursor.  Same as ":tag {name}", where {name} is the
 			keyword under or after cursor.
-			When there are several matching tags for {ident}, jump
+			When there are several matching tags for {name}, jump
 			to the [count] one.  When no [count] is given the
 			first one is jumped to. See |tag-matchlist| for
 			jumping to other matching tags.
 			{Vi: identifier after the cursor}
 
 							*v_CTRL-]*
-{Visual}CTRL-]		Same as ":tag {ident}", where {ident} is the text that
+{Visual}CTRL-]		Same as ":tag {name}", where {name} is the text that
 			is highlighted.  {not in Vi}
 
 							*telnet-CTRL-]*
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ When there are multiple matches for a tag, this priority is used:
 
 Note that when the current file changes, the priority list is mostly not
 changed, to avoid confusion when using ":tnext".  It is changed when using
-":tag {ident}".
+":tag {name}".
 
 The ignore-case matches are not found for a ":tag" command when:
 - the 'ignorecase' option is off and 'tagcase' is "followic"
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ You can get from main to FuncA by using CTRL-] on the call to FuncA.  Then
 you can CTRL-] to get to FuncC.  If you now want to go back to main you can
 use CTRL-T twice.  Then you can CTRL-] to FuncB.
 
-If you issue a ":ta {ident}" or CTRL-] command, this tag is inserted at the
+If you issue a ":ta {name}" or CTRL-] command, this tag is inserted at the
 current position in the stack.  If the stack was full (it can hold up to 20
 entries), the oldest entry is deleted and the older entries shift one
 position up (their index number is decremented by one).  If the last used
@@ -191,13 +191,14 @@ between them.  Note that these commands don't change the tag stack, they keep
 the same entry.
 
 							*:ts* *:tselect*
-:ts[elect][!] [ident]	List the tags that match [ident], using the
+:ts[elect][!] [name]	List the tags that match [name], using the
 			information in the tags file(s).
-			When [ident] is not given, the last tag name from the
+			When [name] is not given, the last tag name from the
 			tag stack is used.
+			See |tag-!| for [!].
 			With a '>' in the first column is indicated which is
 			the current position in the list (if there is one).
-			[ident] can be a regexp pattern, see |tag-regexp|.
+			[name] can be a regexp pattern, see |tag-regexp|.
 			See |tag-priority| for the priorities used in the
 			listing.  {not in Vi}
 			Example output:
@@ -225,7 +226,7 @@ the same entry.
 			type 'q' and enter the number.
 
 							*:sts* *:stselect*
-:sts[elect][!] [ident]	Does ":tselect[!] [ident]" and splits the window for
+:sts[elect][!] [name]	Does ":tselect[!] [name]" and splits the window for
 			the selected tag.  {not in Vi}
 
 							*g]*
@@ -237,11 +238,11 @@ g]			Like CTRL-], but use ":tselect" instead of ":tag".
 			identifier.  {not in Vi}
 
 							*:tj* *:tjump*
-:tj[ump][!] [ident]	Like ":tselect", but jump to the tag directly when
+:tj[ump][!] [name]	Like ":tselect", but jump to the tag directly when
 			there is only one match.  {not in Vi}
 
 							*:stj* *:stjump*
-:stj[ump][!] [ident]	Does ":tjump[!] [ident]" and splits the window for the
+:stj[ump][!] [name]	Does ":tjump[!] [name]" and splits the window for the
 			selected tag.  {not in Vi}
 
 							*g_CTRL-]*
@@ -276,9 +277,9 @@ g CTRL-]		Like CTRL-], but use ":tjump" instead of ":tag".
 			in Vi}
 
 							*:lt* *:ltag*
-:lt[ag][!] [ident]	Jump to tag [ident] and add the matching tags to a new
+:lt[ag][!] [name]	Jump to tag [name] and add the matching tags to a new
-			location list for the current window.  [ident] can be
+			location list for the current window.  [name] can be
-			a regexp pattern, see |tag-regexp|.  When [ident] is
+			a regexp pattern, see |tag-regexp|.  When [name] is
 			not given, the last tag name from the tag stack is
 			used.  The search pattern to locate the tag line is
 			prefixed with "\V" to escape all the special
@@ -310,12 +311,12 @@ the same as above, with a "p" prepended.
 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| feature}
 
 							*:pts* *:ptselect*
-:pts[elect][!] [ident]	Does ":tselect[!] [ident]" and shows the new tag in a
+:pts[elect][!] [name]	Does ":tselect[!] [name]" and shows the new tag in a
 			"Preview" window.  See |:ptag| for more info.
 			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ptj* *:ptjump*
-:ptj[ump][!] [ident]	Does ":tjump[!] [ident]" and shows the new tag in a
+:ptj[ump][!] [name]	Does ":tjump[!] [name]" and shows the new tag in a
 			"Preview" window.  See |:ptag| for more info.
 			{not in Vi}
 

runtime/doc/term.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*term.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 11
+*term.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Oct 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -295,13 +295,11 @@ OUTPUT CODES						*terminal-output-codes*
 	t_ts	set window title start (to status line)		*t_ts* *'t_ts'*
 	t_ue	underline end					*t_ue* *'t_ue'*
 	t_us	underline mode					*t_us* *'t_us'*
-	t_Ce	undercurl end					*t_Ce* *'t_Ce'*
-	t_Cs	undercurl mode					*t_Cs* *'t_Cs'*
 	t_ut	clearing uses the current background color	*t_ut* *'t_ut'*
 	t_vb	visual bell					*t_vb* *'t_vb'*
 	t_ve	cursor visible					*t_ve* *'t_ve'*
 	t_vi	cursor invisible				*t_vi* *'t_vi'*
-	t_vs	cursor very visible				*t_vs* *'t_vs'*
+	t_vs	cursor very visible (blink)			*t_vs* *'t_vs'*
 								*t_xs* *'t_xs'*
 	t_xs	if non-empty, standout not erased by overwriting (hpterm)
 								*t_xn* *'t_xn'*
@@ -311,11 +309,16 @@ OUTPUT CODES						*terminal-output-codes*
 	t_ZR	italics end					*t_ZR* *'t_ZR'*
 
 Added by Vim (there are no standard codes for these):
+	t_Ce	undercurl end					*t_Ce* *'t_Ce'*
+	t_Cs	undercurl mode					*t_Cs* *'t_Cs'*
+	t_Te	strikethrough end				*t_Te* *'t_Te'*
+	t_Ts	strikethrough mode				*t_Ts* *'t_Ts'*
 	t_IS	set icon text start				*t_IS* *'t_IS'*
 	t_IE	set icon text end				*t_IE* *'t_IE'*
 	t_WP	set window position (Y, X) in pixels		*t_WP* *'t_WP'*
 	t_GP	get window position (Y, X) in pixels		*t_GP* *'t_GP'*
-	t_WS	set window size (height, width) in characters	*t_WS* *'t_WS'*
+	t_WS	set window size (height, width in cells)	*t_WS* *'t_WS'*
+	t_VS	cursor normally visible (no blink)		*t_VS* *'t_VS'*
 	t_SI	start insert mode (bar cursor shape)		*t_SI* *'t_SI'*
 	t_SR	start replace mode (underline cursor shape)	*t_SR* *'t_SR'*
 	t_EI	end insert or replace mode (block cursor shape)	*t_EI* *'t_EI'*
@@ -324,6 +327,7 @@ Added by Vim (there are no standard codes for these):
 		|xterm-8bit| |v:termresponse| |'ttymouse'| |xterm-codes|
 	t_u7	request cursor position (for xterm)		*t_u7* *'t_u7'*
 		see |'ambiwidth'|
+	t_RF	request terminal foreground color		*t_RF* *'t_RF'*
 	t_RB	request terminal background color		*t_RB* *'t_RB'*
 	t_8f	set foreground color (R, G, B)			*t_8f* *'t_8f'*
 		|xterm-true-color|
@@ -333,6 +337,29 @@ Added by Vim (there are no standard codes for these):
 		|xterm-bracketed-paste|
 	t_BD	disable bracketed paste mode			*t_BD* *'t_BD'*
 		|xterm-bracketed-paste|
+	t_SC	set cursor color start				*t_SC* *'t_SC'*
+	t_EC	set cursor color end				*t_EC* *'t_EC'*
+	t_SH	set cursor shape				*t_SH* *'t_SH'*
+	t_RC	request terminal cursor blinking		*t_RC* *'t_RC'*
+	t_RS	request terminal cursor style			*t_RS* *'t_RS'*
+
+Some codes have a start, middle and end part.  The start and end are defined
+by the termcap option, the middle part is text.
+	set title text:     t_ts {title text} t_fs
+	set icon text:      t_IS {icon text} t_IE
+	set cursor color:   t_SC  {color name}  t_EC
+
+t_SH must take one argument:
+	0, 1 or none  	blinking block cursor
+	2	      	block cursor
+	3		blinking underline cursor
+	4		underline cursor
+	5		blinking vertical bar cursor
+	6		vertical bar cursor
+
+t_RS is sent only if the response to t_RV has been received.  It is not used
+on Mac OS when Terminal.app could be recognized from the termresponse.
+
 
 KEY CODES						*terminal-key-codes*
 Note: Use the <> form if possible

runtime/doc/terminal.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*terminal.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 04
+*terminal.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 May 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -7,14 +7,43 @@
 Terminal window support					*terminal*
 
 
-WARNING: THIS IS ONLY PARTLY IMPLEMENTED, ANYTHING CAN STILL CHANGE
+The terminal feature is optional, use this to check if your Vim has it: >
+	echo has('terminal')
+If the result is "1" you have it.
 
 
 1. Basic use			|terminal-use|
-2. Remote testing		|terminal-testing|
+      Typing				|terminal-typing|
-3. Debugging			|terminal-debug|
+      Size and color			|terminal-size-color|
+      Syntax				|:terminal|
+      Resizing				|terminal-resizing|
+      Terminal Modes			|Terminal-mode|
+      Cursor style			|terminal-cursor-style|
+      Special keys			|terminal-special-keys|
+      Session				|terminal-session|
+      Unix				|terminal-unix|
+      MS-Windows			|terminal-ms-windows|
+2. Terminal communication	|terminal-communication|
+      Vim to job: term_sendkeys()	|terminal-to-job|
+      Job to Vim: JSON API		|terminal-api|
+      Using the client-server feature	|terminal-client-server|
+3. Remote testing		|terminal-testing|
+4. Diffing screen dumps		|terminal-diff|
+      Writing a screen dump test for Vim  |terminal-dumptest|
+      Creating a screen dump		  |terminal-screendump|
+      Comparing screen dumps		  |terminal-diffscreendump|
+5. Debugging			|terminal-debug|
+      Starting				|termdebug-starting|
+      Example session			|termdebug-example|
+      Stepping through code		|termdebug-stepping|
+      Inspecting variables		|termdebug-variables|
+      Other commands			|termdebug-commands|
+      Communication			|termdebug-communication|
+      Customizing			|termdebug-customizing|
 
 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
+{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+The terminal feature requires the |+multi_byte|, |+job| and |+channel| features.
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Basic use						*terminal-use*
@@ -23,72 +52,463 @@ This feature is for running a terminal emulator in a Vim window.  A job can be
 started connected to the terminal emulator. For example, to run a shell: >
      :term bash
 
-Or to run a debugger: >
+Or to run build command: >
-     :term gdb vim
+     :term make myprogram
 
 The job runs asynchronously from Vim, the window will be updated to show
-output from the job, also  while editing in any other window.
+output from the job, also while editing in another window.
 
-When the keyboard focus is in the terminal window, typed keys will be send to
-the job.  This uses a pty when possible.
 
-Navigate between windows with CTRL-W commands (and mouse).
+Typing ~
-E.g. CTRL-W CTRL-W moves focus to the next window.
+							*terminal-typing*
+When the keyboard focus is in the terminal window, typed keys will be sent to
+the job.  This uses a pty when possible.  You can click outside of the
+terminal window to move keyboard focus elsewhere.
 
-Option 'termkey'
+CTRL-W can be used to navigate between windows and other CTRL-W commands, e.g.:
-Specify key for Vim command in terminal window.  local to window.
+	CTRL-W CTRL-W	move focus to the next window
-Default is CTRL-W.
+	CTRL-W :	enter an Ex command
+See |CTRL-W| for more commands.
+
+Special in the terminal window:			*CTRL-W_.*  *CTRL-W_N* 
+	CTRL-W .	send a CTRL-W to the job in the terminal
+	CTRL-W CTRL-\	send a CTRL-\ to the job in the terminal
+	CTRL-W N	go to Terminal-Normal mode, see |Terminal-mode|
+	CTRL-\ CTRL-N   go to Terminal-Normal mode, see |Terminal-mode|
+	CTRL-W " {reg}  paste register {reg}		*CTRL-W_quote*
+			Also works with the = register to insert the result of
+			evaluating an expression.
+	CTRL-W CTRL-C	ends the job, see below |t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C|
+
+See option 'termwinkey' for specifying another key instead of CTRL-W that
+will work like CTRL-W.  However, typing 'termwinkey' twice sends 'termwinkey'
+to the job.  For example:
+	'termwinkey' CTRL-W    move focus to the next window
+	'termwinkey' :	       enter an Ex command
+	'termwinkey' 'termwinkey' send 'termwinkey' to the job in the terminal
+	'termwinkey' .	       send a CTRL-W to the job in the terminal
+	'termwinkey' N	       go to terminal Normal mode, see below
+	'termwinkey' CTRL-N    same as CTRL-W N
+	'termwinkey' CTRL-C    same as |t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C|
+							*t_CTRL-\_CTRL-N*
+The special key combination CTRL-\ CTRL-N can be used to switch to Normal
+mode, just like this works in any other mode.
+							*t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C*
+CTRL-W CTRL-C can be typed to forcefully end the job.  On MS-Windows a
+CTRL-BREAK will also kill the job.
+
+If you type CTRL-C the effect depends on what the pty has been configured to
+do.  For simple commands this causes a SIGINT to be sent to the job, which
+would end it.  Other commands may ignore the SIGINT or handle the CTRL-C
+themselves (like Vim does).
+
+To change the keys you type use terminal mode mappings, see |:tmap|.
+These are defined like any mapping, but apply only when typing keys that are
+sent to the job running in the terminal.  For example, to make F1 switch
+to Terminal-Normal mode: >
+   tnoremap <F1> <C-W>N
+You can use Esc, but you need to make sure it won't cause other keys to
+break: >
+   tnoremap <Esc> <C-W>N
+   set notimeout ttimeout timeoutlen=100
+
+<							*options-in-terminal*
+After opening the terminal window and setting 'buftype' to "terminal" the
+BufWinEnter autocommand event is triggered.  This makes it possible to set
+options specifically for the window and buffer.  Example: >
+   au BufWinEnter * if &buftype == 'terminal' | setlocal bufhidden=hide | endif
+
+Mouse events (click and drag) are passed to the terminal.  Mouse move events
+are only passed when Vim itself is receiving them.  For a terminal that is
+when 'balloonevalterm' is enabled.
+
+
+Size and color ~
+							*terminal-size-color*
+See option 'termwinsize' for controlling the size of the terminal window.
+(TODO: scrolling when the terminal is larger than the window)
+
+The job running in the terminal can change the colors.  The default foreground
+and background colors are taken from Vim, the Normal highlight group.
+
+For a color terminal the 'background' option is used to decide whether the
+terminal window will start with a white or black background.
+
+To use a different color the Terminal highlight group can be used, for
+example: >
+    hi Terminal ctermbg=lightgrey ctermfg=blue guibg=lightgrey guifg=blue
+<
+							*g:terminal_ansi_colors*
+In GUI mode or with 'termguicolors', the 16 ANSI colors used by default in new
+terminal windows may be configured using the variable
+`g:terminal_ansi_colors`, which should be a list of 16 color names or
+hexadecimal color codes, similar to those accepted by |highlight-guifg|.  When
+not using GUI colors, the terminal window always uses the 16 ANSI colors of
+the underlying terminal.
+The |term_setansicolors()| function can be used to change the colors, and
+|term_getansicolors()| to get the currently used colors.
 
-Option 'termsize'
-Specify terminal size. Local to window.
-When empty the terminal gets the size from the window.
-When set (e.g., "24x80") the terminal size is fixed.  If the window is smaller
-only the top-left part is displayed.  (TODO: scrolling?)
 
 Syntax ~
-						*:ter* *:terminal*
+
-:terminal[!] [command]	Open a new terminal window.
+:[range]ter[minal] [options] [command]			*:ter* *:terminal*
+			Open a new terminal window.
 
 			If [command] is provided run it as a job and connect
 			the input and output to the terminal.
 			If [command] is not given the 'shell' option is used.
+			if [command] is NONE no job is started, the pty of the
+			terminal can be used by a command like gdb.
+
+			If [command] is missing the default behavior is to
+			close the terminal when the shell exits.  This can be
+			changed with the ++noclose argument.
+			If [command] is present the default behavior is to
+			keep the terminal open in Terminal-Normal mode.  This
+			can be changed with the ++close argument.
 
 			A new buffer will be created, using [command] or
-			'shell' as the name.  If a buffer by this name already
+			'shell' as the name, prefixed with a "!".  If a buffer
-			exists a number is added in parenthesis.
+			by this name already exists a number is added in
-			E.g. if "gdb" exists the second terminal buffer will
+			parentheses.  E.g. if "gdb" exists the second terminal
-			use "gdb (1)".
+			buffer will use "!gdb (1)".
+
+			If [range] is given the specified lines are used as
+			input for the job.  It will not be possible to type
+			keys in the terminal window.  For MS-Windows see the
+			++eof argument below.
+
+						*term++close* *term++open*
+			Supported [options] are:
+			++close		The terminal window will close
+					automatically when the job terminates.
+			++noclose	The terminal window will NOT close
+					automatically when the job terminates.
+			++open		When the job terminates and no window
+					shows it, a window will be opened.
+					Note that this can be interruptive.
+				The last of ++close, ++noclose and ++open
+				matters and rules out earlier arguments.
+
+			++curwin	Open the terminal in the current
+					window, do not split the current
+					window.  Fails if the current buffer
+					cannot be |abandon|ed.
+			++hidden	Open the terminal in a hidden buffer,
+					no window will be used.
+			++norestore	Do not include this terminal window
+					in a session file.
+			++kill={how}	When trying to close the terminal
+					window kill the job with {how}.  See
+					|term_setkill()| for the values.
+			++rows={height} Use {height} for the terminal window
+					height.  If the terminal uses the full
+					Vim height (no window above or below
+					th terminal window) the command line
+					height will be reduced as needed.
+			++cols={width}  Use {width} for the terminal window
+					width. If the terminal uses the full
+					Vim width (no window left or right of
+					the terminal window) this value is
+					ignored.
+			++eof={text}	when using [range]: text to send after
+					the last line was written. Cannot
+					contain white space.  A CR is
+					appended.  For MS-Windows the default
+					is to send CTRL-D.
+					E.g. for a shell use "++eof=exit" and
+					for Python "++eof=exit()".  Special
+					codes can be used like with `:map`,
+					e.g. "<C-Z>" for CTRL-Z.
+
+			If you want to use more options use the |term_start()|
+			function.
+
+When the buffer associated with the terminal is forcibly unloaded or wiped out
+the job is killed, similar to calling `job_stop(job, "kill")` .
+Closing the window normally results in |E947|.  When a kill method was set
+with "++kill={how}" or |term_setkill()| then closing the window will use that
+way to kill or interrupt the job.  For example: >
+	:term ++kill=term tail -f /tmp/log
+
+So long as the job is running the window behaves like it contains a modified
+buffer.  Trying to close the window with `CTRL-W :quit` fails.  When using
+`CTRL-W :quit!` the job is ended.  The text in the window is lost.  The buffer
+still exists, but getting it in a window with `:buffer` will show an empty
+buffer.
+
+Trying to close the window with `CTRL-W :close` also fails.   Using
+`CTRL-W :close!` will close the window and make the buffer hidden.
+
+You can use `CTRL-W :hide` to close the terminal window and make the buffer
+hidden, the job keeps running.  The `:buffer` command can be used to turn the
+current window into a terminal window.  If there are unsaved changes this
+fails, use !  to force, as usual.
+
+To have a background job run without a window, and open the window when it's
+done, use options like this: >
+	:term ++hidden ++open make
+Note that the window will open at an unexpected moment, this will interrupt
+what you are doing.
+
+							*E947* *E948*
+So long as the job is running, the buffer is considered modified and Vim
+cannot be quit easily, see |abandon|.
+
+When the job has finished and no changes were made to the buffer: closing the
+window will wipe out the buffer.
+
+Before changes can be made to a terminal buffer, the 'modifiable' option must
+be set.  This is only possible when the job has finished.  At the first change
+the buffer will become a normal buffer and the highlighting is removed.
+You may want to change the buffer name with |:file| to be able to write, since
+the buffer name will still be set to the command.
 
-			The window can be closed, in which case the buffer
-			becomes hidden.  The command will not be stopped.  The
-			`:buffer` command can be used to turn the current
-			window into a terminal window, using the existing
-			buffer.  If there are unsaved changes this fails, use
-			! to force, as usual.
 
 Resizing ~
-
+							*terminal-resizing*
 The size of the terminal can be in one of three modes:
 
-1. The 'termsize' option is empty: The terminal size follows the window size.
+1. The 'termwinsize' option is empty: The terminal size follows the window
-   The minimal size is 2 screen lines with 10 cells.
+   size.  The minimal size is 2 screen lines with 10 cells.
 
-2. The 'termsize' option is "rows*cols", where "rows" is the minimal number of
+2. The 'termwinsize' option is "rows*cols", where "rows" is the minimal number
-   screen rows and "cols" is the minial number of cells.
+   of screen rows and "cols" is the minimal number of cells.
 
-3. The 'termsize' option is "rowsXcols" (where the x is upper or lower case).
+3. The 'termwinsize' option is "rowsXcols" (where the x is upper or lower
-   The terminal size is fixed to the specified number of screen lines and
+   case).  The terminal size is fixed to the specified number of screen lines
-   cells.  If the window is bigger there will be unused empty space.
+   and cells.  If the window is bigger there will be unused empty space.
 
 If the window is smaller than the terminal size, only part of the terminal can
 be seen (the lower-left part).
 
 The |term_getsize()| function can be used to get the current size of the
 terminal.  |term_setsize()| can be used only when in the first or second mode,
-not when 'termsize' is "rowsXcols".
+not when 'termwinsize' is "rowsXcols".
+
+
+Terminal-Job and Terminal-Normal mode ~
+						*Terminal-mode* *Terminal-Job*
+When the job is running the contents of the terminal is under control of the
+job.  That includes the cursor position.  Typed keys are sent to the job.
+The terminal contents can change at any time.  This is called Terminal-Job
+mode.
+
+Use CTRL-W N (or 'termwinkey' N) to switch to Terminal-Normal mode.  Now the
+contents of the terminal window is under control of Vim, the job output is
+suspended.  CTRL-\ CTRL-N does the same.
+
+Terminal-Job mode is where |:tmap| mappings are applied. Keys sent by
+|term_sendkeys()| are not subject to tmap, but keys from |feedkeys()| are.
+
+It is not possible to enter Insert mode from Terminal-Job mode.
+
+						*Terminal-Normal* *E946*
+In Terminal-Normal mode you can move the cursor around with the usual Vim
+commands, Visually mark text, yank text, etc.  But you cannot change the
+contents of the buffer.  The commands that would start insert mode, such as
+'i' and 'a', return to Terminal-Job mode.  The window will be updated to show
+the contents of the terminal. |:startinsert| is ineffective.
+
+In Terminal-Normal mode the statusline and window title show "(Terminal)".  If
+the job ends while in Terminal-Normal mode this changes to
+"(Terminal-finished)".
+
+When the job outputs lines in the terminal, such that the contents scrolls off
+the top, those lines are remembered and can be seen in Terminal-Normal mode.
+The number of lines is limited by the 'termwinscroll' option. When going over
+this limit, the first 10% of the scrolled lins are deleted and are lost.
+
+
+Cursor style ~
+							*terminal-cursor-style*
+By default the cursor in the terminal window uses a not blinking block.  The
+normal xterm escape sequences can be used to change the blinking state and the
+shape.  Once focus leaves the terminal window Vim will restore the original
+cursor.
+
+An exception is when xterm is started with the "-bc" argument, or another way
+that causes the cursor to blink.  This actually means that the blinking flag
+is inverted.  Since Vim cannot detect this, the terminal window cursor
+blinking will also be inverted.
+
+
+Session ~
+							*terminal-session*
+A terminal window will be restored when using a session file, if possible and
+wanted.
+
+If "terminal" was removed from 'sessionoptions' then no terminal windows will
+be restored.
+
+If the job in the terminal was finished the window will not be restored.
+
+If the terminal can be restored, the command that was used to open it will be
+used again.  To change this use the |term_setrestore()| function.  This can
+also be used to not restore a specific terminal by setting the command to
+"NONE".
+
+
+Special keys ~
+							*terminal-special-keys*
+Since the terminal emulator simulates an xterm, only escape sequences that
+both Vim and xterm recognize will be available in the terminal window.  If you
+want to pass on other escape sequences to the job running in the terminal you
+need to set up forwarding.  Example: >
+	tmap <expr> <Esc>]b SendToTerm("\<Esc>]b")
+	func SendToTerm(what)
+	  call term_sendkeys('', a:what)
+	  return ''
+	endfunc
+
+
+Unix ~
+							*terminal-unix*
+On Unix a pty is used to make it possible to run all kinds of commands.  You
+can even run Vim in the terminal!  That's used for debugging, see below.
+
+Environment variables are used to pass information to the running job:
+    TERM		the name of the terminal, from the 'term' option or
+			$TERM in the GUI; falls back to "xterm" if it does not
+			start with "xterm"
+    ROWS		number of rows in the terminal initially
+    LINES		same as ROWS
+    COLUMNS		number of columns in the terminal initially
+    COLORS		number of colors, 't_Co' (256*256*256 in the GUI)
+    VIM_SERVERNAME	v:servername
+
+
+MS-Windows ~
+							*terminal-ms-windows*
+On MS-Windows winpty is used to make it possible to run all kind of commands.
+Obviously, they must be commands that run in a terminal, not open their own
+window.
+
+You need the following two files from winpty:
+
+    winpty.dll
+    winpty-agent.exe
+
+You can download them from the following page:
+
+    https://github.com/rprichard/winpty
+
+Just put the files somewhere in your PATH.  You can set the 'winptydll' option
+to point to the right file, if needed.  If you have both the 32-bit and 64-bit
+version, rename to winpty32.dll and winpty64.dll to match the way Vim was
+build.
+
+Environment variables are used to pass information to the running job:
+    VIM_SERVERNAME	v:servername
 
 ==============================================================================
-2. Remote testing					*terminal-testing*
+2. Terminal communication			 *terminal-communication*
+
+There are several ways to communicate with the job running in a terminal:
+- Use |term_sendkeys()| to send text and escape sequences from Vim to the job.
+- Use the JSON API to send encoded commands from the job to Vim.
+- Use the |client-server| mechanism. This works on machines with an X server
+  and on MS-Windows.
+
+
+Vim to job: term_sendkeys() ~
+							*terminal-to-job*
+This allows for remote controlling the job running in the terminal.  It is a
+one-way mechanism.  The job can update the display to signal back to Vim.
+For example, if a shell is running in a terminal, you can do: >
+	call term_sendkeys(buf, "ls *.java\<CR>")
+
+This requires for the job to be in the right state where it will do the right
+thing when receiving the keys.  For the above example, the shell must be
+waiting for a command to be typed.
+
+For a job that was written for the purpose, you can use the JSON API escape
+sequence in the other direction.  E.g.: >
+	call term_sendkeys(buf, "\<Esc>]51;["response"]\x07")
+
+
+Job to Vim: JSON API ~
+							*terminal-api*
+The job can send JSON to Vim, using a special escape sequence.  The JSON
+encodes a command that Vim understands.  Example of such a message: >
+	<Esc>]51;["drop", "README.md"]<07>
+
+The body is always a list, making it easy to find the end: ]<07>.
+The <Esc>]51;msg<07> sequence is reserved by xterm for "Emacs shell", which is
+similar to what we are doing here.
+
+Currently supported commands:
+
+	call {funcname} {argument}
+
+		Call a user defined function with {argument}.
+		The function is called with two arguments: the buffer number
+		of the terminal and {argument}, the decoded JSON argument. 
+		The function name must start with "Tapi_" to avoid
+		accidentally calling a function not meant to be used for the
+		terminal API
+		The user function should sanity check the argument.
+		The function can use |term_sendkeys()| to send back a reply.
+		Example in JSON: >
+			["call", "Tapi_Impression", ["play", 14]]
+<		Calls a function defined like this: >
+			function Tapi_Impression(bufnum, arglist)
+			  if len(a:arglist) == 2
+			    echomsg "impression " . a:arglist[0]
+			    echomsg "count " . a:arglist[1]
+			  endif
+			endfunc
+<		Output from `:echo` may be erased by a redraw, use `:echomsg`
+		to be able to see it with `:messages`.
+
+	drop {filename} [options]
+
+		Let Vim open a file, like the `:drop` command.  If {filename}
+		is already open in a window, switch to that window.  Otherwise
+		open a new window to edit {filename}.
+		Note that both the job and Vim may change the current
+		directory, thus it's best to use the full path.
+
+		[options] is only used when opening a new window.  If present,
+		it must be a Dict.  Similarly to |++opt|, These entries are recognized:
+		  "ff"		file format: "dos", "mac" or "unix"
+		  "fileformat"	idem
+		  "enc"		overrides 'fileencoding'
+		  "encoding"	idem
+		  "bin"		sets 'binary'
+		  "binary"	idem
+		  "nobin"	resets 'binary'
+		  "nobinary"	idem
+		  "bad"		specifies behavior for bad characters, see
+				|++bad|
+
+		Example in JSON: >
+			["drop", "path/file.txt", {"ff": "dos"}]
+
+A trick to have Vim send this escape sequence: >
+	exe "set t_ts=\<Esc>]51; t_fs=\x07"
+	let &titlestring = '["call","Tapi_TryThis",["hello",123]]'
+	redraw
+	set t_ts& t_fs&
+
+Rationale: Why not allow for any command or expression?  Because that might
+create a security problem.
+
+
+Using the client-server feature ~
+						*terminal-client-server*
+This only works when v:servername is not empty.  If needed you can set it,
+before opening the terminal, with: >
+	call remote_startserver('vim-server')
+
+$VIM_SERVERNAME is set in the terminal to pass on the server name.
+
+In the job you can then do something like: >
+	vim --servername $VIM_SERVERNAME --remote +123 some_file.c
+This will open the file "some_file.c" and put the cursor on line 123.
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Remote testing					*terminal-testing*
 
 Most Vim tests execute a script inside Vim.  For some tests this does not
 work, running the test interferes with the code being tested.  To avoid this
@@ -97,34 +517,347 @@ inspects the resulting screen state.
 
 Functions ~
 
-term_sendkeys()		send keystrokes to a terminal
+term_sendkeys()		send keystrokes to a terminal (not subject to tmap)
 term_wait()		wait for screen to be updated
 term_scrape()		inspect terminal screen
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-3. Debugging					*terminal-debug*
+4. Diffing screen dumps					*terminal-diff*
+
+In some cases it can be bothersome to test that Vim displays the right
+characters on the screen.  E.g. with syntax highlighting.  To make this
+simpler it is possible to take a screen dump of a terminal and compare it to
+an expected screen dump.
+
+Vim uses the window size, text, color and other attributes as displayed.  The
+Vim screen size, font and other properties do not matter.  Therefore this
+mechanism is portable across systems.  A conventional screenshot would reflect
+all differences, including font size and family.
+
+
+Writing a screen dump test for Vim ~
+							*terminal-dumptest*
+For an example see the Test_syntax_c() function in
+src/testdir/test_syntax.vim.  The main parts are:
+- Write a file you want to test with. This is useful for testing syntax
+  highlighting.  You can also start Vim with en empty buffer.
+- Run Vim in a terminal with a specific size.  The default is 20 lines of 75
+  characters.  This makes sure the dump is always this size.  The function
+  RunVimInTerminal() takes care of this.  Pass it the arguments for the Vim
+  command.
+- Send any commands to Vim using term_sendkeys().  For example: >
+	call term_sendkeys(buf, ":echo &lines &columns\<CR>")
+- Check that the screen is now in the expected state, using
+  VerifyScreenDump().  This expects the reference screen dump to be in the
+  src/testdir/dumps/ directory.  Pass the name without ".dump".  It is
+  recommended to use the name of the test function and a sequence number, so
+  that we know what test is using the file.
+- Repeat sending commands and checking the state.
+- Finally stop Vim by calling StopVimInTerminal().
+
+The first time you do this you won't have a screen dump yet.  Create an empty
+file for now, e.g.: >
+	touch src/testdir/dumps/Test_function_name_01.dump
+
+The test will then fail, giving you the command to compare the reference dump
+and the failed dump, e.g.: >
+	call term_dumpdiff("Test_func.dump.failed", "dumps/Test_func.dump")
+
+Use this command in Vim, with the current directory set to src/testdir.
+Once you are satisfied with the test, move the failed dump in place of the
+reference: >
+	:!mv Test_func.dump.failed dumps/Test_func.dump
+
+
+Creating a screen dump ~
+							*terminal-screendump*
+
+To create the screen dump, run Vim (or any other program) in a terminal and
+make it show the desired state.  Then use the term_dumpwrite() function to
+create a screen dump file.  For example: >
+	:call term_dumpwrite(77, "mysyntax.dump")
+
+Here "77" is the buffer number of the terminal.  Use `:ls!` to see it.
+
+You can view the screen dump with term_dumpload(): >
+	:call term_dumpload("mysyntax.dump")
+
+To verify that Vim still shows exactly the same screen, run Vim again with
+exactly the same way to show the desired state.  Then create a screen dump
+again, using a different file name: >
+	:call term_dumpwrite(88, "test.dump")
+
+To assert that the files are exactly the same use assert_equalfile(): >
+	call assert_equalfile("mysyntax.dump", "test.dump")
+
+If there are differences then v:errors will contain the error message.
+
+
+Comparing screen dumps ~
+						*terminal-diffscreendump*
+
+assert_equalfile() does not make it easy to see what is different.
+To spot the problem use term_dumpdiff(): >
+	call term_dumpdiff("mysyntax.dump", "test.dump")
+
+This will open a window consisting of three parts:
+1.  The contents of the first dump
+2.  The difference between the first and second dump
+3.  The contents of the second dump
+
+You can usually see what differs in the second part.  Use the 'ruler' to
+relate it to the position in the first or second dump.
+
+Alternatively, press "s" to swap the first and second dump. Do this several
+times so that you can spot the difference in the context of the text.
+
+==============================================================================
+5. Debugging						*terminal-debug*
 
 The Terminal debugging plugin can be used to debug a program with gdb and view
-the source code in a Vim window. For example: >
+the source code in a Vim window.  Since this is completely contained inside
+Vim this also works remotely over an ssh connection.
 
-	:TermDebug vim
 
-This opens three windows:
+Starting ~
-- A terminal window in which "gdb vim" is executed.  Here you can directly
+							*termdebug-starting*
-  interact with gdb.
+Load the plugin with this command: >
-- A terminal window for the executed program.  When "run" is used in gdb the
+	packadd termdebug
-  program I/O will happen in this window, so that it does not interfere with
+<							*:Termdebug*
-  controlling gdb.
+To start debugging use `:Termdebug` or `:TermdebugCommand`` followed by the
-- A normal Vim window used to show the source code.  When gdb jumps to a
+command name, for example: >
-  source file location this window will display the code, if possible.  Values
+	:Termdebug vim
-  of variables can be inspected, breakpoints set and cleared, etc.
 
-This uses two terminal windows.  To open the gdb window: >
+This opens two windows:
-	:term gdb [arguments]
+
-To open the terminal to run the tested program |term_open()| is used.
+gdb window	A terminal window in which "gdb vim" is executed.  Here you
+		can directly interact with gdb.  The buffer name is "!gdb".
+
+program window	A terminal window for the executed program.  When "run" is
+		used in gdb the program I/O will happen in this window, so
+		that it does not interfere with controlling gdb.  The buffer
+		name is "gdb program".
+
+The current window is used to show the source code.  When gdb pauses the
+source file location will be displayed, if possible.  A sign is used to
+highlight the current position, using highlight group debugPC.	 
+
+If the buffer in the current window is modified, another window will be opened
+to display the current gdb position.  You can use `:Winbar` to add a window
+toolbar there.
+
+Focus the terminal of the executed program to interact with it.  This works
+the same as any command running in a terminal window.
+
+When the debugger ends, typically by typing "quit" in the gdb window, the two
+opened windows are closed.
+
+Only one debugger can be active at a time.
+							*:TermdebugCommand*
+If you want to give specific commands to the command being debugged, you can
+use the `:TermdebugCommand` command followed by the command name and
+additional parameters. >
+	:TermdebugCommand vim --clean -c ':set nu'
+
+Both the `:Termdebug` and `:TermdebugCommand` support an optional "!" bang
+argument to start the command right away, without pausing at the gdb window
+(and cursor will be in the debugged window).  For example: >
+	:TermdebugCommand! vim --clean
+
+To attach gdb to an already running executable or use a core file, pass extra
+arguments.  E.g.: >
+	:Termdebug vim core
+	:Termdebug vim 98343
+
+If no argument is given, you'll end up in a gdb window, in which you need to
+specify which command to run using e.g. the gdb `file` command.
+
+
+Example session ~
+							*termdebug-example*
+Start in the Vim "src" directory and build Vim: >
+	% make
+Start Vim: >
+	% ./vim
+Load the termdebug plugin and start debugging Vim: >
+	:packadd termdebug
+	:Termdebug vim
+You should now have three windows:
+    source  - where you started, has a window toolbar with buttons
+    gdb	    - you can type gdb commands here
+    program - the executed program will use this window
+
+You can use CTRL-W CTRL-W or the mouse to move focus between windows.
+Put focus on the gdb window and type: >
+	break ex_help
+	run
+Vim will start running in the program window. Put focus there and type: >
+	:help gui
+Gdb will run into the ex_help breakpoint.  The source window now shows the 
+ex_cmds.c file.  A ">>" marker will appear where the breakpoint was set.  The
+line where the debugger stopped is highlighted.  You can now step through the
+program.  Let's use the mouse: click on the "Next" button in the window
+toolbar.  You will see the highlighting move as the debugger executes a line
+of source code.
+
+Click "Next" a few times until the for loop is highlighted.  Put the cursor on
+the end of "eap->arg", then click "Eval" in the toolbar.  You will see this
+displayed:
+	"eap->arg": 0x555555e68855 "gui" ~
+This way you can inspect the value of local variables.  You can also focus the
+gdb window and use a "print" command, e.g.: >
+	print *eap
+If mouse pointer movements are working, Vim will also show a balloon when the
+mouse rests on text that can be evaluated by gdb.
+
+Now go back to the source window and put the cursor on the first line after
+the for loop, then type: >
+	:Break
+You will see a ">>" marker appear, this indicates the new breakpoint.  Now
+click "Cont" in the toolbar and the code until the breakpoint will be
+executed.
+
+You can type more advanced commands in the gdb window.  For example, type: >
+	watch curbuf
+Now click "Cont" in the toolbar (or type "cont" in the gdb window). Execution
+will now continue until the value of "curbuf" changes, which is in do_ecmd().
+To remove this watchpoint again type in the gdb window: >
+	delete 3
+
+You can see the stack by typing in the gdb window: >
+	where
+Move through the stack frames, e.g. with: >
+	frame 3
+The source window will show the code, at the point where the call was made to
+a deeper level.
+
+
+Stepping through code ~
+							*termdebug-stepping*
+Put focus on the gdb window to type commands there.  Some common ones are:
+- CTRL-C	interrupt the program
+- next		execute the current line and stop at the next line
+- step		execute the current line and stop at the next statement,
+		entering functions
+- finish	execute until leaving the current function
+- where		show the stack
+- frame N	go to the Nth stack frame
+- continue	continue execution
+
+						*:Run* *:Arguments*
+In the window showing the source code these commands can be used to control
+gdb:
+ `:Run` [args]	    run the program with [args] or the previous arguments
+ `:Arguments` {args}  set arguments for the next `:Run`
+
+ *:Break*	set a breakpoint at the current line; a sign will be displayed
+ *:Clear*	delete the breakpoint at the current line
+
+ *:Step*	execute the gdb "step" command
+ *:Over*	execute the gdb "next" command (`:Next` is a Vim command)
+ *:Finish*	execute the gdb "finish" command
+ *:Continue*	execute the gdb "continue" command
+ *:Stop*	interrupt the program
+
+If 'mouse' is set the plugin adds a window toolbar with these entries:
+  Step		`:Step`
+  Next		`:Over`
+  Finish	`:Finish`
+  Cont		`:Continue`
+  Stop		`:Stop`
+  Eval		`:Evaluate`
+This way you can use the mouse to perform the most common commands.  You need
+to have the 'mouse' option set to enable mouse clicks.
+								*:Winbar*
+You can add the window toolbar in other windows you open with: >
+  :Winbar
+
+If gdb stops at a source line and there is no window currently showing the
+source code, a new window will be created for the source code.  This also
+happens if the buffer in the source code window has been modified and can't be
+abandoned.
+
+
+Inspecting variables ~
+					*termdebug-variables* *:Evaluate*
+ `:Evaluate`	    evaluate the expression under the cursor
+ `K`		    same
+ `:Evaluate` {expr}   evaluate {expr}
+ `:'<,'>Evaluate`     evaluate the Visually selected text
+
+This is similar to using "print" in the gdb window.
+You can usually shorten `:Evaluate` to `:Ev`.
+
+
+Other commands ~
+							*termdebug-commands*
+ *:Gdb*	     jump to the gdb window
+ *:Program*    jump to the window with the running program
+ *:Source*     jump to the window with the source code, create it if there
+	     isn't one
+
+
+Communication ~
+						*termdebug-communication*
+There is another, hidden, buffer, which is used for Vim to communicate with
+gdb.  The buffer name is "gdb communication".  Do not delete this buffer, it
+will break the debugger.
+
+
+Customizing ~
+
+GDB command						 *termdebug-customizing*
+
+To change the name of the gdb command, set the "termdebugger" variable before
+invoking `:Termdebug`: >
+	let termdebugger = "mygdb"
+<							*gdb-version*
+Only debuggers fully compatible with gdb will work.  Vim uses the GDB/MI
+interface.  The "new-ui" command  requires gdb version 7.12 or later.  if you
+get this error:
+	Undefined command: "new-ui". Try "help".~
+Then your gdb is too old.
+
+
+Colors						*hl-debugPC* *hl-debugBreakpoint*
+
+The color of the signs can be adjusted with these highlight groups:
+- debugPC		the current position
+- debugBreakpoint	a breakpoint
+
+The defaults are, when 'background' is "light":
+  hi debugPC term=reverse ctermbg=lightblue guibg=lightblue
+  hi debugBreakpoint term=reverse ctermbg=red guibg=red
+
+When 'background' is "dark":
+  hi debugPC term=reverse ctermbg=darkblue guibg=darkblue
+  hi debugBreakpoint term=reverse ctermbg=red guibg=red
+
+
+Popup menu						*termdebug_popup*
+
+By default the Termdebug plugin sets 'mousemodel' to "popup_setpos" and adds
+these entries to the popup menu:
+	Set breakpoint		`:Break`
+	Clear breakpoint	`:Clear`
+	Evaluate		`:Evaluate`
+If you don't want this then disable it with: >
+	let g:termdebug_popup = 0
+
+
+Vim window width						*termdebug_wide*
+
+To change the width of the Vim window when debugging starts, and use a
+vertical split: >
+  let g:termdebug_wide = 163
+This will set &columns to 163 when :Termdebug is used.  The value is restored
+when quitting the debugger.
+If g:termdebug_wide is set and &Columns is already  larger than
+g:termdebug_wide then a vertical split will be used without changing &columns.
+Set it to 1 to get a vertical split without every changing &columns (useful
+for when the terminal can't be resized by Vim).
 
-TODO
 
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/test_urls.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+" Test for URLs in help documents.
+"
+" Opens a new window with all found URLS followed by return code from curl
+" (anything other than 0 means unreachable)
+"
+" Written by Christian Brabandt.
+
+func Test_check_URLs()
+  if has("win32")
+    echoerr "Doesn't work on MS-Windows"
+    return
+  endif
+  if executable('curl')
+    " Note: does not follow redirects!
+    let s:command = 'curl --silent --fail --output /dev/null --head '
+  elseif executable('wget')
+    " Note: only allow a couple of redirects
+    let s:command = 'wget --quiet -S --spider --max-redirect=2 --timeout=5 --tries=2 -O /dev/null '
+  else
+    echoerr 'Only works when "curl" or "wget" is available'
+    return
+  endif
+
+  let pat='\(https\?\|ftp\)://[^\t* ]\+'
+  exe 'helpgrep' pat
+  helpclose
+
+  let urls = map(getqflist(), 'v:val.text')
+  " do not use submatch(1)!
+  let urls = map(urls, {key, val -> matchstr(val, pat)})
+  " remove examples like user@host (invalid urls)
+  let urls = filter(urls, 'v:val !~ "@"')
+  " Remove example URLs which are invalid
+  let urls = filter(urls, {key, val -> val !~ '\<\(\(my\|some\)\?host\|machine\|hostname\|file\)\>'})
+  new
+  put =urls
+  " remove some more invalid items
+  " empty lines
+  v/./d
+  " remove # anchors
+  %s/#.*$//e
+  " remove trailing stuff (parenthesis, dot, comma, quotes), but only for HTTP
+  " links
+  g/^h/s#[.,)'"/>][:.]\?$##
+  g#^[hf]t\?tp:/\(/\?\.*\)$#d
+  silent! g/ftp://,$/d
+  silent! g/=$/d
+  let a = getline(1,'$')
+  let a = uniq(sort(a))
+  %d
+  call setline(1, a)
+
+  " Do the testing.
+  set nomore
+  %s/.*/\=TestURL(submatch(0))/
+
+  " highlight the failures
+  /.* \([0-9]*[1-9]\|[0-9]\{2,}\)$
+endfunc
+
+func TestURL(url)
+  " Relies on the return code to determine whether a page is valid
+  echom printf("Testing URL: %d/%d %s", line('.'), line('$'), a:url)
+  call system(s:command . shellescape(a:url))
+  return printf("%s %d", a:url, v:shell_error)
+endfunc
+
+call Test_check_URLs()

runtime/doc/usr_01.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_01.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2010 Nov 03
+*usr_01.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 15
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -140,19 +140,19 @@ On other systems, you have to do a little work:
 
 1. Copy the tutor file.  You can do this with Vim (it knows where to find it):
 >
-	vim -u NONE -c 'e $VIMRUNTIME/tutor/tutor' -c 'w! TUTORCOPY' -c 'q'
+	vim --clean -c 'e $VIMRUNTIME/tutor/tutor' -c 'w! TUTORCOPY' -c 'q'
 <
    This will write the file "TUTORCOPY" in the current directory.  To use a
 translated version of the tutor, append the two-letter language code to the
 filename.  For French:
 >
-	vim -u NONE -c 'e $VIMRUNTIME/tutor/tutor.fr' -c 'w! TUTORCOPY' -c 'q'
+	vim --clean -c 'e $VIMRUNTIME/tutor/tutor.fr' -c 'w! TUTORCOPY' -c 'q'
 <
 2. Edit the copied file with Vim:
 >
-	vim -u NONE -c "set nocp" TUTORCOPY
+	vim --clean TUTORCOPY
 <
-   The extra arguments make sure Vim is started in a good mood.
+   The --clean argument makes sure Vim is started with nice defaults.
 
 3. Delete the copied file when you are finished with it:
 >

runtime/doc/usr_03.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_03.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Jan 05
+*usr_03.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 21
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ The "?" command works like "/" but searches backwards: >
 	?word
 
 The "N" command repeats the last search the opposite direction.  Thus using
-"N" after a "/" command search backwards, using "N" after "?" searches
+"N" after a "/" command searches backwards, using "N" after "?" searches
 forward.
 
 
@@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ only if it is at the beginning of a line.
    The $ character matches the end of a line.  Therefore, "was$" matches the
 word was only if it is at the end of a line.
 
-Let's mark the places where "the" matches in this example line with "x"s:
+Let's mark the places where "/the" matches in this example line with "x"s:
 
 	the solder holding one of the chips melted and the ~
 	xxx			  xxx		       xxx

runtime/doc/usr_05.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Mar 28
+*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Feb 20
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -48,6 +48,14 @@ For MS-DOS and MS-Windows you can use one of these:
 	$HOME/_vimrc ~
 	$VIM/_vimrc ~
 
+If you are creating the vimrc file for the first time, it is recommended to
+put this line at the top: >
+
+	source $VIMRUNTIME/defaults.vim
+
+This initializes Vim for new users (as opposed to traditional Vi users). See
+|defaults.vim| for the details.
+
 The vimrc file can contain all the commands that you type after a colon.  The
 most simple ones are for setting options.  For example, if you want Vim to
 always start with the 'incsearch' option on, add this line your vimrc file: >

runtime/doc/usr_07.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_07.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2006 Apr 24
+*usr_07.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 18
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -215,14 +215,14 @@ change: >
 
 	`.
 
-Suppose you are editing the file "one.txt".  Somewhere halfway the file you
+Suppose you are editing the file "one.txt".  Somewhere halfway through the
-use "x" to delete a character.  Then you go to the last line with "G" and
+file you use "x" to delete a character.  Then you go to the last line with "G"
-write the file with ":w".  You edit several other files, and then use ":edit
+and write the file with ":w".  You edit several other files, and then use
-one.txt" to come back to "one.txt".  If you now use `" Vim jumps to the last
+":edit one.txt" to come back to "one.txt".  If you now use `" Vim jumps to the
-line of the file.  Using `. takes you to the position where you deleted the
+last line of the file.  Using `. takes you to the position where you deleted
-character.  Even when you move around in the file `" and `. will take you to
+the character.  Even when you move around in the file `" and `. will take you
-the remembered position.  At least until you make another change or leave the
+to the remembered position.  At least until you make another change or leave
-file.
+the file.
 
 
 FILE MARKS
@@ -233,8 +233,8 @@ another file and place marks there, these are specific for that file.  Thus
 each file has its own set of marks, they are local to the file.
    So far we were using marks with a lowercase letter.  There are also marks
 with an uppercase letter.  These are global, they can be used from any file.
-For example suppose that we are editing the file "foo.txt".  Go to halfway the
+For example suppose that we are editing the file "foo.txt".  Go to halfway
-file ("50%") and place the F mark there (F for foo): >
+down the file ("50%") and place the F mark there (F for foo): >
 
 	50%mF
 
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ a sentence to the f register (f for First): >
 	"fyas
 
 The "yas" command yanks a sentence like before.  It's the "f that tells Vim
-the text should be place in the f register.  This must come just before the
+the text should be placed in the f register.  This must come just before the
 yank command.
    Now yank three whole lines to the l register (l for line): >
 

runtime/doc/usr_08.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_08.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Jul 06
+*usr_08.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 11
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ top one:
 	+----------------------------------+
 
 What you see here is two windows on the same file.  The line with "====" is
-that status line.  It displays information about the window above it.  (In
+the status line.  It displays information about the window above it.  (In
 practice the status line will be in reverse video.)
    The two windows allow you to view two parts of the same file.  For example,
 you could make the top window show the variable declarations of a program, and

runtime/doc/usr_09.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_09.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2006 Apr 24
+*usr_09.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 11
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Table of contents: |usr_toc.txt|
 ==============================================================================
 *09.1*	Parts of the GUI
 
-You might have an icon on your desktop that starts gVim.  Otherwise, one of
+You might have an icon on your desktop that starts gvim.  Otherwise, one of
 these commands should do it: >
 
 	gvim file.txt
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ THE WINDOW TITLE
 At the very top is the window title.  This is drawn by your window system.
 Vim will set the title to show the name of the current file.  First comes the
 name of the file.  Then some special characters and the directory of the file
-in parens.  These special character can be present:
+in parens.  These special characters can be present:
 
 	-	The file cannot be modified (e.g., a help file)
 	+	The file contains changes
@@ -184,12 +184,12 @@ currently highlighted.  In Vim this is the Visual area (this assumes you are
 using the default option settings).  You can paste this selection in another
 application without any further action.
    For example, in this text select a few words with the mouse.  Vim will
-switch to Visual mode and highlight the text.  Now start another gVim, without
+switch to Visual mode and highlight the text.  Now start another gvim, without
 a file name argument, so that it displays an empty window.  Click the middle
 mouse button.  The selected text will be inserted.
 
 The "current selection" will only remain valid until some other text is
-selected.  After doing the paste in the other gVim, now select some characters
+selected.  After doing the paste in the other gvim, now select some characters
 in that window.  You will notice that the words that were previously selected
 in the other gvim window are displayed differently.  This means that it no
 longer is the current selection.
@@ -204,10 +204,10 @@ Now for the other place with which text can be exchanged.  We call this the
 "real clipboard", to avoid confusion.  Often both the "current selection" and
 the "real clipboard" are called clipboard, you'll have to get used to that.
    To put text on the real clipboard, select a few different words in one of
-the gVims you have running.  Then use the Edit/Copy menu entry.  Now the text
+the gvims you have running.  Then use the Edit/Copy menu entry.  Now the text
 has been copied to the real clipboard.  You can't see this, unless you have
-some application that shows the clipboard contents (e.g., KDE's klipper).
+some application that shows the clipboard contents (e.g., KDE's Klipper).
-   Now select the other gVim, position the cursor somewhere and use the
+   Now select the other gvim, position the cursor somewhere and use the
 Edit/Paste menu.  You will see the text from the real clipboard is inserted.
 
 

runtime/doc/usr_11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_11.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*usr_11.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 13
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ that file, be prepared to redo your last changes.
 
 WHAT TO DO?					*swap-exists-choices*
 
-If dialogs are supported you will be asked to select one of five choices:
+If dialogs are supported you will be asked to select one of six choices:
 
   Swap file ".main.c.swp" already exists! ~
   [O]pen Read-Only, (E)dit anyway, (R)ecover, (Q)uit, (A)bort, (D)elete it: ~

runtime/doc/usr_12.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_12.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2007 May 11
+*usr_12.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 11
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ command: >
 The line range "%" is used, thus this works on the whole file.  The pattern
 that the ":substitute" command matches with is "\s\+$".  This finds white
 space characters (\s), 1 or more of them (\+), before the end-of-line ($).
-Later will be explained how you write patterns like this |usr_27.txt|.
+Later will be explained how you write patterns like this, see |usr_27.txt|.
    The "to" part of the substitute command is empty: "//".  Thus it replaces
 with nothing, effectively deleting the matched white space.
 

runtime/doc/usr_24.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_24.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2006 Jul 23
+*usr_24.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 18
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -538,8 +538,8 @@ a 16 bit and a 32 bit number (e.g., for a Unicode character): >
 *24.9*	Digraphs
 
 Some characters are not on the keyboard.  For example, the copyright character
-(<EFBFBD>).  To type these characters in Vim, you use digraphs, where two characters
+(©).  To type these characters in Vim, you use digraphs, where two characters
-represent one.  To enter a <EFBFBD>, for example, you press three keys: >
+represent one.  To enter a ©, for example, you press three keys: >
 
 	CTRL-K Co
 
@@ -549,12 +549,12 @@ To find out what digraphs are available, use the following command: >
 
 Vim will display the digraph table.  Here are three lines of it:
 
-  AC ~_ 159  NS |  160  !I <EFBFBD>  161  Ct <EFBFBD>  162  Pd <EFBFBD>  163  Cu <EFBFBD>  164  Ye <EFBFBD>  165 ~
+  AC ~_ 159  NS |  160  !I ¡  161  Ct ¢  162  Pd £  163  Cu ¤  164  Ye ¥  165 ~
-  BB <EFBFBD>  166  SE <EFBFBD>  167  ': <EFBFBD>  168  Co <EFBFBD>  169  -a <EFBFBD>  170  << <EFBFBD>  171  NO <EFBFBD>  172 ~
+  BB ¦  166  SE §  167  ': ¨  168  Co ©  169  -a ª  170  << «  171  NO ¬  172 ~
-  -- <EFBFBD>  173  Rg <EFBFBD>  174  'm <EFBFBD>  175  DG <EFBFBD>  176  +- <EFBFBD>  177  2S <EFBFBD>  178  3S <EFBFBD>  179 ~
+  -- ­  173  Rg ®  174  'm ¯  175  DG °  176  +- ±  177  2S ²  178  3S ³  179 ~
 
 This shows, for example, that the digraph you get by typing CTRL-K Pd is the
-character (<EFBFBD>).  This is character number 163 (decimal).
+character (£).  This is character number 163 (decimal).
    Pd is short for Pound.  Most digraphs are selected to give you a hint about
 the character they will produce.  If you look through the list you will
 understand the logic.
@@ -569,9 +569,9 @@ that combination.  Thus CTRL-K dP also works.  Since there is no digraph for
 
 You can define your own digraphs.  Example: >
 
-	:digraph a" <EFBFBD>
+	:digraph a" ä
 
-This defines that CTRL-K a" inserts an <EFBFBD> character.  You can also specify the
+This defines that CTRL-K a" inserts an ä character.  You can also specify the
 character with a decimal number.  This defines the same digraph: >
 
 	:digraph a" 228

runtime/doc/usr_27.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_27.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2010 Mar 28
+*usr_27.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Jan 26
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -225,9 +225,9 @@ specify a line offset, this can cause trouble.  For example: >
 	/const/-2
 
 This finds the next word "const" and then moves two lines up.  If you
-use "n" to search again, Vim could start at the current position and find the same
+use "n" to search again, Vim could start at the current position and find the
-"const" match.  Then using the offset again, you would be back where you started.
+same "const" match.  Then using the offset again, you would be back where you
-You would be stuck!
+started.  You would be stuck!
    It could be worse: Suppose there is another match with "const" in the next
 line.  Then repeating the forward search would find this match and move two
 lines up.  Thus you would actually move the cursor back!

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 28
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 11
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -807,6 +807,8 @@ Buffers, windows and the argument list:
 	getbufinfo()		get a list with buffer information
 	gettabinfo()		get a list with tab page information
 	getwininfo()		get a list with window information
+	getchangelist()		get a list of change list entries
+	getjumplist()		get a list of jump list entries
 
 Command line:					*command-line-functions*
 	getcmdline()		get the current command line
@@ -883,13 +885,15 @@ Interactive:					*interactive-functions*
 
 GUI:						*gui-functions*
 	getfontname()		get name of current font being used
-	getwinposx()		X position of the GUI Vim window
+	getwinpos()		position of the Vim window
-	getwinposy()		Y position of the GUI Vim window
+	getwinposx()		X position of the Vim window
+	getwinposy()		Y position of the Vim window
 	balloon_show()		set the balloon content
+	balloon_split()		split a message for a balloon
 
 Vim server:					*server-functions*
 	serverlist()		return the list of server names
-	remote_startserve()	run a server
+	remote_startserver()	run a server
 	remote_send()		send command characters to a Vim server
 	remote_expr()		evaluate an expression in a Vim server
 	server2client()		send a reply to a client of a Vim server
@@ -901,6 +905,7 @@ Vim server:					*server-functions*
 Window size and position:			*window-size-functions*
 	winheight()		get height of a specific window
 	winwidth()		get width of a specific window
+	win_screenpos()		get screen position of a window
 	winrestcmd()		return command to restore window sizes
 	winsaveview()		get view of current window
 	winrestview()		restore saved view of current window
@@ -920,7 +925,8 @@ Testing:				    *test-functions*
 	assert_false()		assert that an expression is false
 	assert_true()		assert that an expression is true
 	assert_exception()	assert that a command throws an exception
-	assert_fails()		assert that a function call fails
+	assert_beeps()		assert that a command beeps
+	assert_fails()		assert that a command fails
 	assert_report()		report a test failure
 	test_alloc_fail()	make memory allocation fail
 	test_autochdir()	enable 'autochdir' during startup
@@ -966,6 +972,25 @@ Jobs:		    			        *job-functions*
 	job_info()		get information about a job
 	job_setoptions()	set options for a job
 
+Terminal window:				*terminal-functions*
+	term_start()		open a terminal window and run a job
+	term_list()		get the list of terminal buffers
+	term_sendkeys()		send keystrokes to a terminal
+	term_wait()		wait for screen to be updated
+	term_getjob()		get the job associated with a terminal
+	term_scrape()		get row of a terminal screen
+	term_getline()		get a line of text from a terminal
+	term_getattr()		get the value of attribute {what}
+	term_getcursor()	get the cursor position of a terminal
+	term_getscrolled()	get the scroll count of a terminal
+	term_getaltscreen()	get the alternate screen flag
+	term_getsize()		get the size of a terminal
+	term_getstatus()	get the status of a terminal
+	term_gettitle()		get the title of a terminal
+	term_gettty()		get the tty name of a terminal
+	term_setansicolors()	set 16 ANSI colors, used for GUI
+	term_getansicolors()	get 16 ANSI colors, used for GUI
+
 Timers:						*timer-functions*
 	timer_start()		create a timer
 	timer_pause()		pause or unpause a timer

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Feb 24
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -40,23 +40,35 @@ CTRL-L			Clear and redraw the screen.  The redraw may happen
 
 :as[cii]	or					*ga* *:as* *:ascii*
 ga			Print the ascii value of the character under the
-			cursor in decimal, hexadecimal and octal.  For
+			cursor in decimal, hexadecimal and octal.
-			example, when the cursor is on a 'R':
+			Mnemonic: Get Ascii value.
+
+			For example, when the cursor is on a 'R':
 				<R>  82,  Hex 52,  Octal 122 ~
 			When the character is a non-standard ASCII character,
 			but printable according to the 'isprint' option, the
-			non-printable version is also given.  When the
+			non-printable version is also given.
-			character is larger than 127, the <M-x> form is also
+			
-			printed.  For example:
+			When the character is larger than 127, the <M-x> form
+			is also printed.  For example:
 				<~A>  <M-^A>  129,  Hex 81,  Octal 201 ~
 				<p>  <|~>  <M-~>  254,  Hex fe,  Octal 376 ~
 			(where <p> is a special character)
+
 			The <Nul> character in a file is stored internally as
 			<NL>, but it will be shown as:
 				<^@>  0,  Hex 00,  Octal 000 ~
+
 			If the character has composing characters these are
 			also shown.  The value of 'maxcombine' doesn't matter.
-			Mnemonic: Get Ascii value.  {not in Vi}
+
+			If the character can be inserted as a digraph, also
+			output the two characters that can be used to create
+			the character:
+			    <ö> 246, Hex 00f6, Oct 366, Digr o: ~
+			This shows you can type CTRL-K o : to insert ö.
+
+			{not in Vi}
 
 							*g8*
 g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
@@ -294,7 +306,7 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 			Here is an overview of the features.
 			The first column shows the smallest version in which
 			they are included:
-			   T	tiny
+			   T	tiny (always)
 			   S	small
 			   N	normal
 			   B	big
@@ -308,10 +320,14 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
    *+acl*		|ACL| support included
    *+ARP*		Amiga only: ARP support included
 B  *+arabic*		|Arabic| language support
-N  *+autocmd*		|:autocmd|, automatic commands
+T  *+autocmd*		|:autocmd|, automatic commands
-m  *+balloon_eval*	|balloon-eval| support. Included when compiling with
+H  *+autoservername*	Automatically enable |clientserver|
-			supported GUI (Motif, GTK, GUI) and either
+m  *+balloon_eval*	|balloon-eval| support in the GUI. Included when
-			Netbeans/Sun Workshop integration or |+eval| feature.
+			compiling with supported GUI (Motif, GTK, GUI) and
+			either Netbeans/Sun Workshop integration or |+eval|
+			feature.
+H  *+balloon_eval_term*	|balloon-eval| support in the terminal,
+			'balloonevalterm'
 N  *+browse*		|:browse| command
 N  *+builtin_terms*	some terminals builtin |builtin-terms|
 B  *++builtin_terms*	maximal terminals builtin |builtin-terms|
@@ -322,13 +338,13 @@ N  *+cindent*		|'cindent'|, C indenting
 N  *+clientserver*	Unix and Win32: Remote invocation |clientserver|
    *+clipboard*		|clipboard| support
 N  *+cmdline_compl*	command line completion |cmdline-completion|
-N  *+cmdline_hist*	command line history |cmdline-history|
+S  *+cmdline_hist*	command line history |cmdline-history|
 N  *+cmdline_info*	|'showcmd'| and |'ruler'|
 N  *+comments*		|'comments'| support
 B  *+conceal*		"conceal" support, see |conceal| |:syn-conceal| etc.
 N  *+cryptv*		encryption support |encryption|
 B  *+cscope*		|cscope| support
-m  *+cursorbind*	|'cursorbind'| support
+T  *+cursorbind*	|'cursorbind'| support
 m  *+cursorshape*	|termcap-cursor-shape| support
 m  *+debug*		Compiled for debugging.
 N  *+dialog_gui*	Support for |:confirm| with GUI dialog.
@@ -336,7 +352,7 @@ N  *+dialog_con*	Support for |:confirm| with console dialog.
 N  *+dialog_con_gui*	Support for |:confirm| with GUI and console dialog.
 N  *+diff*		|vimdiff| and 'diff'
 N  *+digraphs*		|digraphs| *E196*
-m  *+directx*		Win32 GUI only: DirectX and |'renderoptions'|
+   *+directx*		Win32 GUI only: DirectX and |'renderoptions'|
    *+dnd*		Support for DnD into the "~ register |quote_~|.
 B  *+emacs_tags*	|emacs-tags| files
 N  *+eval*		expression evaluation |eval.txt|
@@ -361,14 +377,14 @@ m  *+hangul_input*	Hangul input support |hangul|
    *+iconv/dyn*		Likewise |iconv-dynamic| |/dyn|
 N  *+insert_expand*	|insert_expand| Insert mode completion
 m  *+job*		starting and stopping jobs |job|
-N  *+jumplist*		|jumplist|
+S  *+jumplist*		|jumplist|
 B  *+keymap*		|'keymap'|
 N  *+lambda*		|lambda| and |closure|
 B  *+langmap*		|'langmap'|
 N  *+libcall*		|libcall()|
 N  *+linebreak*		|'linebreak'|, |'breakat'| and |'showbreak'|
 N  *+lispindent*	|'lisp'|
-N  *+listcmds*		Vim commands for the list of buffers |buffer-hidden|
+T  *+listcmds*		Vim commands for the list of buffers |buffer-hidden|
 			and argument list |:argdelete|
 N  *+localmap*		Support for mappings local to a buffer |:map-local|
 m  *+lua*		|Lua| interface
@@ -413,7 +429,7 @@ N  *+reltime*		|reltime()| function, 'hlsearch'/'incsearch' timeout,
 B  *+rightleft*		Right to left typing |'rightleft'|
 m  *+ruby*		Ruby interface |ruby|
 m  *+ruby/dyn*		Ruby interface |ruby-dynamic| |/dyn|
-N  *+scrollbind*	|'scrollbind'|
+T  *+scrollbind*	|'scrollbind'|
 B  *+signs*		|:sign|
 N  *+smartindent*	|'smartindent'|
 N  *+startuptime*	|--startuptime| argument
@@ -427,6 +443,7 @@ N  *+tag_old_static*	old method for static tags |tag-old-static|
 m  *+tag_any_white*	any white space allowed in tags file |tag-any-white|
 m  *+tcl*		Tcl interface |tcl|
 m  *+tcl/dyn*		Tcl interface |tcl-dynamic| |/dyn|
+m  *+terminal*		Support for terminal window |terminal|
    *+terminfo*		uses |terminfo| instead of termcap
 N  *+termresponse*	support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|
 B  *+termguicolors*	24-bit color in xterm-compatible terminals support
@@ -437,14 +454,17 @@ N  *+title*		Setting the window 'title' and 'icon'
 N  *+toolbar*		|gui-toolbar|
 N  *+user_commands*	User-defined commands. |user-commands|
 N  *+viminfo*		|'viminfo'|
-N  *+vertsplit*		Vertically split windows |:vsplit|
+   *+vertsplit*		Vertically split windows |:vsplit|; Always enabled
+			since 8.0.1118.
+			in sync with the |+windows| feature
 N  *+virtualedit*	|'virtualedit'|
 S  *+visual*		Visual mode |Visual-mode| Always enabled since 7.4.200.
 N  *+visualextra*	extra Visual mode commands |blockwise-operators|
 N  *+vreplace*		|gR| and |gr|
+   *+vtp*		on MS-Windows console: support for 'termguicolors'
 N  *+wildignore*	|'wildignore'|
 N  *+wildmenu*		|'wildmenu'|
-S  *+windows*		more than one window
+   *+windows*		more than one window; Always enabled since 8.0.1118.
 m  *+writebackup*	|'writebackup'| is default on
 m  *+xim*		X input method |xim|
    *+xfontset*		X fontset support |xfontset|

runtime/doc/version6.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version6.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Aug 29
+*version6.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Mar 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -6103,7 +6103,7 @@ New tutor translations:
 	Slovak (Lubos Celko)
 	Greek (Christos Kontas)
 	German (Joachim Hofmann)
-	Norwegian (<EFBFBD>yvind Holm)
+	Norwegian (Øyvind Holm)
 
 New filetype plugins:
 	Occam (Mario Schweigler)
@@ -6121,13 +6121,13 @@ New compiler plugins:
 	Modelsim vcom (Paul Baleme)
 
 New menu translations:
-	Brazilian (Jos<EFBFBD> de Paula)
+	Brazilian (José de Paula)
 	British (Mike Williams)
 	Korean in UTF-8. (Nam SungHyun)
-	Norwegian (<EFBFBD>yvind Holm)
+	Norwegian (Øyvind Holm)
 	Serbian (Aleksandar Jelenak)
 
-New message translation for Norwegian. (<EFBFBD>yvind Holm)
+New message translation for Norwegian. (Øyvind Holm)
 
 New color scheme:
 	desert (Hans Fugal)
@@ -10066,7 +10066,7 @@ Files:	    src/os_unix.c
 
 Patch 6.2.019 (lang)
 Problem:    Loading the Portuguese menu causes an error message.
-Solution:   Join two lines.  (Jose Pedro Oliveira, Jos<EFBFBD> de Paula)
+Solution:   Join two lines.  (Jose Pedro Oliveira, José de Paula)
 Files:	    runtime/lang/menu_pt_br.vim
 
 Patch 6.2.020
@@ -12418,7 +12418,7 @@ Files:	    src/message.c
 
 Patch 6.2.376
 Problem:    Win32: Ruby interface cannot be dynamically linked with Ruby 1.6.
-Solution:   Add #ifdefs around use of rb_w32_snprintf().  (Beno<EFBFBD>t Cerrina)
+Solution:   Add #ifdefs around use of rb_w32_snprintf().  (Benoît Cerrina)
 Files:	    src/if_ruby.c
 
 Patch 6.2.377 (after 6.2.372)
@@ -14320,7 +14320,7 @@ Files:	    src/edit.c
 Patch 6.3.061
 Problem:    When editing a utf-8 file in an utf-8 xterm and there is a
 	    multi-byte character in the last column, displaying is messed up.
-	    (Jo<EFBFBD>l Rio)
+	    (Joël Rio)
 Solution:   Check for a multi-byte character, not a multi-column character.
 Files:	    src/screen.c
 

runtime/doc/version8.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version8.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 23
+*version8.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Nov 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -11778,7 +11778,7 @@ Files:      src/os_unix.c
 Patch 7.4.1915
 Problem:    The effect of the PopupMenu autocommand isn't directly visible.
 Solution:   Call gui_update_menus() before displaying the popup menu. (Shane
-            Harper, closs #855)
+            Harper, closes #855)
 Files:      src/menu.c
 
 Patch 7.4.1916 (after 7.4.1906)
@@ -15398,7 +15398,7 @@ Files:      src/testdir/test_undo.vim, src/undo.c
 Patch 8.0.0150
 Problem:    When the pattern of :filter does not have a separator then
             completion of the command fails.
-Solution:   Skip over the pattern. (Ozaki Kiichi, clodes #1299)
+Solution:   Skip over the pattern. (Ozaki Kiichi, closes #1299)
 Files:      src/ex_docmd.c, src/testdir/test_filter_cmd.vim
 
 Patch 8.0.0151
@@ -15582,7 +15582,7 @@ Files:      src/json.c, src/testdir/test_json.vim
 
 Patch 8.0.0181
 Problem:    When 'cursorbind' and 'cursorcolumn' are both on, the column
-            highlignt in non-current windows is wrong.
+            highlight in non-current windows is wrong.
 Solution:   Add validate_cursor(). (Masanori Misono, closes #1372)
 Files:      src/move.c
 
@@ -16827,7 +16827,7 @@ Patch 8.0.0388
 Problem:    filtering lines through "cat", without changing the line count,
             changes manual folds.
 Solution:   Change how marks and folds are adjusted. (Matthew Malcomson, from
-            neovim #6194.
+            neovim #6194).
 Files:      src/fold.c, src/testdir/test_fold.vim
 
 Patch 8.0.0389
@@ -17499,7 +17499,7 @@ Files:      src/evalfunc.c, src/if_xcmdsrv.c, src/proto/if_xcmdsrv.pro,
 
 Patch 8.0.0493
 Problem:    Crash with cd command with very long argument.
-Solution:   Check for running out of space. (Dominique pending, closes #1576)
+Solution:   Check for running out of space. (Dominique Pelle, closes #1576)
 Files:      src/testdir/test_alot.vim, src/testdir/test_cd.vim, src/Makefile,
             src/misc2.c
 

runtime/doc/vim.1

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .TH VIM 1 "2006 Apr 11"
 .SH NAME
-vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
+vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmer's text editor
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .br
 .B vim
@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidentally
 overwriting a file.
 If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
 as in ":w!".
-The \-R option also implies the \-n option (see below).
+The \-R option also implies the \-n option (see above).
 The 'readonly' option can be reset with ":set noro".
 See ":help 'readonly'".
 .TP

runtime/doc/vim.man

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ VIM(1)                      General Commands Manual                     VIM(1)
 
 
 NAME
-       vim - Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
+       vim - Vi IMproved, a programmer's text editor
 
 SYNOPSIS
        vim [options] [file ..]
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ OPTIONS
                    dentally overwriting a file.  If you do want to overwrite a
                    file, add an exclamation mark to  the  Ex  command,  as  in
                    ":w!".   The  -R  option  also  implies  the -n option (see
-                   below).  The 'readonly' option  can  be  reset  with  ":set
+                   above).  The 'readonly' option  can  be  reset  with  ":set
                    noro".  See ":help 'readonly'".
 
        -r          List  swap  files,  with  information  about using them for

runtime/doc/visual.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*visual.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Mar 23
+*visual.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -314,8 +314,8 @@ Visual-block Insert						*v_b_I*
 With a blockwise selection, I{string}<ESC> will insert {string} at the start
 of block on every line of the block, provided that the line extends into the
 block.  Thus lines that are short will remain unmodified.  TABs are split to
-retain visual columns.
+retain visual columns.  Works only for adding text to a line, not for
-See |v_b_I_example|.
+deletions.  See |v_b_I_example|.
 
 Visual-block Append						*v_b_A*
 With a blockwise selection, A{string}<ESC> will append {string} to the end of
@@ -331,6 +331,7 @@ See |v_b_A_example|.
 Note: "I" and "A" behave differently for lines that don't extend into the
 selected block.  This was done intentionally, so that you can do it the way
 you want.
+Works only for adding text to a line, not for deletions.
 
 Visual-block change						*v_b_c*
 All selected text in the block will be replaced by the same text string.  When

runtime/doc/windows.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*windows.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Dec 01
+*windows.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Apr 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -222,6 +222,11 @@ CTRL-W ^	Does ":split #", split window in two and edit alternate file.
 		When a count is given, it becomes ":split #N", split window
 		and edit buffer N.
 
+						*CTRL-W_:*
+CTRL-W :	Does the same as typing |:| : edit a command line.  Useful in a
+		terminal window, where all Vim commands must be preceded with
+		CTRL-W or 'termkey'.
+
 Note that the 'splitbelow' and 'splitright' options influence where a new
 window will appear.
 
@@ -339,8 +344,9 @@ CTRL-W CTRL-C						*CTRL-W_CTRL-C*
 							*:hide*
 :hid[e]
 :{count}hid[e]
-		Quit the current window, unless it is the last window on the
+		Without {count}: Quit the current window, unless it is the
-		screen.  For {count} see |:quit| command.
+		last window on the screen.
+		If {count} is given quit the {count} window.
 		
 		The buffer becomes hidden (unless there is another window
 		editing it or 'bufhidden' is "unload", "delete" or "wipe").
@@ -613,7 +619,8 @@ The minimal height and width of a window is set with 'winminheight' and
 41. :buffers		list of buffers
 
 The meaning of [N] depends on the command:
- [N] is number of buffers to go forward/backward on ?2, ?3, and ?4
+ [N] is the number of buffers to go forward/backward on 2/12/22/32,
+     3/13/23/33, and 4/14/24/34
  [N] is an argument number, defaulting to current argument, for 1 and 21
  [N] is a buffer number, defaulting to current buffer, for 11 and 31
  [N] is a count for 19 and 39
@@ -704,7 +711,6 @@ can also get to them with the buffer list commands, like ":bnext".
 		When using the |:tab| modifier each argument is opened in a
 		tab page.  The last window is used if it's empty.
 		Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-		{only available when compiled with a GUI}
 
 ==============================================================================
 8. Do a command in all buffers or windows			*list-repeat*
@@ -725,8 +731,7 @@ can also get to them with the buffer list commands, like ":bnext".
 			the current window.
 			{cmd} can contain '|' to concatenate several commands.
 			{cmd} must not open or close windows or reorder them.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 			Also see |:tabdo|, |:argdo|, |:bufdo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|,
 			|:cfdo| and |:lfdo|
 
@@ -754,8 +759,7 @@ can also get to them with the buffer list commands, like ":bnext".
 			autocommand event is disabled by adding it to
 			'eventignore'.  This considerably speeds up editing
 			each buffer.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not in Vi}
-			|+listcmds| feature}
 			Also see |:tabdo|, |:argdo|, |:windo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|,
 			|:cfdo| and |:lfdo|
 
@@ -968,7 +972,6 @@ is no word under the cursor, and a few other things: >
 A hidden buffer is not displayed in a window, but is still loaded into memory.
 This makes it possible to jump from file to file, without the need to read or
 write the file every time you get another buffer in a window.
-{not available when compiled without the |+listcmds| feature}
 
 							*:buffer-!*
 If the option 'hidden' ('hid') is set, abandoned buffers are kept for all
@@ -1026,6 +1029,9 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 			   displayed in a window |hidden-buffer|
 		   -	a buffer with 'modifiable' off
 		   =	a readonly buffer
+		   R	a terminal buffer with a running job
+		   F	a terminal buffer with a finished job
+		   ?    a terminal buffer without a job: `:terminal NONE`
 		    +	a modified buffer
 		    x   a buffer with read errors
 
@@ -1040,6 +1046,9 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 		     x   buffers with a read error
 		     %   current buffer
 		     #   alternate buffer
+		     R	 terminal buffers with a running job
+		     F	 terminal buffers with a finished job
+		     ?   terminal buffers without a job: `:terminal NONE`
 		Combining flags means they are "and"ed together, e.g.:
 		     h+   hidden buffers which are modified
 		     a+   active buffers which are modified
@@ -1074,10 +1083,8 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 <
 
 :bdelete[!] {bufname}						*E93* *E94*
-		Like ":bdelete[!] [N]", but buffer given by name.  Note that a
+		Like ":bdelete[!] [N]", but buffer given by name, see
-		buffer whose name is a number cannot be referenced by that
+		|{bufname}|.
-		name; use the buffer number instead.  Insert a backslash
-		before a space in a buffer name.
 
 :bdelete[!] N1 N2 ...
 		Do ":bdelete[!]" for buffer N1, N2, etc.  The arguments can be
@@ -1114,10 +1121,8 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 		into a loaded buffer.
 
 :bunload[!] {bufname}
-		Like ":bunload[!] [N]", but buffer given by name.  Note that a
+		Like ":bunload[!] [N]", but buffer given by name.
-		buffer whose name is a number cannot be referenced by that
+		Also see |{bufname}|.
-		name; use the buffer number instead.  Insert a backslash
-		before a space in a buffer name.
 
 :N,Mbunload[!]	Do ":bunload[!]" for all buffers in the range N to M
 		|inclusive|.
@@ -1135,10 +1140,16 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 		list, without setting the 'buflisted' flag.
 		Also see |+cmd|.
 
-:[N]b[uffer][!] [+cmd] {bufname}
+:[N]b[uffer][!] [+cmd] {bufname}				*{bufname}*
-		Edit buffer for {bufname} from the buffer list.  See
+		Edit buffer for {bufname} from the buffer list.  A partial
-		|:buffer-!| for [!].  This will also edit a buffer that is not
+		name also works, so long as it is unique in the list of
-		in the buffer list, without setting the 'buflisted' flag.
+		buffers.
+		Note that a buffer whose name is a number cannot be referenced
+		by that name; use the buffer number instead.
+		Insert a backslash before a space in a buffer name.
+		See |:buffer-!| for [!].
+		This will also edit a buffer that is not in the buffer list,
+		without setting the 'buflisted' flag.
 		Also see |+cmd|.
 
 :[N]sb[uffer] [+cmd] [N]				*:sb* *:sbuffer*
@@ -1150,7 +1161,7 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 		Also see |+cmd|.
 
 :[N]sb[uffer] [+cmd] {bufname}
-		Split window and edit buffer for {bufname} from the buffer
+		Split window and edit buffer for |{bufname}| from the buffer
 		list.  This will also edit a buffer that is not in the buffer
 		list, without setting the 'buflisted' flag.
 		Note: If what you want to do is split the buffer, make a copy
@@ -1272,6 +1283,9 @@ help		Contains a help file.  Will only be created with the |:help|
 		and can't be changed.  The 'buflisted' option will be reset
 		for a help buffer.
 
+terminal	A terminal window buffer, see |terminal|. The contents cannot
+		be read or changed until the job ends.
+
 directory	Displays directory contents.  Can be used by a file explorer
 		plugin.  The buffer is created with these settings: >
 			:setlocal buftype=nowrite

runtime/doc/xxd.1

@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ are all equivalent.
 .PP
 .TP
 .IR \-a " | " \-autoskip
-toggle autoskip: A single '*' replaces nul-lines.  Default off.
+Toggle autoskip: A single '*' replaces nul-lines.  Default off.
 .TP
 .IR \-b " | " \-bits
 Switch to bits (binary digits) dump, rather than hexdump.
@@ -67,10 +67,13 @@ followed by an ascii (or ebcdic) representation. The command line switches
 \-r, \-p, \-i do not work with this mode.
 .TP
 .IR "\-c cols " | " \-cols cols"
-format
+Format
 .RI < cols >
 octets per line. Default 16 (\-i: 12, \-ps: 30, \-b: 6). Max 256.
 .TP
+.IR \-C " | " \-capitalize
+Capitalize variable names in C include file style, when using \-i.
+.TP
 .IR \-E " | " \-EBCDIC
 Change the character encoding in the righthand column from ASCII to EBCDIC.
 This does not change the hexadecimal representation. The option is
@@ -87,7 +90,7 @@ The command line switches
 \-r, \-p, \-i do not work with this mode.
 .TP
 .IR "\-g bytes " | " \-groupsize bytes"
-separate the output of every
+Separate the output of every
 .RI < bytes >
 bytes (two hex characters or eight bit-digits each) by a whitespace.
 Specify
@@ -98,28 +101,28 @@ in normal mode, \fI4\fP in little-endian mode and \fI1\fP in bits mode.
 Grouping does not apply to postscript or include style.
 .TP
 .IR \-h " | " \-help
-print a summary of available commands and exit.  No hex dumping is performed.
+Print a summary of available commands and exit.  No hex dumping is performed.
 .TP
 .IR \-i " | " \-include
-output in C include file style. A complete static array definition is written
+Output in C include file style. A complete static array definition is written
 (named after the input file), unless xxd reads from stdin.
 .TP
 .IR "\-l len " | " \-len len"
-stop after writing
+Stop after writing
 .RI  < len >
 octets.
 .TP
 .I \-o offset
-add
+Add
 .RI < offset >
 to the displayed file position.
 .TP
 .IR \-p " | " \-ps " | " \-postscript " | " \-plain
-output in postscript continuous hexdump style. Also known as plain hexdump
+Output in postscript continuous hexdump style. Also known as plain hexdump
 style.
 .TP
 .IR \-r " | " \-revert
-reverse operation: convert (or patch) hexdump into binary.
+Reverse operation: convert (or patch) hexdump into binary.
 If not writing to stdout, xxd writes into its output file without truncating
 it. Use the combination
 .I \-r \-p
@@ -135,7 +138,7 @@ revert with
 added to file positions found in hexdump.
 .TP
 .I \-s [+][\-]seek
-start at
+Start at
 .RI < seek >
 bytes abs. (or rel.) infile offset.
 \fI+ \fRindicates that the seek is relative to the current stdin file position
@@ -145,10 +148,10 @@ should be that many characters from the end of the input (or if combined with
 Without \-s option, xxd starts at the current file position.
 .TP
 .I \-u
-use upper case hex letters. Default is lower case.
+Use upper case hex letters. Default is lower case.
 .TP
 .IR \-v " | " \-version
-show version string.
+Show version string.
 .SH CAVEATS
 .PP
 .I xxd \-r

runtime/doc/xxd.man

@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ OPTIONS
        notation.  Thus -c8, -c 8, -c 010 and -cols 8 are all equivalent.
 
        -a | -autoskip
-              toggle autoskip: A single '*' replaces nul-lines.  Default off.
+              Toggle autoskip: A single '*' replaces nul-lines.  Default off.
 
        -b | -bits
               Switch to bits (binary digits) dump, rather than hexdump.   This
@@ -41,9 +41,13 @@ OPTIONS
               mode.
 
        -c cols | -cols cols
-              format  <cols> octets per line. Default 16 (-i: 12, -ps: 30, -b:
+              Format  <cols> octets per line. Default 16 (-i: 12, -ps: 30, -b:
               6). Max 256.
 
+       -C | -capitalize
+              Capitalize variable names in C include file  style,  when  using
+              -i.
+
        -E | -EBCDIC
               Change the character encoding in the righthand column from ASCII
               to EBCDIC.  This does not change the hexadecimal representation.
@@ -52,41 +56,41 @@ OPTIONS
        -e     Switch to little-endian hexdump.  This option treats byte groups
               as words in little-endian byte order.  The default grouping of 4
               bytes may be changed using -g.  This option only applies to hex‐
-              dump,  leaving  the  ASCII (or EBCDIC) representation unchanged.
+              dump, leaving the ASCII (or  EBCDIC)  representation  unchanged.
               The command line switches -r, -p, -i do not work with this mode.
 
        -g bytes | -groupsize bytes
-              separate the output of every <bytes> bytes (two  hex  characters
+              Separate  the  output of every <bytes> bytes (two hex characters
               or eight bit-digits each) by a whitespace.  Specify -g 0 to sup‐
               press grouping.  <Bytes> defaults to 2 in normal mode, 4 in lit‐
-              tle-endian  mode and 1 in bits mode.  Grouping does not apply to
+              tle-endian mode and 1 in bits mode.  Grouping does not apply  to
               postscript or include style.
 
        -h | -help
-              print a summary of available commands and exit.  No hex  dumping
+              Print  a summary of available commands and exit.  No hex dumping
               is performed.
 
        -i | -include
-              output  in C include file style. A complete static array defini‐
+              Output in C include file style. A complete static array  defini‐
-              tion is written (named after the input file), unless  xxd  reads
+              tion  is  written (named after the input file), unless xxd reads
               from stdin.
 
        -l len | -len len
-              stop after writing <len> octets.
+              Stop after writing <len> octets.
 
        -o offset
-              add <offset> to the displayed file position.
+              Add <offset> to the displayed file position.
 
        -p | -ps | -postscript | -plain
-              output  in  postscript  continuous  hexdump style. Also known as
+              Output in postscript continuous hexdump  style.  Also  known  as
               plain hexdump style.
 
        -r | -revert
-              reverse operation: convert (or patch) hexdump into  binary.   If
+              Reverse  operation:  convert (or patch) hexdump into binary.  If
-              not  writing  to stdout, xxd writes into its output file without
+              not writing to stdout, xxd writes into its output  file  without
               truncating it. Use the combination -r -p to read plain hexadeci‐
               mal dumps without line number information and without a particu‐
-              lar column layout. Additional  Whitespace  and  line-breaks  are
+              lar  column  layout.  Additional  Whitespace and line-breaks are
               allowed anywhere.
 
        -seek offset
@@ -94,34 +98,34 @@ OPTIONS
               found in hexdump.
 
        -s [+][-]seek
-              start at <seek> bytes abs. (or rel.) infile offset.  + indicates
+              Start at <seek> bytes abs. (or rel.) infile offset.  + indicates
-              that  the  seek  is  relative to the current stdin file position
+              that the seek is relative to the  current  stdin  file  position
               (meaningless when not reading from stdin).  - indicates that the
-              seek  should  be  that many characters from the end of the input
+              seek should be that many characters from the end  of  the  input
               (or if combined with +: before the current stdin file position).
               Without -s option, xxd starts at the current file position.
 
-       -u     use upper case hex letters. Default is lower case.
+       -u     Use upper case hex letters. Default is lower case.
 
        -v | -version
-              show version string.
+              Show version string.
 
 CAVEATS
        xxd -r has some builtin magic while evaluating line number information.
-       If the output file is seekable, then the linenumbers at  the  start  of
+       If  the  output  file is seekable, then the linenumbers at the start of
-       each  hexdump  line may be out of order, lines may be missing, or over‐
+       each hexdump line may be out of order, lines may be missing,  or  over‐
-       lapping. In these cases xxd will lseek(2) to the next position. If  the
+       lapping.  In these cases xxd will lseek(2) to the next position. If the
-       output  file  is  not  seekable,  only  gaps are allowed, which will be
+       output file is not seekable, only  gaps  are  allowed,  which  will  be
        filled by null-bytes.
 
        xxd -r never generates parse errors. Garbage is silently skipped.
 
-       When editing hexdumps, please note that xxd -r skips everything on  the
+       When  editing hexdumps, please note that xxd -r skips everything on the
        input line after reading enough columns of hexadecimal data (see option
-       -c). This also means, that changes to the printable ascii  (or  ebcdic)
+       -c).  This  also means, that changes to the printable ascii (or ebcdic)
-       columns  are  always  ignored.  Reverting a plain (or postscript) style
+       columns are always ignored. Reverting a  plain  (or  postscript)  style
-       hexdump with xxd -r -p does not depend on the correct  number  of  col‐
+       hexdump  with  xxd  -r -p does not depend on the correct number of col‐
-       umns.  Here  anything  that  looks  like a pair of hex-digits is inter‐
+       umns. Here anything that looks like a  pair  of  hex-digits  is  inter‐
        preted.
 
        Note the difference between
@@ -129,28 +133,28 @@ CAVEATS
        and
        % xxd -i < file
 
-       xxd -s +seek may be different from xxd -s seek, as lseek(2) is used  to
+       xxd  -s +seek may be different from xxd -s seek, as lseek(2) is used to
        "rewind" input.  A '+' makes a difference if the input source is stdin,
-       and if stdin's file position is not at the start of  the  file  by  the
+       and  if  stdin's  file  position is not at the start of the file by the
-       time  xxd  is  started and given its input.  The following examples may
+       time xxd is started and given its input.  The  following  examples  may
        help to clarify (or further confuse!)...
 
-       Rewind stdin before reading; needed because the `cat' has already  read
+       Rewind  stdin before reading; needed because the `cat' has already read
        to the end of stdin.
        % sh -c "cat > plain_copy; xxd -s 0 > hex_copy" < file
 
-       Hexdump  from  file  position  0x480 (=1024+128) onwards.  The `+' sign
+       Hexdump from file position 0x480 (=1024+128)  onwards.   The  `+'  sign
        means "relative to the current position", thus the `128' adds to the 1k
        where dd left off.
-       %  sh -c "dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd -s +128 > hex_snippet"
+       % sh -c "dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd -s +128 >  hex_snippet"
        < file
 
        Hexdump from file position 0x100 ( = 1024-768) on.
        % sh -c "dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd -s +-768 > hex_snippet"
        < file
 
-       However,  this is a rare situation and the use of `+' is rarely needed.
+       However, this is a rare situation and the use of `+' is rarely  needed.
-       The author prefers to monitor the  effect  of  xxd  with  strace(1)  or
+       The  author  prefers  to  monitor  the  effect of xxd with strace(1) or
        truss(1), whenever -s is used.
 
 EXAMPLES
@@ -194,7 +198,7 @@ EXAMPLES
        % xxd -s 0x36 -l 13 -c 13 xxd.1
        0000036: 3235 7468 204d 6179 2031 3939 36  25th May 1996
 
-       Create  a  65537 byte file with all bytes 0x00, except for the last one
+       Create a 65537 byte file with all bytes 0x00, except for the  last  one
        which is 'A' (hex 0x41).
        % echo "010000: 41" | xxd -r > file
 
@@ -204,7 +208,7 @@ EXAMPLES
        *
        000fffc: 0000 0000 40                   ....A
 
-       Create a 1 byte file containing a single  'A'  character.   The  number
+       Create  a  1  byte  file containing a single 'A' character.  The number
        after '-r -s' adds to the linenumbers found in the file; in effect, the
        leading bytes are suppressed.
        % echo "010000: 41" | xxd -r -s -0x10000 > file
@@ -245,7 +249,7 @@ SEE ALSO
        uuencode(1), uudecode(1), patch(1)
 
 WARNINGS
-       The  tools  weirdness matches its creators brain.  Use entirely at your
+       The tools weirdness matches its creators brain.  Use entirely  at  your
        own risk. Copy files. Trace it. Become a wizard.
 
 VERSION

runtime/evim.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim script for Evim key bindings
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2016 Jul 24
+" Last Change:	2017 Sep 20
 
 " Don't use Vi-compatible mode.
 set nocompatible
@@ -67,8 +67,10 @@ endif " has("autocmd")
 "
 " The matchit plugin makes the % command work better, but it is not backwards
 " compatible.
+" The ! means the package won't be loaded right away but when plugins are
+" loaded during initialization.
 if has('syntax') && has('eval')
-  packadd matchit
+  packadd! matchit
 endif
 
 " vim: set sw=2 :

runtime/ftplugin/c.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2016 Jun 12
+" Last Change:	2017 Sep 28
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
@@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ if has("vms")
 endif
 
 " When the matchit plugin is loaded, this makes the % command skip parens and
-" braces in comments.
+" braces in comments properly.
-let b:match_words = &matchpairs . ',^\s*#\s*if\(\|def\|ndef\)\>:^\s*#\s*elif\>:^\s*#\s*else\>:^\s*#\s*endif\>'
+let b:match_words = '^\s*#\s*if\(\|def\|ndef\)\>:^\s*#\s*elif\>:^\s*#\s*else\>:^\s*#\s*endif\>'
 let b:match_skip = 's:comment\|string\|character\|special'
 
 " Win32 can filter files in the browse dialog

runtime/ftplugin/chicken.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+" CHICKEN-specific Vim customizations
+" Last Change: 2018-03-05
+" Author: Evan Hanson <evhan@foldling.org>
+" Maintainer: Evan Hanson <evhan@foldling.org>
+" URL: https://foldling.org/vim/ftplugin/chicken.vim
+" Notes: These are supplemental settings, to be loaded after the core
+" Scheme ftplugin file (ftplugin/scheme.vim). Enable it by setting
+" b:is_chicken=1 and filetype=scheme.
+
+if !exists('b:did_scheme_ftplugin')
+  finish
+endif
+
+setl keywordprg=chicken-doc
+
+setl lispwords+=and-let*
+setl lispwords+=compiler-typecase
+setl lispwords+=condition-case
+setl lispwords+=define-compiler-syntax
+setl lispwords+=define-constant
+setl lispwords+=define-external
+setl lispwords+=define-for-syntax
+setl lispwords+=define-foreign-type
+setl lispwords+=define-inline
+setl lispwords+=define-location
+setl lispwords+=define-record
+setl lispwords+=define-record-printer
+setl lispwords+=define-specialization
+setl lispwords+=fluid-let
+setl lispwords+=foreign-lambda*
+setl lispwords+=foreign-primitive
+setl lispwords+=foreign-safe-lambda*
+setl lispwords+=functor
+setl lispwords+=handle-exceptions
+setl lispwords+=let-compiler-syntax
+setl lispwords+=let-location
+setl lispwords+=let-optionals
+setl lispwords+=let-optionals*
+setl lispwords+=letrec-values
+setl lispwords+=match
+setl lispwords+=match-let
+setl lispwords+=match-let*
+setl lispwords+=match-letrec
+setl lispwords+=module
+setl lispwords+=receive
+setl lispwords+=set!-values
+setl lispwords+=test-group
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = b:undo_ftplugin . ' keywordprg<'
+
+if exists('g:loaded_matchit') && !exists('b:match_words')
+  let b:match_words = '#>:<#'
+  let b:undo_ftplugin = b:undo_ftplugin . ' | unlet! b:match_words'
+endif

runtime/ftplugin/cmake.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin
+" Language:    CMake
+" Maintainer:  Keith Smiley <keithbsmiley@gmail.com>
+" Last Change: 2017 Dec 24
+
+" Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+
+" Don't load another plugin for this buffer
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl commentstring<"
+
+setlocal commentstring=#\ %s

runtime/ftplugin/debchangelog.vim

@@ -1,22 +1,22 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file (GUI menu, folding and completion)
 " Language:     Debian Changelog
-" Maintainer:   Debian Vim Maintainers <pkg-vim-maintainers@lists.alioth.debian.org>
+" Maintainer:   Debian Vim Maintainers
 " Former Maintainers:   Michael Piefel <piefel@informatik.hu-berlin.de>
 "                       Stefano Zacchiroli <zack@debian.org>
-" Last Change:  2014-01-31
+" Last Change:  2018-01-28
 " License:      Vim License
-" URL:          http://hg.debian.org/hg/pkg-vim/vim/file/unstable/runtime/ftplugin/debchangelog.vim
+" URL:          https://salsa.debian.org/vim-team/vim-debian/blob/master/ftplugin/debchangelog.vim
 
 " Bug completion requires apt-listbugs installed for Debian packages or
 " python-launchpadlib installed for Ubuntu packages
 
-if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
   finish
 endif
 let b:did_ftplugin=1
 
 " {{{1 Local settings (do on every load)
-if exists("g:debchangelog_fold_enable")
+if exists('g:debchangelog_fold_enable')
   setlocal foldmethod=expr
   setlocal foldexpr=DebGetChangelogFold(v:lnum)
   setlocal foldtext=DebChangelogFoldText()
@@ -28,10 +28,10 @@ setlocal tw=78
 setlocal comments=f:* 
 
 " Clean unloading
-let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal tw< comments< foldmethod< foldexpr< foldtext<"
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal tw< comments< foldmethod< foldexpr< foldtext<'
 " }}}1
 
-if exists("g:did_changelog_ftplugin")
+if exists('g:did_changelog_ftplugin')
   finish
 endif
 
@@ -44,41 +44,41 @@ let g:did_changelog_ftplugin = 1
 " Returns full name, either from $DEBFULLNAME or debianfullname.
 " TODO Is there a way to determine name from anywhere else?
 function <SID>FullName()
-    if exists("$DEBFULLNAME")
+    if exists('$DEBFULLNAME')
 	return $DEBFULLNAME
-    elseif exists("g:debianfullname")
+    elseif exists('g:debianfullname')
 	return g:debianfullname
     else
-	return "Your Name"
+	return 'Your Name'
     endif
 endfunction
 
 " Returns email address, from $DEBEMAIL, $EMAIL or debianemail.
 function <SID>Email()
-    if exists("$DEBEMAIL")
+    if exists('$DEBEMAIL')
 	return $DEBEMAIL
-    elseif exists("$EMAIL")
+    elseif exists('$EMAIL')
 	return $EMAIL
-    elseif exists("g:debianemail")
+    elseif exists('g:debianemail')
 	return g:debianemail
     else
-	return "your@email.address"
+	return 'your@email.address'
     endif
 endfunction
 
 " Returns date in RFC822 format.
 function <SID>Date()
     let savelang = v:lc_time
-    execute "language time C"
+    execute 'language time C'
-    let dateandtime = strftime("%a, %d %b %Y %X %z")
+    let dateandtime = strftime('%a, %d %b %Y %X %z')
-    execute "language time " . savelang
+    execute 'language time ' . savelang
     return dateandtime
 endfunction
 
 function <SID>WarnIfNotUnfinalised()
-    if match(getline("."), " -- [[:alpha:]][[:alnum:].]")!=-1
+    if match(getline('.'), ' -- [[:alpha:]][[:alnum:].]')!=-1
 	echohl WarningMsg
-	echo "The entry has not been unfinalised before editing."
+	echo 'The entry has not been unfinalised before editing.'
 	echohl None
 	return 1
     endif
@@ -86,10 +86,10 @@ function <SID>WarnIfNotUnfinalised()
 endfunction
 
 function <SID>Finalised()
-    let savelinenum = line(".")
+    let savelinenum = line('.')
-    normal 1G
+    1
-    call search("^ -- ")
+    call search('^ -- ')
-    if match(getline("."), " -- [[:alpha:]][[:alnum:].]")!=-1
+    if match(getline('.'), ' -- [[:alpha:]][[:alnum:].]')!=-1
 	let returnvalue = 1
     else
 	let returnvalue = 0
@@ -109,54 +109,54 @@ function NewVersion()
     amenu disable Changelog.Unfinalise
     amenu enable Changelog.Finalise
     call append(0, substitute(getline(1), '-\([[:digit:]]\+\))', '-$$\1)', ''))
-    call append(1, "")
+    call append(1, '')
-    call append(2, "")
+    call append(2, '')
-    call append(3, " -- ")
+    call append(3, ' -- ')
-    call append(4, "")
+    call append(4, '')
-    call Urgency("low")
+    call Urgency('low')
-    normal 1G0
+    normal! 1G0
-    call search(")")
+    call search(')')
-    normal h
+    normal! h
-    normal 

+    normal! 

     call setline(1, substitute(getline(1), '-\$\$', '-', ''))
-    if exists("g:debchangelog_fold_enable")
+    if exists('g:debchangelog_fold_enable')
         foldopen
     endif
     call AddEntry()
 endfunction
 
 function AddEntry()
-    normal 1G
+    1
-    call search("^ -- ")
+    call search('^ -- ')
-    normal kk
+    .-2
-    call append(".", "  * ")
+    call append('.', '  * ')
-    normal jjj
+    .+3
     let warn=<SID>WarnIfNotUnfinalised()
-    normal kk
+    .-2
     if warn
 	echohl MoreMsg
-	call input("Hit ENTER")
+	call input('Hit ENTER')
 	echohl None
     endif
     startinsert!
 endfunction
 
 function CloseBug()
-    normal 1G
+    1
-    call search("^ -- ")
+    call search('^ -- ')
     let warn=<SID>WarnIfNotUnfinalised()
-    normal kk
+    .-2
-    call append(".", "  *  (closes: #" . input("Bug number to close: ") . ")")
+    call append('.', '  *  (closes: #' . input('Bug number to close: ') . ')')
-    normal j^ll
+    normal! j^ll
     startinsert
 endfunction
 
 function Distribution(dist)
-    call setline(1, substitute(getline(1), ')  *\%(UNRELEASED\|\l\+\);', ") " . a:dist . ";", ""))
+    call setline(1, substitute(getline(1), ')  *\%(UNRELEASED\|\l\+\);', ') ' . a:dist . ';', ''))
 endfunction
 
 function Urgency(urg)
-    call setline(1, substitute(getline(1), "urgency=.*$", "urgency=" . a:urg, ""))
+    call setline(1, substitute(getline(1), 'urgency=.*$', 'urgency=' . a:urg, ''))
 endfunction
 
 function <SID>UnfinaliseMenu()
@@ -172,9 +172,9 @@ endfunction
 
 function Unfinalise()
     call <SID>UnfinaliseMenu()
-    normal 1G
+    1
-    call search("^ -- ")
+    call search('^ -- ')
-    call setline(".", " -- ")
+    call setline('.', ' -- ')
 endfunction
 
 function <SID>FinaliseMenu()
@@ -190,9 +190,9 @@ endfunction
 
 function Finalise()
     call <SID>FinaliseMenu()
-    normal 1G
+    1
-    call search("^ -- ")
+    call search('^ -- ')
-    call setline(".", " -- " . <SID>FullName() . " <" . <SID>Email() . ">  " . <SID>Date())
+    call setline('.', ' -- ' . <SID>FullName() . ' <' . <SID>Email() . '>  ' . <SID>Date())
 endfunction
 
 
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ function! s:getAuthor(zonestart, zoneend)
   let linepos = a:zoneend
   while linepos >= a:zonestart
     let line = getline(linepos)
-    if line =~ '^ --'
+    if line =~# '^ --'
       return substitute(line, '^ --\s*\([^<]\+\)\s*.*', '\1', '')
     endif
     let linepos -= 1
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ function! DebGetPkgSrcName(lineno)
   let pkgname = ''
   while lineidx > 0
     let curline = getline(lineidx)
-    if curline =~ '^\S'
+    if curline =~# '^\S'
       let pkgname = matchlist(curline, '^\(\S\+\).*$')[1]
       break
     endif
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ function! DebGetPkgSrcName(lineno)
 endfunction
 
 function! DebChangelogFoldText()
-  if v:folddashes == '-'  " changelog entry fold
+  if v:folddashes ==# '-'  " changelog entry fold
     return foldtext() . ' -- ' . s:getAuthor(v:foldstart, v:foldend) . ' '
   endif
   return foldtext()
@@ -272,19 +272,19 @@ endfunction
 
 function! DebGetChangelogFold(lnum)
   let line = getline(a:lnum)
-  if line =~ '^\w\+'
+  if line =~# '^\w\+'
     return '>1' " beginning of a changelog entry
   endif
-  if line =~ '^\s\+\[.*\]'
+  if line =~# '^\s\+\[.*\]'
     return '>2' " beginning of an author-specific chunk
   endif
-  if line =~ '^ --'
+  if line =~# '^ --'
     return '1'
   endif
   return '='
 endfunction
 
-if exists("g:debchangelog_fold_enable")
+if exists('g:debchangelog_fold_enable')
   silent! foldopen!   " unfold the entry the cursor is on (usually the first one)
 endif
 
@@ -305,13 +305,13 @@ fun! DebCompleteBugs(findstart, base)
     let try_colidx = col('.') - 1
     let colidx = -1 " default to no-completion-possible
 
-    while try_colidx > 0 && line[try_colidx - 1] =~ '\s\|\d\|#\|,\|:'
+    while try_colidx > 0 && line[try_colidx - 1] =~# '\s\|\d\|#\|,\|:'
       let try_colidx = try_colidx - 1
-      if line[try_colidx] == '#' && colidx == -1
+      if line[try_colidx] ==# '#' && colidx == -1
         " found hash, where we complete from:
         let colidx = try_colidx
-      elseif line[try_colidx] == ':'
+      elseif line[try_colidx] ==# ':'
-        if try_colidx > 1 && strpart(line, try_colidx - 2, 3) =~ '\clp:'
+        if try_colidx > 1 && strpart(line, try_colidx - 2, 3) =~? '\clp:'
           let g:debchangelog_complete_mode = 'lp'
         endif
         break
@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ fun! DebCompleteBugs(findstart, base)
     return colidx
   else " return matches:
     let bug_lines = []
-    if g:debchangelog_complete_mode == 'lp'
+    if g:debchangelog_complete_mode ==? 'lp'
       if ! has('python')
         echoerr 'vim must be built with Python support to use LP bug completion'
         return
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ EOF
     for line in bug_lines
       let parts = matchlist(line, '^\s*\(#\S\+\)\s*-\s*\(.*\)$')
       " filter only those which match a:base:
-      if parts[1] !~ "^" . a:base
+      if parts[1] !~ '^' . a:base
         continue
       endif
       let completion = {}

runtime/ftplugin/debcontrol.vim

@@ -1,18 +1,18 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file (GUI menu and folding)
 " Language:     Debian control files
-" Maintainer:   Debian Vim Maintainers <pkg-vim-maintainers@lists.alioth.debian.org>
+" Maintainer:   Debian Vim Maintainers
 " Former Maintainer:    Pierre Habouzit <madcoder@debian.org>
-" Last Change:  2008-03-08
+" Last Change:  2018-01-28
-" URL:          http://hg.debian.org/hg/pkg-vim/vim/raw-file/tip/runtime/ftplugin/debcontrol.vim
+" URL:          https://salsa.debian.org/vim-team/vim-debian/blob/master/ftplugin/debcontrol.vim
 
 " Do these settings once per buffer
-if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
   finish
 endif
 let b:did_ftplugin=1
 
 " {{{1 Local settings (do on every load)
-if exists("g:debcontrol_fold_enable")
+if exists('g:debcontrol_fold_enable')
   setlocal foldmethod=expr
   setlocal foldexpr=DebControlFold(v:lnum)
   setlocal foldtext=DebControlFoldText()
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ endif
 setlocal textwidth=0
 
 " Clean unloading
-let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal tw< foldmethod< foldexpr< foldtext<"
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal tw< foldmethod< foldexpr< foldtext<'
 
 " }}}1
 
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ function! s:getField(f, lnum)
   while line !~ '^'.a:f.':'
     let fwdsteps += 1
     let line = getline(a:lnum + fwdsteps)
-    if line == ''
+    if line ==# ''
       return 'unknown'
     endif
   endwhile
@@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ function! s:getField(f, lnum)
 endfunction
 
 function! DebControlFoldText()
-  if v:folddashes == '-'  " debcontrol entry fold
+  if v:folddashes ==# '-'  " debcontrol entry fold
     let type = substitute(getline(v:foldstart), ':.*', '', '')
-    if type == 'Source'
+    if type ==# 'Source'
       let ftext = substitute(foldtext(), ' *Source: *', ' ', '')
       return ftext . ' -- ' . s:getField('Maintainer', v:foldstart) . ' '
     endif
@@ -56,11 +56,11 @@ endfunction
 function! DebControlFold(l)
 
   " This is for not merging blank lines around folds to them
-  if getline(a:l) =~ '^Source:'
+  if getline(a:l) =~# '^Source:'
     return '>1'
   endif
 
-  if getline(a:l) =~ '^Package:'
+  if getline(a:l) =~# '^Package:'
     return '>1'
   endif
 

runtime/ftplugin/gdb.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:	gdb
+" Maintainer:	Michaël Peeters <NOSPAMm.vim@noekeon.org>
+" Last Changed: 26 Oct 2017
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin") | finish | endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+setlocal commentstring=#%s
+
+" Undo the stuff we changed.
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal cms<"

runtime/ftplugin/man.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	man
 " Maintainer:	SungHyun Nam <goweol@gmail.com>
-" Last Change: 	2017 Jan 18
+" Last Change: 	2018 May 2
 
 " To make the ":Man" command available before editing a manual page, source
 " this script from your startup vimrc file.
@@ -15,12 +15,6 @@ if &filetype == "man"
   endif
   let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 
-  " Ensure Vim is not recursively invoked (man-db does this)
-  " when doing ctrl-[ on a man page reference.
-  if exists("$MANPAGER")
-    let $MANPAGER = ""
-  endif
-
   " allow dot and dash in manual page name.
   setlocal iskeyword+=\.,-
 
@@ -45,7 +39,7 @@ if &filetype == "man"
 endif
 
 if exists(":Man") != 2
-  com -nargs=+ Man call s:GetPage(<f-args>)
+  com -nargs=+ -complete=shellcmd Man call s:GetPage(<f-args>)
   nmap <Leader>K :call <SID>PreGetPage(0)<CR>
   nmap <Plug>ManPreGetPage :call <SID>PreGetPage(0)<CR>
 endif
@@ -170,22 +164,34 @@ func <SID>GetPage(...)
   setl buftype=nofile noswapfile
 
   setl ma nonu nornu nofen
-  silent exec "norm 1GdG"
+  silent exec "norm! 1GdG"
   let unsetwidth = 0
   if empty($MANWIDTH)
     let $MANWIDTH = winwidth(0)
     let unsetwidth = 1
   endif
-  silent exec "r !man ".s:GetCmdArg(sect, page)." | col -b"
+
+  " Ensure Vim is not recursively invoked (man-db does this) when doing ctrl-[
+  " on a man page reference by unsetting MANPAGER.
+  " Some versions of env(1) do not support the '-u' option, and in such case
+  " we set MANPAGER=cat.
+  if !exists('s:env_has_u')
+    call system('env -u x true')
+    let s:env_has_u = (v:shell_error == 0)
+  endif
+  let env_cmd = s:env_has_u ? 'env -u MANPAGER' : 'env MANPAGER=cat'
+  let man_cmd = env_cmd . ' man ' . s:GetCmdArg(sect, page) . ' | col -b'
+  silent exec "r !" . man_cmd
+
   if unsetwidth
     let $MANWIDTH = ''
   endif
   " Remove blank lines from top and bottom.
   while getline(1) =~ '^\s*$'
-    silent keepj norm ggdd
+    silent keepj norm! ggdd
   endwhile
   while getline('$') =~ '^\s*$'
-    silent keepj norm Gdd
+    silent keepj norm! Gdd
   endwhile
   1
   setl ft=man nomod
@@ -202,7 +208,7 @@ func <SID>PopPage()
     exec "let s:man_tag_col=s:man_tag_col_".s:man_tag_depth
     exec s:man_tag_buf."b"
     exec s:man_tag_lin
-    exec "norm ".s:man_tag_col."|"
+    exec "norm! ".s:man_tag_col."|"
     exec "unlet s:man_tag_buf_".s:man_tag_depth
     exec "unlet s:man_tag_lin_".s:man_tag_depth
     exec "unlet s:man_tag_col_".s:man_tag_depth